JUNO I Technical Manual (87 80 014C - 03!12!14)

EN
JUNO I
image acquisition and processing system with
digital detector for fluoroscopy and radiography
series 02
JUNO I
series 02
CAUTION:
Read all the enclosed documents before using the EM equipment
Part 0 : PREFACE
CONTENTS
pages rev. date
0.1 to 0.9 B 30/08/13

1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT
2 IDENTIFICATION / SERIAL NUMBERS
3 LIABILITY STATEMENT
4 CONFORMITY AND REFERENCE ADDRESS
revision B PART 0 page I - 1

Manual preface VILLA_PHILIPS .doc
The JUNO I (hereafter called “the system”) is a digital image acquisition system in fluoroscopy and radiography mode
that uses a large-size PIXIUM RF4343 solid state detector (43 x 43 cm), specifically designed for use in general
diagnostic X-ray rooms and emergency rooms.
It offers real-time diagnostic X-ray scans of the skeleton, gastrointestinal organs and urogenital apparatus and, with the
DSA option, also the peripheral vascular apparatus.
The images acquired are saved in the system memory (HD), shown on the high-resolution monitor and can also be sent
to a diagnostic workstation (or general archive) via DICOM network.
JUNO I lets you replace image systems using image intensifying (I.I.) tubes and TV cameras, as well as
radiography systems with conventional or phosphorus (CR) film cassette systems.
External interface:
- USB 2.0 for saving images to CD-ROM / DVD,
- Ethernet 10/100/1000 BASE T for connection to networks using the DICOM protocol.
JUNO I also lets you acquire images from the a second Wireless F.P. detector (optional). This lets you acquire single-
shot radiography images either in wireless mode and via a power/transmission cable.
2 IDENTIFICATION / SERIAL NUMBERS
The system is identified by a rating/serial number plate at the back of the cabinet. A copy of this plate is also
found inside the cabinet, on the power supply box, next to the power switch.
The serial number is also marked on the Main Controller module.
MAIN CONTROLLER for

JUNO I XX XXX 87 XX
Inside, on Main Controller module
JUNO I 4695451300
Line : 230V~50/60Hz - system : 700VA

- detector : 130VA
AAAA-MM
XX XXX 87 XX
ATS
Via A. Volta,10 - 24060 Torre de' Roveri (BG)-ITALY
For/Per : Villa Sistemi Medicali
Via delle Azalee,3 - 20090 Buccinasco (MI)-ITALY
This product complies with FDA radiation
C US performance standards 21 cfr subchapter
0051 j, in effect at date of manufacture
255691
- n°1 label copy is outside (see picture ).

- n°1 label copy is inside, next to the power switch
edition B PART 0 page I - 2

2.1 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION FOR TRACEABILITY
The system components are identified with their own serial numbers as follows:
Component Serial no. Position Figure
Solid state detector Supplier’s Visible, on device Fig. 1

Detector processing unit Supplier’s Visible, on device Fig. 2
Image processor Supplier’s On front of processor Fig. 3
(accessed by opening cabinet)
LCD working monitor Supplier’s On rear protection cover Fig. 4
Dose Area Meter Supplier’s visible, on device Fig. 5
Ionising chamber Supplier’s visible, on device Fig. 6
DRX1 wireless F.P. solid state Supplier’s visible, on device Fig. 7
detector
PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless F.P. solid Supplier’s visible, on device Fig. 8
state detector
The figures below show the position of the component serial number plates.
Solid state detector

serial number
Fig. 1
PIXIUM RF4343
Detector
PU RF4343 serial number
Fig. 2
PU RF4343 Detector Processing Unit
PIDRF43 serial number
Fig. 3
PIDRF43 Image Processor

Monitor serial number
(on rear protection cover)
Fig. 4
Working monitor
DAM serial number
Fig. 5
Dose Area Meter
Ionising chamber serial number
Fig. 6
Ionising chamber

DRX 1 wireless F.P. detector serial
number (on rear)
Fig. 7
DRX 1 wireless F.P. detector
3543EZ wireless F.P. detector serial

number (on rear)
Fig. 8
3543EZ wireless F.P. detector
3 LIABILITY STATEMENT
* The manufacturer can only be held liable for the safety of its products if the product maintenance,
repair or modification is carried out by the manufacturer or by qualified and suitably trained
personnel.
* The manufacturer cannot be held liable for any malfunction, damage or danger resulting from
improper use of the system or from non-observance of the maintenance regulations.
* The user of the equipment fitted with the system has sole liability for checking that the system is
used solely by duly trained and qualified personnel.

4 CONFORMITY AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
The system is produced by:
ATS Applicazione Tecnologie Speciali srl

via A. Volta, 10
24060 Torre de’ Roveri (BG)
TEL. +39/035584311
FAX +39/035580220
e-mail: support@atsmed.it
http://www.atsmed.it/
Distribuited by: VILLA Sistemi Medicali

Via delle Azalee, 3
20090 BUCCINASCO (MI) ITALY
tel: +39 02 488591
fax: +39 02 48859222
e-mail: service_support@villasm.com
The equipment conforms to European Directive 93/42/EEC and subsequent amendments, in particular
2007/47/EEC. The norms applicable are:
EN 60 601-1 (3^ ed.)

EN 60 601-1-2 (2^ ed.)
EN ISO 14971 : 2004
EN 60366 (1^ ed.)
EN 60601-1- 6 (3^ ed.)

Responsibility for compliance with EEC 93/42: ATS
Via A. Volta, 10
24060 TORRE DE’ ROVERI (BG) - ITALY
tel. ++39 035 584311
fax ++39 035 580220
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Technical manual
EN code 87 80 014C
LIST OF CONTENTS
PART 0: LIST OF CONTENTS

PART 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
PART 2: INSTALLATION
PART 3: ACCEPTANCE
PART 4: ADJUSTMENTS
PART 5: MAINTENANCE
PART 6: SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS
(PIXIUM RF4343 + WIRELESS DRX1)
PART 7: SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS
(PIXIUM RF4343 + WIRELESS PIXIUM 3543EZ)
TECHNICAL MANUAL
issued on 08/03/10
revised on 03/12/14
series 02
Each part is preceded by its own list of contents, with an indication of the most recent
revision for each paragraph.
GENERAL INDEX
code 87 80 014 C - Mti 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Part 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
LIST OF CONTENTS
page rev. date
CONTENTS C-1 to C-2 H 03/12/14
1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT 1.1 to 1.8 C 14/07/14

1.1 Composition of the system with PIXIUM RF4343
detector
1.2 Applications and operating modes
1.3 Safety
1.3.1 Electrical safety
1.3.2 Ionising radiation protection
1.3.3 Residual risks
1.4 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration
1.4.1 Electromagnetic emissions
1.4.2 Electromagnetic immunity
1.4.2.1 Recommended separation distances
between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the
system
2 TECHNICAL DATA 2.1 to 2.21 G 03/12/14

2.1 Equipment classification
2.2 Technical specifications
2.2.1 System
2.2.2 Image acquisition
2.2.3 Image processor
2.2.4 Flat-panel X-Ray detector
2.2.5 Measure chamber
2.2.6 Dose Area Meter
2.2.7 Monitor
2.2.8 Overall dimensions and weight
2.2.9 Cables
2.3 Dimensions
2.3.1 Cabinet
2.3.2 PIXIUM RF4343 F3 detector
2.3.3.1 Medys mod.MIC-10 cod.2252611
2.3.3.2 Claymount mod.SSMC 613 and
mod.SSMC 601/ 1001 preamplifier
2.3.3.3 Claymount mod. SSMC 508 /
1007 preamplifier
revision H PART 1 page C - 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.4 19” Monitor TV (optional)

2.3.5 IR Remote control (optional)
2.3.6 Monitor Trolley (optional)
2.4 Compatibility
2.5 Fuses
3 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT 3.1 to 3.2 A 30/08/13

3.1 Packaging
3.2 Storage
revision H PART 1 page C - 2

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.1 COMPOSITION OF THE SYSTEM WITH PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR
The system consists of:
1. Flat-panel X-Ray detector (PIXIUM RF4343), comprising:

a) detector front end (PIXIUM FE4343F)
b) image Processor Unit (PU RF4343).
2. Detector feeder
3. Ion chamber
4. Video Processor (model PIDRF43).
5. Control and interface module (Main Controller)
6. Supply board
7. Alphanumeric keyboard and Mouse
8. Working Monitor
The following options are also available:
9. Dose Area Meter

10. CD Re-Writer
11. Cabinet Top
12. Auxiliary Monitors
13. Monitor trolley (for 1 monitor)
14. Monitor trolley (for 2 monitors)
15. Monitor trolley CE 93/42 certified (for 1 monitor)
16. Monitor trolley CE 93/42 certified (for 2 monitors)
17. IR Remote control
Note: See paragraph 1.1 in Part 6 of this manual for details of the composition of the system when
fitted with 2 detectors (Pixium RF4343 detector plus DRX1 wireless detector).
See paragraph 1.1 in Part 7 of this manual for details of the composition of the system when
fitted with 2 detectors (Pixium RF4343 detector plus PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector).
revision C PART 1 page 1. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 12 12
X-ray tube 8
9 17 11
X-ray 7
10
3 13 14
1a
4 12 12 12
Composition with optional
15 16
1b
1.2 APPLICATIONS AND OPERATING MODES
The system lets you acquire large digital images (43 x 43 cm) in fluoroscopy and radiography mode in
all real-time X-ray scans of the skeleton, gastrointestine tract and urogenital system and, with the DSA
option, the peripheral vascular system.
The system also offers the following methods of image acquisition:

- tomography
- stitching
The system has specialised image acquisition, process and display parameters to suit the body part in
question and the size of the patient. This lets you get immediate correct acquisition and display of the
image, thus avoiding the need for later improvements.
There are also post-processing functions available so you can change the look of the image and
handle them as required.
See chapter 2 below for full details of the data and technical characteristics.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.3 SAFETY
The system must be used solely in accordance with the safety instructions contained in this manual
and must never be used for purposes other than those for which it is intended.
* Since the system is to be used in combination with other equipment, full checks must be
made to assure the patients or attendant staff are not exposed to risks if there are any doubts
as to the compatibility between the system and such equipment. Contact the equipment
manufacturer or an expert.
* This system must never be used if it is faulty or any part of the overall system where the
system is installed malfunctions. Likewise, it must not be used in the event of a faulty alarm
or signal.
* Prior authorisation must be obtained from manufacturer before making any modifications to
this system or its safety devices.
* Do not remove the covers on the equipment unless for the specifically envisaged
maintenance operations described in this manual: removal of these covers or panels may
compromise the electromagnetic compatibility of the system.
* As with any technical apparatus, the system must be used in a proper manner and receive
regular checks and maintenance as specified in the "Maintenance" section of this manual.
* The operator must read all the information in this manual before using the equipment.
* THE DEVICE IS NOT INTENDED FOR INTERVENTIONAL USE. ANY INDICATION

RELATED TO INTERVENTIONAL PROCEDURES SHOULD BE DISREGARDED.
System providers must add the following information in their manuals for the complete X-ray system:
- Recommendations for exclusive use by highly skilled and trained staff, having been informed
of the risks involved when using X-rays.
- Warnings concerning the daily X-ray dose checks.
System providers must also check against the risk of liquids penetrating the detector unit and the ion
chamber.
Note: See paragraph 1.2 in Part 6 of this manual for details about the specific safety rules when using
the DRX1 wireless detector.
See paragraph 1.2 in Part 7 of this manual for details about the specific safety rules when using
the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.3.1 ELECTRICAL SAFETY
* Important: The X-ray unit hosting the system must have emergency buttons fitted (in
suitable positions in the room) that cut all power to the system.
* All equipment connected to the system must comply with the following standards:
- EN 60 601-1 (3rd ed.)
- EN 60 601-1-2 (2nd ed.)
* The X-ray equipment fitted with the system must not be used in explosive conditions.
* Unplug the equipment before cleaning, disinfecting and sterilising it.
* Cleaning products and disinfectants, including those used for patients, can form explosive
gas mixtures. Therefore, only use products that comply with the relevant safety regulations.
* Take care not to spill conducting liquids on the equipment as these could infiltrate and so
damage the equipment and render it unsafe to use.
1.3.2 IONISING RADIATION PROTECTION
Before carrying out any exposure, make sure that all the necessary radiation protections have been
activated.
During X-ray use, the personnel present in the X-ray room must observe the radiation protection
regulations in force. The following rules apply here:
* Where necessary, use radiation protection accessories.

* Use the special radio-protective suits. A radio-protective material equivalent to 0.35 mm of lead gives
99.95% protection against radiation of 50 kV and 94.5% protection against radiation of 100 kV.
* Distance is the best protection against radiation: always keep as far away from the source of X-rays
and the exposure objective as possible.
* Avoid moving or remaining within the X-ray trajectory.
* Always set the smallest exposure field possible. In fact, dispersed radiation depends to a large
extent on the volume of the irradiated object.
1.3.3 RESIDUAL RISKS
The system has been designed and built in full respect of the safety regulations.
Nevertheless, there are still some risks involved in the use of this system if it is used incorrectly or the
prescribed safety devices are faulty.
Risks owing to the improper use of the equipment: see the instructions and recommendations in the
above paragraphs of this chapter.
Risks owing to defects in the prescribed safety devices: bear in mind that:
- Protection against electric shocks is provided by means of an efficient earth system for all metal
parts covering the equipment.
* The earth circuit (for both internal and external parts) should therefore be checked for
efficiency on a regular basis (see the “routine maintenance” schedule in chapter 1 of part 5
of this manual).
- If the LCD monitor's TV screen is hit hard enough, it could break and scatter liquid crystal, that is
toxic.
Avoid hitting the monitor with any objects.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.4 GUIDANCE AND MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION
Never remove any parts or covers as this may compromise the electromagnetic compatibility
of the system.
Cordless and cell phones may affect the efficiency of the device.
1.4.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS
In accordance with standard EN 60601-1-2 (2nd ed.), the system is intended for use in the
electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Tab. 201
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The system uses RF energy only for its internal functions.
CISPR 11 Therefore, its RF emission are very low and are not likely to
cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The system is suitable for use in all establishments, other than
CISPR 11 domestic and those directly connected to the public low-
voltage mains supply for residential buildings.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.4.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
In accordance with standard EN 60601-1-2 (2nd ed.), the system is intended for use in the
electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Tab. 202
Immunity test EN 60601 Compliance level Electromagnetic environment -
test level guidance
Electrostatic discharge ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be made from

(ESD) wood, concrete or ceramic tiles.
±8 kV air ±8 kV air If floors are covered with
EN 61000-4-2 synthetic material, the relative
humidity should be at least
30%.
Electrical fast transient ±2 kV for power supply ±2 kV for power supply Mains supply quality should be
/ burst lines lines that of a typical commercial or
hospital environment.
EN 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output
lines lines
Surge ±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV differential mode
Mains supply quality should be
that of a typical commercial or
EN 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) Mains supply quality should be
interruptions and for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle that of a typical commercial or
voltage variations on hospital environment. If the
power supply input 40% UT (60% dip in UT) 40% UT (60% dip in UT) for user of the system requires
lines for 5 cycles 5 cycles continued operation during
blackouts, it is recommended
EN 61000-4-11 70% UT (30% dip in UT) 70% UT (30% dip in UT) for that the system be powered via
for 25 cycles 25 cycles a non-interruptible power
supply.
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) <5% UT (>95% dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m If image distortion occurs,
(50/60Hz) magnetic it may be necessary to
field position the monitor of the
system further from
EN 61000-4-8 source of power frequency
magnetic field or to install
magnetic shielding. The
power frequency magnetic
field should be measured
in the intended installation
location to assure that it is
sufficiently low.
Note: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Tab. 204
Immunity test EN 60601 Compliance level Electromagnetic environment -
test level guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF

150 kHz to 80 MHz communications equipment
EN 61000-4-6 should be used no closer to any
part of the system, including
cables, than the recommended
separation distance calculated
using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter.
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz Recommended separation
EN 61000-4-3 distance:
d = 1.2 √P
150 kHz to 80 MHz
d = 1.2 √P
80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 √P
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output

power rating of the transmitter
in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d
is the recommended separation
distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF

transmitters, as determined by
an electromagnetic site survey,
should be less than the
compliance level in each
frequency range.
Interference may occur in the

vicinity of equipment marked
with the following symbol:
Note 1: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection by structures, objects and people.
Note 2: Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular / cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast can not be predicted in theory or
with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in
which the system is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the system should be
observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may
be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the system or the use of a shielded area with greater
RF shielding capacity.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.4.2.1 RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE RF

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND THE SYSTEM
The system is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled.
The customer or the user of the system can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a
minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the
system as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Tab. 206
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of m
transmitter
W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 1.2 √P d = 1.2 √P d = 2.3 √P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
Note 1: For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection by structures, objects and people.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2 TECHNICAL DATA
2.1 EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATION
Type of protection against electrical shocks: class I
Degree of protection against electrical shocks: type B
Degree of protection against water penetration: common device
Safety factor with inflammable gas: device not suitable to be used in

presence of inflammable gas
Conditions of use: continuous operation
revision G PART 1 page 2. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1 SYSTEM
Power supply single-phase voltage 230 V ± 10%, 50/60 Hz

Consumption system (with 4 monitors) 700 VA
detector 130 VA
Working environment temperature from 15 to 35°C
humidity from 20 to 75%
pressure 700 to 1060 hPa
Working dose (typ.) radiography 2.5 µGy/image
continuous fluoroscopy 35 µR/s = 306 nGy/s (43x43 cm field)
50 µR/s = 437 nGy/s (30x30 cm field)
HCF pulsed fluoroscopy 4 µR/i = 35 nGy/i (43x43 cm field)
6 µR/i = 52.4 nGy/i (30x30 cm field)
Resolution max 3.5 lp/mm
Solid state detector model PIXIUM RF4343
Optional wireless extra solid model DRX1

state detector
model PIXIUM 3543EZ
LCD monitor - see point 2.2.7 below -

Alphanumeric keyboard type - French version mod.BT527A/ABF
- English version mod. BT527A/ABB
- Dutch version mod. BT527A/ABH
- German version mod. BT527A/ABD
- Spanish version mod. BT527A/ABE
- Italian version mod. BT527A/ABZ
- Russian version mod. BT527A/ACB
System controller microprocessor system Board M.CON 01 – code 87 01 410
2.2.2 IMAGE ACQUISITION
continuous fluoroscopy Rate 18 frame/s

field 43x43cm Binning 3x3
Output matrix 960x960 pixel
HCF pulsed fluoroscopy Rate 1 ÷ 15 frame/s

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

radiography high resolution Rate 0.5 ÷ 3 frame/s
radiography medium resolution Rate 0.5 ÷ 8 frame/s
Tomography Acquisition time 2,3 o 4,3 seconds
2.2.3 IMAGE PROCESSOR
Video Processor * model PIDRF43

dynamic storage 2 GB RAM
acquisition Digital 16 bit, serial, link chamber
real-time processing continuous fluoroscopy / FTH pulsed harmonization
Digital Substraction
Auto Masking
Road Mapping
Auto ROI
post-processing Dedicated LUT for each exam
Spatial filters
Harmonisation
H&V image reverse
90° image rotation
Electronic shutters (square and circular)
Reverse image polarity
Multi-image display
Scaled image, variable (from 1.0 to 2.9)
Zoom, variable (from 1.2 to 3.0)
Brightness and contrast control
Reference images
DSA:
Remasking
Land Marking
Pixel Shift
Vascular Tracing
QA Analisys
graphics Grid
Distances
Angles
Text and marker overlay
Virtual collimator
COBB angle and orthopaedic measurement
Remote control Remote control IR
Storage memory System HD SATA2, standard capacity: 250 GB
Archive HD SATA2, standard capacity: 250 GB
optional capacity: up to 320GB/500GB/1TB/2TB)
N° storable images HCF pulsed fluoroscopy: 512 i/GB
High resolution radiography: 64 i/GB
Medium resolution radiography: 256 i/GB
N° exams No limit: set by disk archive limit capacity
N° images per run No limit: set by disk archive limit capacity
Computer operating system Windows XP
Interface for Ethernet TCP/IP network Standard DICOM 3
for external CD-Writer USB 2.0

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2.4 FLAT-PANEL X-RAY DETECTOR
Model PIXIUM RF4343 detector unit: PIXIUM FE4343F

PU with pixboard: PU RF4343
Supply Voltage +24V +24 V ± 0.5 V
Consumption 4 A (max)
Working conditions Temperature from 15 to 40°C for basic functioning
from 15 to 35°C for top performance
Humidity from 20 to 75%
Pressure from 70 to 106 kPa
Shocks 15 g, 6 ms, 100 shocks (in X, Y, Z axis)
Vibrations 0.3g, 10-200Hz 0.15mm 5 scannings 3axes 1oct/min
Matrix 2880 x 2881 pixels
Pixel size 148 x 148 µm
Active area 42.6 x 42.6 cm
Note: See paragraph 1.3 in Part 6 of this manual for details about the technical data of the DRX1
wireless detector (system with two detectors).
See paragraph 1.3 in Part 7 of this manual for details about the technical data of the PIXIUM
3543EZ wireless detector (system with two detectors).
2.2.5 MEASURE CHAMBER
Model Medys MIC-10 Cod. 2252611 / 3 measuring areas

Technology Ionization
Dimensions Overall dimensions 500x470x10 mm
Useful area 447x447 mm
Weight 1 kg ± 100 g
Power supply Supply rate ± 15V DC (±2V)
Consumption 40 mA
Technical data Sensitivity 4 V/mR
Attenuation coefficient 1.11
(80kV, 25mm Al, FFD 100cm)
Measurement fields Left, Right, Centre
(choice of any combination)
Models Claymount SSMC 613 and SSMC 601 / preamplifier 1001 / 3 measuring areas
Technology Solid state
Dimensions Overall dimensions 472x460x3.3 mm
Weight 1 kg ± 100 g
Consumption 40 mA
Technical data Sensitivity 0,8 V/μGy
Attenuation coefficient <1.05

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Model Claymount SSMC 508 / preamplifier 1007 / 5 measuring areas

Technology Solid state
Weight 1.15 kg ± 100 g
Consumption 40 mA
Technical data Sensitivity 0,6 V/μGy
Attenuation coefficient <1.05
2.2.6 DOSE AREA METER
Model KermaX E plus (code 120-101)

Power supply Supply rate DC: 9 V - 29 V
Consumption 65 mA (max)
2
Technical data Sensitivity 1 mGy cm
Model KermaX-plus model 120-131OEM HS

Power supply Supply rate 9 - 29 V DC
Consumption 65 mA (max)
2
Technical data Sensitivity 0.1 mGy*cm
2.2.7 MONITOR
19” LCD colour monitor ATS code MO 19 006

(optional) model Tecnint mod.EM19TFTI/MCIIL-C1
type 19” colour, TFT, LED, 16.7 milion of colour
resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels
contrast ratio 2000:1 (typ.)
2 2
brightness 450 Cd/m (typ.) - 600 Cd/m (max)
visual angle vertical: 178° - horizontal: 178°
working conditions temperature: 0° +40° C - max humidity: 80%
max consumption 60 W max
overall dimensions 422x467x251mm (with support)
19” LCD colour monitor ATS code MO 19 007

(optional) model Invicta line
Model: IVL-GEV995IMI , Part. No: FPM1183
type 19” colour, TFT, LED, 16.7 milion of colour
contrast ratio 900:1 (typ)
2
brightness 470 Cd/m (typ.)
working conditions temperature +10° +40° C
humidity 30% - 75%
max consumption 80W max
overall dimensions 432x467x251 mm (with support)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
19”LCD monochrome monitor ATS code MO 19 004

(optional) model Invicta line
IVL-GEV955IMI Part. No: FPM1152
type 19” monochromatic, TFT
contrast ratio 1000:1 (typ.)
2
brightness 1500 cd/m (typ.)
working conditions temperature: +10°+40° C - humidity: 30%-75%
max consumption 80 W max
overall dimensions 432x467x251 mm (with support)
2.2.8 OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Cabinet dimensions (with shelf) 990x605 h 920 mm

weight 126 kg
Detector: PIXIUM RF4343 front end dimensions 518x508 h 81 mm
weight 23 kg
Wireless detector: DRX1 dimensions 383.5x459.5 h 15.5 mm
weight 3.86 Kg
Wireless detector: PIXIUM 3543EZ dimensions 383.5x459.5 h 15,5 mm
weight 2.8 Kg
19” colour Monitor dimensions 432x251 h 467 mm
Model: EM19TFTI/MCIIL-C1 weight 8.8 kg (6.1 Kg without support)
(optional)
19” colour Monitor dimensions 432 x 251 h467 mm
Model: IVL-GEV995IMI, Part. No: FPM1183 weight 8.1 kg (5.4 Kg without support)
(optional)
19” monochromatic monitor dimensions 432x251 h 467 mm
Model: IVL-GEV995IMI, Part. No: FPM1152 weight 8.1 kg (5.4 Kg without support)
(optional)
Note: See paragraph 2.3 below for further details.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2.9 CABLES
description code diameter min curve length connector size

[mm] radius [m] [mm]
[mm]
PU / PIXIUM DT 87 302 13 80 20 40x50x15
earth 550 87 100 5 40 20 /
optical fibre DT 87 301 3 40 20 15x50
cabinet / ion chamber 550 87 110 7 70 20 cabinet side: 52x31x16
detector side: 40x14x5
Monitor cables 31 00 150A
video 6 80 15 ∅15 L=17
power supply 6 80 15 Max 29x21 L=62
earth 5 80 15 9x6 L=6
Monitor cab. (alternative) 31 00 180A
video 6 80 25 ∅15 L=17
power supply 6 80 25 Max 29x21 L=62
earth 5 80 25 9x6 L=6
Remote control 550 87 120 4 80 15 40x42x16
receiver cable
Note: - See paragraph 1.4 in Part 6 of this manual for details about the cables used for the wireless
DRX1 detector unit (system with two detectors).
- See paragraph 1.4 in Part 7 of this manual for details about the cables used for the wireless
PIXIUM 3543EZ detector unit (system with two detectors).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3 DIMENSIONS
Note: - See paragraph 1.5 in Part 6 of this manual for details about the dimensions of the components
in the Wireless DRX1 detector unit (system with two detectors).
- See paragraph 1.5 in Part 7 of this manual for details about the dimensions of the components
in the Wireless PIXIUM3543EZ detector unit (system with two detectors).
2.3.1 CABINET
See figure below for the cabinet dimensions.
Standard cabinet
Weight: 126 kg
Cabinet with top

Weight: 130 kg

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.2 PIXIUM RF4343 F3 DETECTOR UNIT
locating pin
X-ray
X-ray center
locating pin
Weight: 25 kg
zone - cable output

- warning led
N° 8 fixing holes
(M5, max length: 10 mm)
N° 2 locating pins
(Ø6, length: 6 mm)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.3.1 MEDYS mod.MIC-10 COD. 2252611
thickness: 10 mm
Weight: 1 Kg
P3 P1 P2
P1: Sensitivity for area 1
fixing hole diameter: 5 mm

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.3.2 CLAYMOUNT mod.SSMC 613 and mod.SSMC 601 / 1001 PREAMPLIFIER
cable output for

mod. SSMC 613
cable output for

mod. SSMC 601
thickness: 3.3 mm
weight : 1 Kg
1001 preamplifier
Field 1
Reset Field 2
Field 3
+12/15 VDC -12/15 VDC Potentiometer Sensitivity

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.3.3 CLAYMOUNT mod. SSMC 508 / 1007 PREAMPLIFIER
thickness: 3. mm
weight : 1,15 Kg
Field 1
1007 Preamplifier Field 2
Field 3
Reset Field 4
Field 5
+12/15 VDC -12/15 VDC Potentiometer Sensitivity

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.4 19” MONITOR TV (opzional)
Model Dimensions weight weight

A with support without support
IVL-GEV955IMI monochrome FPM1152 93 mm 8.1 Kg 5.4 Kg
IVL-GEV955IMI colour FPM1183 84.5 mm 8.8 Kg 6.1 Kg
N° 4 x M4 L holes
deep 10 mm

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Model weight weight

with support without support
19" LCD colour Tecnint HTE mod:EM19TFTI/MCIIL-C1 8.7 Kg 6 Kg
For fixing :
use the 4 x M4 holes Standard VESA 100 or Standard VESA 75
deep 8mm

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.5 REMOTE CONTROL IR (opzional)
Receiver Transmitter
Thickness: 31 mm Thickness: 22 mm
Weight: 0.08 Kg Weight: 0.12 Kg
Cable
Diameter: 4 mm
Length: 15 m
Male Sub D 15 pins connector

Thickness: 16 mm
To CM12 of Main Controller

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.6 MONITOR TROLLEY (opzional)
Weight: 18 Kg Weight: 19 Kg
Monitor trolley for one 18” /19” LCD display Monitor trolley for two 18” /19” LCD displays
Weight: 26 Kg Weight: 27 Kg
Monitor trolley for one 18” /19” LCD display Monitor trolley for two 18” /19” LCD displays
CE 93/42 Certified CE 93/42 Certified

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.4 COMPATIBILITY
The system has been designed to allow for compatibility with:
- X-ray generator: medium/high frequency;

- Scanning table: capable of supporting the flat-panel detector in question.
The system has been tested using the following generators and collimators:
- ODEL generator, models Endeavour R306 and US Program.

- CPI generator, models Indico 100.
- RALCO collimator, model R309L

- RALCO collimator, model R225 DACS
Note: Please contact ATS for compatibility with other devices.

Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and commission other devices.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.5 FUSES
The system is protected by a series of fuses, as shown in the table and drawings below:
name type position circuit protected reference
SW1 Thermomagnetic 10 A Main supply input General protection fig. 1

F1, F2 2 x 630 mAT Main Controller supply socket Main Controller fig. 2
F1 500 mAT M.CON board 01 +5 power supply fig. 2
F2 500 mAT M.CON board 01 +15 power supply fig. 2
F3 500 mAT M.CON board 01 -15 power supply fig. 2
F4 1.6 AT M.CON board 01 +24V2 power supply fig. 2
F5 1 AT M.CON board 01 +5V2 power supply fig. 2
F1 200 mAT ICI board +5 power supply fig. 2
F1 315 mAT ASPS board: TR1 transf. input ASPS board fig. 3
F2 1 AT ASPS board: TR1 transf. output ASPS board fig. 3
F1 315 mAT 21Vca board: TR1 input 21V AC board fig. 3
F2 500 mAT 21Vca board: TR1 output 21V AC board fig. 3
F1. F2 500 mAT RFPS board: TB1 terminal board PU4343 Power unit fig. 4
F1 200 mAT RFPS board: TR1 output +56 V DC power supply fig. 4
F2 5 AT RFPS board: TR1 output +42 V DC power supply fig. 4
F3 500 mAT RFPS board: TR1 output +15V power supply fig. 4
F1 500 mAT RGBC board +5V, -5V power supply fig. 5
F1 315 mAT RDAM board +5V2, +15V1 power supply fig. 5
F1 315 mAT RDAMSP board +5V2, +15V1 power supply fig. 7
Thermomagnetic SW1
Fig. 1
Cabinet side

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
RDAM board F1, F2
M.CON board 01 IRRuC board RS232 board ICI board
F1
F4 F5 F3 F2 F1
Fig. 2
MAIN CONTROLLER

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
F2 F1 F1 F2
Fig. 3
WARNING PARTS Supply board
ARE LIVE WHEN
SYSTEM IS OFF
F2 F3 F1 F2 F1
RFPS Board
Fig. 4
Detector supply board

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
F1
Fig. 5
RGBC 01 board
F1
Fig. 6
RDAM board
F1
Fig. 7
RDAMSP board

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT
3.1 PACKAGING
The system is packed in 5 boxes.

The table below summarizes the packaging used. The references are shown in the figure below.
Box no. Contents
1 Detector
2 Cabinet (Image processor / Main Controller / PU 4343 / Detector feeder / Power unit)
3 - Ion Chamber
- Dose Area Meter (optional)
- CD Re-Writer (optional)
- Remote control IR (optional)
- Cables
- Alphanumeric keyboard and Mouse
- Manuals
4 Monitor
5 Cabinet Top (optional)
box 3 box 5
box 4
box 2
box 1
Nota: - See paragraph 1.7 in Part 6 of this manual for details about packaging of system fitted with
two detectors (with Wireless DRX1 detector).
- See paragraph 1.7 in Part 7 of this manual for details about packaging of system fitted with
two detectors (with Wireless PIXIUM3543EZ detector).
revision A PART 1 page 3. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.2 STORAGE
We recommend the following temperatures and humidity levels for storage of the system, likewise
during its transport:
limits recommended
temperature from 0 °C to +50 °C from +10 °C to +40 °C

relative humidity from 20 % to 90 % from 30 % to 80 %
pressure from 700 to 1060 hPa from 700 to 1060 hPa
revision A PART 1 page 3. 2

code 87 80 014C - Mti S1 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Part 2: INSTALLATION
LIST OF CONTENTS
page rev. date
CONTENTS C-1 to C-4 M 03/12/14
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Installation procedure 1.1 to 1.2 B 30/08/13
1.2 Unpacking
2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 2.1 to 2.4 D 30/08/13

2.1 Cabinet
2.2 Monitor
2.3 Detector unit
2.3.1 PIXIUM RF4343 detector
3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 3.1 to 3.19 G 03/12/14

3.1 Integrated devices
3.2 Connectors
3.3 Connections
3.3.1 Inside the system
3.3.1.1 Connecting the optional accessories
3.3.2 Peripheral connections
3.3.2.1 Optional connections
3.3.3 Receiver module power supply
3.3.4 System supply
3.3.4.1 Acquisition system supply
3.3.4.2 PIXIUM RF4343 detector supply
3.4 Interface signals
4 SETUP PROCEDURE 4.1 to 4.119 H 03/12/14

4.1 Introduction
4.2 General setup
4.2.1 Factory settings
4.2.2 Language settings
4.2.3 Auto delete setup
4.2.4 Edit application name
4.2.5 Main controller RAD setup
4.2.6 RX filter configuration
4.3 Definition of integrated components
4.3.1 Examples for installation with remote controlled stand
4.4 Logical mode set up
4.5 Exam Setup
4.5.1 Selecting the exams
revision M PART 2 page C - 1
code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.2 Creating a new exam card

4.5.3 How the exam list is organised
4.5.4 Changing free parameters
4.5.4.1 General parameters
4.5.4.2 Radiography parameters
4.5.4.3 Continuous fluoroscopy parameters
4.5.4.4 HCF pulsed fluoroscopy parameters
4.5.5 Setting the post-processing parameters
4.5.5.1 Post-processing of Radiography images
4.5.5.2 Post-processing of continuous fluoroscopy
and pulsed HCF images
4.5.5.2.1 FTH FILTER setting
4.5.5.3 Post-processing of angiography images
(DSA)
4.5.5.4 Post-processing of road mapping images
4.5.5.4.1 Post-processing of max opacity images
4.5.5.4.2 Post-processing of subtracted images
4.5.6 ROI setup
4.5.6.1 ROI calculation area
4.5.6.2 Algorithm type
4.5.7 Gamma correction curve setup
4.5.7.1 Building the gamma curve
4.5.7.2 Associating correction curves to the exam
type
4.5.7.3 Recalling and/or changing a gamma curve
4.6 DICOM
4.61 Network settings
4.6.1.1 Physical network characteristics
4.6.1.2 Windows XP settings for network
4.6.1.3 Network connection test
4.6.2 Addressing the system
4.6.3 Defining the remote DICOM devices
4.6.4 Checking the connections
4.6.5 Setting up the DICOM Spooler
4.6.6 Worklist
4.6.7 Store
4.6.8 CD/DVD Image
4.6.9 Print
4.6.10 Mpps Function
4.6.11 Storage commitment function
4.6.11.1 Impostazioni di spooler
4.6.12 Query / retrieve function
4.6.13 IHE Settings function
4.6.14 Print queue management
4.6.15 Enabling the DICOM communication log
4.6.16 DICOM Dose SR
4.6.16.1 General setup
4.6.16.2 Definition of the UID irradiation device
4.6.16.3 Report contents
4.7 Monitor control
4.7.1 Monitor controls and adjustments
4.8 Procedure setup
4.8.1 Entering procedures
4.9 Exposure index
4.9.1 Calibrating the detector conversion factor
code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5 PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR CALIBRATION 5.1 to 5.43 B 31/07/12

5.1 Introduction
5.2 PU / System connection
5.3 PU configuration check
5.4 Presetting the detector’s working temperature
5.5 Loading and activating a Logical Mode
5.6 Logical Mode calibration
5.6.1 Offset calibration in continuous/pulsed fluoroscopy modes
5.6.2 Find the exposure values for gain and defective map
calibration
5.6.3 Gain calibration in continuous/pulsed fluoroscopy mode
5.6.4 Defective pixel correction in continuous and pulsed
fluoroscopy modes
5.6.4.1 Defective pixel calibration with x-rays
5.6.4.2 Blinking pixel calibration
5.6.4.3 Linear gain defective pixel calibration
5.6.5 Offset calibration in radiography/tomography mode
5.6.6 Gain calibration in radiography/tomography mode
5.6.7 Defective Map and Blinking pixel calibration in radiography
mode
5.6.7.1 Defective Map calibration
5.6.7.2 Blinking pixel calibration
5.6.7.3 Linear gain defective pixel calibration
5.7 Manual Defective Map
5.8 Checking the detector
5.9 Saving the calibration data
5.9.1 Calibration back-up
5.9.2 Hardware reset
5.10 Saving calibration images
6 SAVING THE SETUP 6.1 0 03/05/11

6.1 General info
7 APPENDICES 7.1 to 7.47 B 30/08/13

7.1 Continuity unit
7.1.1 Installing the UPS
7.2 On-line manuals
7.3 Administrator / User log-in
7.4 Exam cards
7.4.1 List of sample exams
7.4.2 List of tomography exams
7.5 Integration with X-ray generator
7.5.1 General info
7.5.1.1 X-ray generator operating modes
7.5.1.1.1 Radiography
7.5.1.1.2 Continuous fluoroscopy
7.5.1.1.3 Max opacification/Road mapping
continuous fluoroscopy
7.5.1.1.4 Pulsed HCF fluoroscopy
7.5.1.1.5 Pulsed fluoroscopy
7.5.1.1.6 Tomography
st
7.5.2 1 level of integration
7.5.2.1 Logic signals
7.5.2.2 Image acquisition stages in radiography mode
code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.2.3 Image acquisition stages in continuous

fluoroscopy mode
7.5.2.4 Stages in image acquisition in pulsed HCF
fluoroscopy mode
7.5.2.5 Stages in image acquisition in pulsed
fluoroscopy mode
7.5.2.6 Stages in image acquisition in tomography
mode
nd
7.5.3 2 level of integration
7.5.3.1 Integration mode
7.5.3.1.1 Messages from the system to the X-ray
generator
7.5.3.1.2 Alarms
7.6 Integration with X-ray collimator
7.6.1 General info
7.6.2 Integration
7.7 Integration with the motorized multipurpose stand
7.7.1 General info
7.7.2 Integration
7.7.2.1 Integration setup
7.7.2.2 Stand positioning
7.7.2.3 Alarms
7.8 Integration with anti-scatter grid
7.8.1 General info
7.8.2 Integration functions
7.9 Integration with Dose Area Meter
7.10 Stitching. integrazione e impostazioni.
7.10.1 Introduction
7.10.2 Scanning mode
7.10.3 Acquisition procedure
7.10.4 Exam card settings
7.10.5 Setup profiles
7.10.5.1 Exam type menu
7.10.5.2 Checking a profile
7.11 Integration with automatic injector

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The flow chart below shows the installation procedure (see note at bottom of page):
START
Unpacking
(see para. 1.2 below)
Mechanical installation
(see Chapter 2 below)
Electrical connections
Set-up procedure
PIXIUM 4343 detector calibration

(see Chapter 5 below)*
Acceptance Test
(see Part 3)
Save the setup

Only qualified personnel with suitable training should be allowed to install and commission the system.
Note 1: It is essential that the mains power rating to be used for the system is checked to guarantee
correct installation and functioning (this must be 230 V ±10%- 50/60 Hz).
*Note 2: - You must also calibrate the Wireless DRX1 detector if the system is fitted with two detectors
(see chapter 3 in Part 6).
- You must also calibrate the Wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ detector if the system is fitted with
two detectors (see chapter 3 in Part 7).
revision B PART 2 page 1. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.2 UNPACKING
● Cabinet: Remove the cabinet from the packing box following the instructions shown in the figure on
the outside of the box:
- Remove the straps securing the box to the wooden pallet below.
- Open the cardboard box and remove the packing blocks.
- Remove the wooden ramp and fix to the base of the pallet.
- Remove the blocks in front of the wheels.
- Gently push the cabinet to slide it off the base of the box.
● Simply open the other packing boxes, without using any tools that could damage the contents.
See “Annex A” at the end of this manual for PIXIUM 4343 detector unpacking and storage.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
2.1 CABINET
- Mount the wooden base (optional) and fix with the 4 screws provided.
- Position the cabinet and then engage the brake system (two threaded tie-rods, whose base should
touch the ground).
Note: - The threaded tie-rods used for braking can be rotated using a screwdriver in the holes
accessed from the threaded shaft of the tie-rods.
- The system foresees room temperatures of up to 35°C. Higher temperatures may

compromise the efficiency of the entire system.
It is therefore crucial that:
- you keep the cabinet away from heat sources,
- the cabinet is not placed against walls or other structures that limit proper ventilation,
- you regularly check the efficiency of the cabinet cooling system (fans work, air grilles
not obstructed).
Threaded tie-rods for braking
revision D PART 2 page 2. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2 MONITOR
The monitor is supplied with a base without any fixing holes.
See paragraph 2.3.4 in Part 1 of this manual for the overall dimensions and for details on how
to fix the monitors using the holes indicated (hanging or on the trolley).
2.3 DETECTOR UNIT
When installing the PIXIUM RF4343 detector, bear in mind that:
- the ion chamber must be installed in a compartment planned above the detector.
X-Ray tube
Ion chamber
Detector
You also need to take into account the weight, size and envisaged fixing systems when installing the
above components. See the drawings in paragraphs 2.3.2 and 2.3.3 in Part 1 of this manual.
Nota: - See paragraph 2.1 in Part 6 of this manual for details about the Wireless DRX1 detector
installation (for the system fitted with two detectors).
-See paragraph 2.1 in Part 7 of this manual for details about the Wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ
detector installation (for the system fitted with two detectors).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.1 DETECTOR
● Unpacking
Caution: The detector needs a 24-hour period of acclimatisation before you should open the plastic
bag containing it.
See “Annex A” at the end of this manual for PIXIUM 4343 detector unpacking and storage.
● Earth
Caution: Do not use the cable and connector screens as an earth connection.
Use the M4 screw provided on the panel covering the detector to earth the detector (see figure
below).
● Cooling
To ensure proper cooling of the detector, make sure that:
- where possible, air naturally circulates around the detector (min flow: 0.3 m3/min),
- the working room temperature falls within the set limits (see technical data in paragraph 2.2.3 of
Part 1),
- the heat resistance between the room air and the rear surface of the detector is less than
0.6°C/W.
● Fixing
Caution: To avoid any risks during installation of the detector, at least two people must be involved
in fixing the detector to its support.
Install the detector so that the status LEDs are easily visible (see para. 5.5 in Part 5 of this manual).
Led (FREQ, COM, XRAY, RDY) Led (POWER)
Protective Earth connection

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Caution: The side of the measure chamber that must face the X-ray tube is identified by the words
TUBE SIDE (see figure above for its position). The figure shows the MEDYS chamber,
model MIC-10 COD. 2252611.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
3.1 INTEGRATED DEVICES
The system can be integrated with the following devices:

- X-ray generator (see para. 7.5 below),
- X-ray collimator (see para. 7.6 below),
- stand (see para. 7.7 below),
- anti-scatter grid (see para. 7.8 below).
Integration allows for the other devices to be connected to the system to suit the type of exam
programmed by the system.
More specifically:
- Integration with the X-ray generator allows for the transfer of programmed radiological
parameters and reception of exposure values.
- Integration with the X-ray collimator allows for automatic setting of the aperture of the
collimator to suit the type of study.
- Integration with the anti-diffusion grid ensures the correct selection of the grid and focal
distance.
- Integration with the stand means that the stand can be used in set positions to suit the type of
exam foreseen.
The parameters are programmed in the setup folder for each exam (see Chapter 4 below: “Setup
procedure”).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 03.doc.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.2 CONNECTORS
List of connectors:
Module / figure Connector Connected to / Notes:
1. PIDRF43 Processor * B1-C1 Parallel Hardware key

B2-C1 Main Controller: CM20
B2-C2 COM2 (N.U.)
B8-C1 Switch Ethernet: LAN3 (only for WIRELESS detector)
B9-C1 PU: B6-C2
B9-C2 PID: B14-C1
B10-C1 Through DVI-VGA converter and RGBC board: CM1
(Reference monitor) (optional)
B11-C1 RGBC board: CM2 (VIDEO OUT)
B11-C2 PU: NET (10/100/1000 BASE T Ethernet Interface)
B11-C3 DICOM network(10/100/1000 BASE T Ethernet Interface)
B11-C4 Keyboard and Mouse (through Extender)
B11-C5 USB interface (N.U.) (only for sn 3xxx)
B12-C1 DVD writer (Interface USB) (optional)
B12-C2 Hardware key USB interface
B13-C1 USB interface (N.U.)
B13-C2 USB interface (N.U.)
B14-C1 PU: B1-C1 / PID: B9-C1
B14-C2 Main Controller: CM15
MAINS Power supply unit ASPS00: CP10 (230 VAC)
2. Main Controller CM4 CAN BUS connector
CM5 CAN BUS connector
CM6 Interface with X-Ray generator / accessory
CM8 Interface with X-Ray generator / accessory
CM9 N.U.
CM10 PU: B1-C1
CM11 Injector
CM15 PID: B14-C2
CM20 PID: B2-C1
CM21 Ion chamber
CM22 Dose Area Meter
CM24 RS232 connector for X-ray generator
CM25 Remote control IR connector (optional)
MAINS Power unit: ASPS00: CP12 (230 VAC)
3. Main supply board CP9 PU / DVD Recorder power supply (230 VAC)
CP10 PID: CM5 (230 VAC)
CP12 Main Controller: 230 VAC
CP13 21VAC: CM1 (Power supply 230 VAC)
CM1 Power supply (230 VAC) from ASPS00 board: CP13
CM2 RGBC board: CM3
TB1 Mains: 230 VAC
TB3 Monitor, DVD writer, Keyboard and Mouse supply: 230VAC
4. Detector main supply unit TB1 230V AC (always present)
RFPS-CM1 PU (+24V IN)
RFPS-CM2 TR1 transformer (output)
5. RGBC 01 CV1 Video signal BNC for Reference Monitors
(video connections) CV2
CV3
CV4 Video signal BNC for Working Monitors
CV5
CV6
CM4 Video signal VGA for Working Monitor
CM3 21Vac board: CM2
CM2 PID: B11-C1 (working monitor)

TECHNICAL MANUAL
CM1 PID: B10-C1 through DVI-VGA converter

(reference monitor)
6. Detector: POWER PU: +24V OUT
PIXIUM FE4343F* module SUPPLY
OPTICAL PU: DATA LINK
FIBER
7. Detector: CM Power unit: ASPS00: CP9 (230 V AC)
PU RF4343* module +24V IN RFPS: CM1 (+24 V)
+24V OUT PIXIUM: POWER SUPPLY (+24 V)
B1-C1 Main Controller: CM10 / PID: B14-C1
B6-C2 PID: B9-C1
NET.1 PID: B11-C2
DATA LINK PIXIUM: OPTICAL FIBER
8. Measure chamber CM1 Main Controller: CM21
9. Monitor VIDEO IN:
VGA RGBC board: CM1 (video signal for working monitor)
BNC RGBC board: CV4-CV6 (video signal for working monitors)
BNC RGBC board: CV1-CV3 (video signal for reference monitors)
230 V AC Terminal TB3 main supply board.
VIDEO OUT Video signal for supplementary monitor
6. Dose area meter CM1 Main Controller: CM22
Note1: The following abbreviations are used here and elsewhere in the manual:
- PIDRF43 abbreviated to: PID
- PIXIUM FE 4343F abbreviated to: PIXIUM
- PU RF4343 abbreviated to: PU
Nota2: - See paragraph 2.2 in Part 6 of this manual for details about electrical connections of the
Wireless DRX1 detector installation (for the system fitted with two detectors).
- See paragraph 2.2 in Part 7 of this manual for details about electrical connections of the
Wireless F.P. detector installation (for the system fitted with two detectors).
RGBC board: CM1 RGBC board : CM2

USB Hardware key Main controller: CM20 (optional)
or
Parallel Hardware key COM2 (N.U.) PU: B6-C2 PU Network DVD Recorder
Interfaccia USB
(Presente solo per series n° 3xxx)
PU: B1-C1
WIRELESS Network
(optional) B14-C1
Supply
Main controller: CM15
from ASPS00: CP10
Extender for Keyboard + Mouse DICOM Network
Fig. 1
Video Processor PID

TECHNICAL MANUAL
PID: B14-C2 Ion chamber
Dose Area Meter (optional) PID: B2-C1 RS-232 (for X-Ray generator) Supply: ASPS: CP12
PU: B1-C1 Rx Generator / Accessory Rx Generator / Accessory CAN BUS I.R. receiver (optional)
N.U. Injector CAN BUS
Fig. 2
Main Controller
CP12: 230VAC Main Controller CP9: 230VAC PU
CP13: 230VAC 21VAC board CP10: 230VAC PID CM2: RGBC: CM3 CM1: ASPS-CP13
TB1: Mains TB3: Monitor / DVD Recorder (optional) 21Vac00 board
Fig. 3
WARNING PARTS ARE LIVE Main supply board
WHEN SYSTEM IS OFF

TECHNICAL MANUAL
CM1 CM3 CM2 TB1
RFPS board
Fig. 4
Detector main supply unit
WARNING PARTS ARE LIVE
WHEN SYSTEM IS OFF
VIDEO OUT (BNC) VIDEO OUT (BNC)

Working Monitor Reference Monitor
VIDEO OUT (VGA)

Working Monitor
Fig. 5
Board RGBC 01
VIDEO IN (VGA) VIDEO IN (VGA)
PID: B4-C1 PID: B5-C5 > DVI/VGA Converter
Working Monitor Reference Monitor

TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPTICAL FIBER POWER SUPPLY
Fig. 6
PIXIUM RF 4343 F3 detector
RFPS: CM1 PIXIUM: POWER SUPPLY PIXIUM: OPTICAL FIBER
ASPS: CP9 (230VAC) PID: B11-C2 PID: B14-C1 / Main controller: CM10 PID: B19-C1
Fig. 7
Detector PIXIUM RF4343: PU module

TECHNICAL MANUAL
CM1
P3 P1 P2

Fig. 8a
Measure chamber Medys mod.MIC-10 Cod. 2252611
CM1
TO MAIN CONTROLLER
Fig. 8b
Measure chamber Claymount mod. SSMC 508 / PREAMPLIFICATORE 1007
Note. The figure 8b represents the Claymount mod. SSMC 508 5-area chamber
It is also the same for Claymount models SSMC 613 and SSMC 601 - 3 area chamber

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Fig. 9a
19” Tecnint colour monitor
230 Vac power supply BNC Video IN VGA Video IN ground

(SBFM) (DIP340)
VGA Video IN BNC Video IN ground 230 Vac power supply

(DIP340) (SBFM)
Fig. 9b
19” Invicta monochrome monitor
VGA Video IN BNC Video IN ground 230 Vac power supply
Fig. 9c
19” Invicta colour monitor

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Connect to
Main Controller: CM22
Fig. 10
Dose Area Meter (optional)
Attention:
ONLY connect and/or disconnect the DAM to/from the Main Controller when the machine is
switched off.
Attention:
The DAM is a very FRAGILE device: handle with care.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.3 CONNECTIONS
See the descriptions below, the figures and block diagram that follow for details of the connections
required during installation.
There is a slot at the bottom of the cabinet for the cables leaving this, as shown in the figure below.
A cabinet can be supplied, on request, with three slots in the side to facilitate the positioning and fixing
of the output cables (see figure below).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Plastic grid “D” near the cables inside the cabinet lets you fix the cables with straps “E” (see figures
below).
C
B
A
Cross-section of inside of cabinet
The three side slots let you split the output cables into practical groups by function.
We recommend splitting the cables as follows:
 Power cables (slot A):
- cabinet power cable,

- general cabinet earth cable,
- detector unit power cable,
- detector power unit earth cable,
- monitor power cables,
- monitor earth cables,
- DVD recorder power cable (optional device),

TECHNICAL MANUAL
 Internal interface cables (slot B)
- ionising chamber cable,

- DAM cable (optional device),
- DVD recorder USB cable (optional device),
- keyboard/mouse repeater cable,
- detector power cable,
- detector optical fibre cable,
- VGA/BNC cables – Working Monitor,
- VGA/BNC cables – Reference Monitor.
 External interface cables (slot C)
- ETHERNET cable,
- X-ray generator/Accessory (Main Controller CM6 and CM8) connection cables,
- RS232/CAN cable for interface with X-ray generator,
- CAN cable(s) for stand and collimator connections.
3.3.1 INSIDE THE SYSTEM
Make the following connections:
• Connections between the keyboard and mouse and the rack (see also para. 3.3.3):
- connect the extension cables to the Extender transmitter module
- connect the keyboard to Receiver-KB
- connect the mouse to Receiver-MS.
Note: To ensure that the mouse and keyboard are properly connected, you must check
the colours of the jacks (green for the mouse and purple for the keyboard).
• Detector unit connections:

- Detector power supply: connect the PU (+24V Out) cable to the detector (PIXIUM:
POWER SUPPLY)).
- Optical fibre data cable: from detector (OPTICAL FIBER) to PU (DATA LINK).
- Ion chamber to Main Controller: CM21.
Note: We recommend taking great care when handling the optical fibre cables: do not
stretch these or bend excessively.
• Monitor connections:
- 230 V AC supply (+ earth) from supply board: TB3.
- VGA cable for working monitor to RGBC: CM2.
3.3.1.1 CONNECTING THE OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
• DVD-Recorder connection:
- signal cable to PID: B10-C1.
- 230 VAC power supply from supply board: TB3.
• Dose Area Meter connection:

- cable to MainController: CM22.
• Optional monitor connection:

- 230 VAC power supply (+ earth) from supply board: TB3.
- BNC cable for working monitors to RGBC: CV4-CV6.
- BNC cable for reference monitors to RGBC: CV1-CV3.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.3.2 PERIPHERAL CONNECTIONS
X-ray generator / Stand connection:

3.3.2.1 OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS
- Ethernet cable for DICOM to PID: B11-C3.
Depending on the type of integration (see Annex 7.5):
- RS 232 cable to MainController: CM24,
- CAN BUS cable for peripheral devices (collimator, generator, stand) to MainController: CM4
or CM5.
- connection with the INJECTOR at MainController: CM11.
Note: The CAN BUS is connected using a 150 Ohm resistance fitted inside a connector on Main
Controller CM4.
3.3.3 RECEIVER MODULE POWER SUPPLY
The figure below shows all the mouse and keyboard connections.
violet taps : Keyboard

green taps : Mouse
PIDRF43
Processor
Main
Controller 20 m 1,5 m
1,5 m
EXTENDER
RECEIVER

TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.3.4 SYSTEM SUPPLY
Note: It is crucial that the detector is always left powered up, so that its working temperature is as
constant as possible.
The room power supply system therefore has two different power supplies, with two distinct insertion
systems: one for the acquisition system and another for the detector.
Figure 9 shows the general power supply system including the necessary emergency buttons.
PIXIUM RF4343
PIXIUM RF4343
Fig. 9

TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.3.4.1 ACQUISITION SYSTEM SUPPLY
The system must be fed with single-phase 230 V~, 50/60 Hz.
Electrical input is 700 VA.
2
Use conductors with a minimum cross-section of 1.5 mm² (max of 4mm ).
- Connect the supply conductors to connector TB1 on the supply board (fig. 10a and 10b).
- Connect the earth conductor to terminal board GP1 on system supply board (using a conductor with
a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm²).
- If the cables leave the cabinet through the slot at the bottom of this, the power cable must be
positioned as shown in Figure 10c and fixed with a strap to the two cable clips so it cannot come
loose accidentally.
- If the cables leave the cabinet through the side slots (optional), the power cable must be positioned
as shown in Figure 10d and fixed with a strap to the plastic grid so it cannot come loose accidentally.
Note 1: If a supply shielded cable is used, the shield must be earthed, as shown in the figures (10a-
10b).
Note 2: It must be possible for the acquisition system supply to be cut using the room cut-out
command.
Caution: Check that the emergency switches required for the room do actually cut the system power
supply.
TB1
1 1
2 2
3 3
230Vac
Power Supply Unit
Input
GP1
Fig. 10a
Fig. 10b
Fig. 10c Fig. 10d

Fixed cable Plastic grid

TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.3.4.2 PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR SUPPLY
It is crucial that the detector is always left powered up, so that its working temperature is as constant
as possible.
It must, however, be possible to cut the detector's power supply with a manual switch (see fig. 9
above).
The detector is fed via its supply board with stabiliser inside the system cabinet.
The detector supply board must be fed with single-phase 230 V ~, 50/60 Hz.
Electrical input is max 130 VA.
2
Use conductors with a minimum cross-section of 0.75 mm² (max of 4mm ).
- Connect the supply conductors to connector TB1 on the detector supply board (figures 11a and 11b).
- Connect the earth conductor to the earth terminal on the detector supply board.
- The cable must be laid as shown fig.11c and set at fixed cable to prevent the accidental posting.
Note: If a supply shielded cable is used, the shield must be earthed , as shown in the figures (11a-11b).
TB1
F1
230 Vac
F2
Detector Power Supply Board
Fig. 11a
Fixed cable
230Vac
Fig. 11b
Fig. 11c

TECHNICAL MANUAL
COLOR
WORKING MONITOR
VIDEO SIGNAL
DVD-RECORDER
230Vac
RGBC 01 BOARD 21Vac
CM2 CM1
EXTENDER
RECEIVER
DVI/VGA CONVERTER
KEYBOARD
B12-C1 B11-C1 B10-C1
B11-C4 WORKING MONITOR
MOUSE B9-C1
Video Processor
SUPPLY
B9-C2
POWER
PID RF43 (sn4xx)

B14-C1 230Vac
B11-C2
DICOM CM5
NETWORK B11-C3
B14-C2 B2-C1
REFERENCE MONITOR
I/O RS-232
INFRARED
REMOTE
RECEIVER (*)
CM25 CM15 CM20

230Vac
CM21
CM22
CM15
CM10 REFERENCE MONITOR
CM6 MAIN CONTROLLER
CM8
ION. CHAMBER
CM24
230Vac
CM4/5
230Vac
DAM (*)
CM11
NET.1
230Vac
B1-C1
+24V OUT
PU4343
PIXIUM FE4343F
DATA LINK +24V IN
B6-C2
FT1 TR1 CM2

CM1
RFPS 00
TO ACCESSORY BOARD CM3
TO X-RAY GENERATOR
RS-232
CP9
CAN BUS
CP10
INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CP12
TB3 ON/OFF CP13
TB3
TB1
MAIN 230Vac
always present
MAIN 230Vac
Fig. 12
Block diagram
(*)=OPTION

TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.4 INTERFACE SIGNALS
The system mainly uses the following connectors for its peripheral interface:
MainController-CM6 for connection to accessory / X-ray generator,
MainController-CM8 for connection to the X-ray generator.
The interface signals are shown in the figures below.
The following annexes explain the meanings of the signals
- Para. 7.5 Integration with X-ray generator

- Para. 7.6 Integration with X-ray collimator
- Para. 7.7 Integration with stand
- Para. 7.8 Integration with anti-scatter grid.
- Par. 7.9 Integration with Dose Area Meter.
- Par. 7.10 Stitching. Integration and settings.
- Par. 7.11 Integration with automatic injector.
FLUORO/HCF HIRIS RF43

FOOT SWITCH +24V CM6
REQ_FL/HCF 11
PREP_RAD 30
PREP_RAD REQ_RAD 12
COM_REQ 31
RAD
ZOOM
ZOOM 1 (30x30) 34
ZOOM 2 (20x20) 16
SEL_FLAT_PANEL 1 17
SEL_FLAT_PANEL 2 13
SEL_FLAT_PANEL_1_CPI 14
0V1 ACC. 15
0V ACC. 10
+V ACC. 29
+24V
SEL_INJ. 3
SEL_INJ.
SYNC_INJ. 21
SYNC_INJ.
23
CM11
SYNC_INJ_1 1
SYNC_INJ_1
SYNC_INJ_1 2
SYNC_INJ_1
ACCESSORY/X-RAY GENERATOR
INTERFACE
TECHNICAL MANUAL
HIRIS RF43
CM8
+24V
+24V GEN. 7-20
PREP_PULSED 14
PREP.HCF
SEL_PULSED_HCF 1
SEL_PULSED_HCF
SEL_PULSED 2
SEL_PULSED
READY_AQ_RAD/HCF 17
READY_AQ_RAD/HCF
READY_ACQ_FL 5
READY_AQ_FL.
ABC_LOW 18
ABS_LOW
ABC_HIGH 6
ABS_HIGH
ABC_ERROR 12
ABS_ERROR
0V 13
+24V
GEN_READY 23
EXON 21
0V GEN. 19
SERIAL LINK CM24

RS-232
Rx =2
Tx =3
0V =5
CAN BUS CM5
CAN L =2
CAN H =7
0V =3
CM4
124E
CAN L =2
CAN H =7
0V =3
CAN BUS
TERMINATION
INTERFACE

TECHNICAL MANUAL
4 SETUP PROCEDURE
4.1 INTRODUCTION
The system set-up procedure basically involves the activities listed in the table below in the order in
which they are to be performed:
Set-up stages Operations Menus used Ref.

(para)
General system - hardware settings - General setup 4.2
setup - archive directory 4.2
- hospital name 4.2
- factory setting parameters 4.2.1
- choice of application language 4.2.2
- AUTODELETE function setup 4.2.3
- application name 4.2.4
- definition of integrated components - General setup / Main 4.3
Controller RAD Setup
- LOGICAL MODE setup 4.4
- automatic digital collimation - General setup 4.2
Main Controller - definition of focal distances for grids - General setup / Main 4.3.1
parameter setup Controller RAD Setup
Part 5:
- calibration of working dose: - radiography - Exam setup / Exam 5.2
- calibration of ion chamber Dose Adj 5.2.1
- calibration of D.A.M. 5.3
- calibration of working dose: - continuous fluorosc. 5.4.1
- HCF fluoroscopy 5.4.2
Study type selection - choosing the study folder - Exam setup 4.4.1
and setup - filling in the study folder 4.4.4
- organising the study list 4.4.3
DICOM network - DICOM names and codes - Dicom 4.5.2
setup - setting Worklist parameters 4.5.6
- setting Store parameters 4.5.7
- setting CD/DVD writing parameters 4.5.8
- setting Print parameters 4.5.9
- setting Film editor parameters 4.5.9
- setting MPPS parameters 4.5.10
- setting Storage Commitment parameters 4.5.11
- setting Query Retrieve parameters 4.5.12
- setting IHE conformity parameters 4.5.13
- setting Dicom Dose SR parameters 4.5.16
Monitor controls - brightness and contrast - Diagnostics 4.6
checks - black level
- gamma curve
PIXIUM RF4343 - Apu4343 configuration - SD4343 5.2
Detector Calibration - finding the X-ray exposure values for calibration of 5.6.2
Gain and Detective Map
- calibration of active “logical mode” 5.6.3 et
seq.
Note: - You must also calibrate the Wireless DRX1 detector if the system is fitted with two detectors
(see chapter 3 in Part 6).
- You must also calibrate the Wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ detector if the system is fitted with two
detectors (see chapter 3 in Part 7).
revision H PART 2 page 4. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The SD4343 menu is found on the desktop (see chapter 5 below), while the other menus used for the
system set-up are all found in the Main Frame, Option / Setup.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2 GENERAL SETUP
This lets you set the general parameters.
The menu can only be opened when all archives are closed: select Option / Setup / General Setup.
Note: - See paragraph 2.3.2 in Part 6 of this manual for details of the General Setup settings if the
system is fitted with two detectors (with Wireless DRX1 detector).
- See paragraph 2.3.2 in Part 7 of this manual for details of the General Setup settings if the
system is fitted with two detectors (with Wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ detector).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The tables below show the options in the General Setup menu:
System hardware setup.

These parameters are already set in factory: do not
Hardware Settings alter these.
Settings Notes
Main Controller Serial Serial port selection for Set as 1.
Port # Main Controller
Dual Screen Enables the reference Set 1 if reference

monitor monitor is to be used
IP AccpBox Definition of IP Address for Set as 192.168.0.2. If the system is fitted with two
PU4343 detectors and THALES SW
(with release less than
2.3.4.0), you need to set a
different PU IP Address to
10.0.1.2
To restore the connections between the PID and PU

PU Service Data processors. These parameters are already set in the
factory: do not change.
Settings Notes
User Name User name for Log In Set Admin2
Password User password Set ats_PED.24
Service Name Set AcppBoxService
During Offset calibration only.

PU Offset Calibration Parameters These parameters are already set in the factory: do
not change..
Settings Notes
Offset Life Time Offset duration. Cannot be set Time in seconds =
Fixed at 1800 30 minutes
Min. Time Remaining Threshold for Offset. Set 300 Time in seconds =
in Offset Life Time If the effective time is less than 10 minutes
this parameter, calibration
automatically takes place when
a new exam is opened.
Active Dynamic Enables the logical mode offset If not selected, the
Update Offset refresh function every 5 Recommended system automatically
seconds when study list shown updates the logical
mode offset when
each study is
opened.
Smart PU When enabled, the system Recommended
Connection acquires the offset during fast
rebooting of the application
(within 5 min since last closed).
This function is not performed
in the case of a total system
reboot.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Indicates the actual radiography exposure dose.

A warning appears if the detected dose differs from
Rad Exposure Dose Indication that set for the exam.
The dose is determined on the basis of the image
levels and the sensitivity of the detector.
Settings Notes
Min Accepted Dose Error Minimum acceptable Typ. value: 25% e.g. this message appears
level for radiography when the detected dose is
dose (% of that set in less than 25% the set
the exam card) dose.
Max Accepted Dose Error Maximum acceptable Typ. value: 300% e.g. this message appears
level for radiography when the detected dose is
dose (% of that set in more than 300% the set
the exam card) dose.
Dose ROI Reduction Defines the size of the Typ. value: 30% Image levels are read on
Factor dose reading area, the basis of the image
starting from the image processing ROI set in the
processing ROI exam card.
If, for example, you set a
value of 30%, the dose
will be calculated within an
area of less than 30% the
processing ROI.
Hide Indication if Dose in Enables display of the Recommended setting
Range exposure index only
when the dose falls
outside the accepted
range (Result: OK
appears if the dose is
within the accepted
range)
Open/Save/Copy Setting Definition of the default directory for image archives.
Settings Notes
Default Open Dir Set: D:\Archives
Default Save Dir Set: D:\Archives
CopyToCD Tmp Dir Set: C:\CDImages
Specific installation wording

Display Settings
Settings Notes
Hospital Name To set the hospital name. This doesn't appear on
the monitor, just the
print-outs.
Show Laterality View Enables the display and Typically not enabled
Markers possibility of changing
the DICOM
LATERALITY and VIEW
fields directly within the
image frame

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Digital shutters overlaid on the actual shutters.

This function can only be selected if the X-ray system
Automatic Shutters has an integrated X-ray shutter capable of supplying
the system with its aperture value.
Settings Notes
Fluoro Shutter Disable If checked, when Fluoro or Not Checked by default
Pulsed acquisition are
completed, no electronic
shutter will be applied on
the image.
Auto Shutters Check to enable the Check if the integrated
function shutter is present.
Horizontal Shutters offset Accepted range: Default value: 0 Digital shuttering can be
-500 to +500 (detector varied to suit the actual
pixels). aperture by means of
The function is disabled the horizontal and
if values >500 are set. vertical offset parameter
Vertical Shutters offset Accepted range: Default value: 0 settings: negative values
-500 to +500 (detector widen the edges of the
pixels). digital shutter; positive
The function is disabled values narrow these.
if values >500 are set.
Note: 10 pixels
correspond to
roughly 1.5 mm
actual aperture.
Juke Box Web Page Network connection with the Rebox device (CD/DVD burner).
Settings Notes
Web Page https://192.168.50.108:8080/rebox/view.php?key=hiris Set only if the
Rebox is installed
Specification of the hard disk directory to be used for Acrobat Reader, needed
PDF Documentation Reader
to view online manuals.
Settings Notes
Set:
C:\ProgramFiles\Adobe\Acrobat 7.0\Reader\Acrord32.exe
Commands
Main Controller RAD To open the parameter setup menu for the grids and (see paragraph 4.2.4
Setup define the integrated components (X-ray generator, below).
collimator, etc.)
Factory Settings To set the default values for the fields in the menu Only enable with
shown integrator key inserted.
See 4.2.1.
Language Settings To set the language Enabled after entering
specific integrator
password
See 4.2.2.
Auto Delete Sets the conditions for enabling the automatic study See 4.2.3
deletion function.
Edit Application Name To define the name of the application Parameter set by
system integrator
Customize RX Filter To open the setup menu for the X-ray beam filters (if See paragraph 4.2.6.
fitted) on the X-ray collimator.
Cancel To quit General Setup without saving any changes
OK To quit General Setup saving changes

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2.1 FACTORY SETTINGS
This function restores the default factory settings for all the General Setup parameters.
Confirm with Yes: the system restores all the default parameters.
4.2.2 LANGUAGE SETTINGS
This function lets you set the operator interface language. It is enabled after entering an access
password. Password to access this menu should be request to the supplier.
Select the language you want and then click on OK to confirm.
The new language is used the next time you run the application.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2.3 AUTO DELETE SETUP
This menu lets you set the parameters for the AUTO DELETE function.
If enabled, this function automatically deletes the oldest exams in the current archive.
Options Notes
Enable Auto Delete To enable the AUTODELETE function
On Close Archive To enable the CLOSE ARCHIVE

function
On Close Study To enable the CLOSE STUDY
function
% (10-90) Auto Delete High Level To set the disk filling threshold: above The value set
(Start) this value, the AUTODELETE function between 10% and
is activated 90%
% (5-80) Auto Delete Low Level To set the disk filling threshold: below Of course the value
(Stop) this value, the AUTODELETE function set here must be
is deactivated. lower than that for %
(10-90) Auto Delete
High Level (Start)
% (80-99) Acquisition Warning To set the disk filling threshold: above Can also be set as a
Level this value a warning appears for the warning when the
operator. AUTODELETE
function is disabled.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2.4 EDIT APPLICATION NAME
This function is only enabled with the integrator key. It lets you set a new name for the system (i.e. to
change the default name).
The new name appears on the screen in the operator interface windows.
It is also sent to the following DICOM fields: Device Name and Device Name Serial Number.
4.2.5 MAIN CONTROLLER RAD SETUP
This menu lets you:

- define the radiological plant components integrated with the system,
- set the acceptable focal distance range for the grids.
In fact, with an integrated X-ray collimator and grid unit, the system checks that the focal
distance is compatible with the existing grid, depending on the limits set here.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Grid Settings This function can only be used if the value of the actual focal
distance is supplied via CAN from the stand/collimator.
Settings Notes
GRID 1: Min focal distance at Set the envisaged value The system allows for integration
DFFmin which exposure is enabled for the radiography with two extractable grids (thus
with grid 1. system exposure without any grid is also
GRID 1: Max focal distance at Set the envisaged value possible).
DFFmax which exposure is enabled for the radiography
with grid 1. system If the actual focal distance falls
GRID 2: Min focal distance at Set the envisaged value outside the accepted range,
DFFmin which exposure is enabled for the radiography image acquisition is inhibited
with grid 2 system (and thus also X-ray emission).
GRID 2: Max focal distance at Set the envisaged value
with grid 2. system
NO GRID: Min focal distance at Set the envisaged value
DFFmin which exposure is enabled for the radiography
without any grid. system
No GRID: Max focal distance at Set the envisaged value
without any grid. system
Options Options parameters let you set the presence/absence of

accessory components/functions:
X-ray collimator, X-ray generator, stand.
Integrated rx Integrated X-ray collimator Enable this parameter if See Annex 7.6 for integration
collimator with CAN interface the integrated X-ray details.
collimator with CAN
interface is present.
Integrated rx Integrated X-ray generator Enable this parameter if See Annex 7.5 for integration
generator (CAN with CAN interface the integrated X-ray details.
Interface) generator with CAN
Integrated rx Integrated X-ray generator Enable this parameter if See Annex 7.5 for integration
generator (RS232 with RS232 interface the integrated X-ray details.
Interface) generator with RS232
Remote Remote control stand with Enable this parameter if See Annex 7.7 for integration
controlled stand CAN interface the remotely controlled details.
stand with CAN interface
is present.
IR Remote Activates reception of Enable this parameter if
Control commands via IR remote the IR remote control
control option is present.
Virtual Collimator Activates the virtual Enable this parameter if
collimator function that the collimator is integrated
lets you see the position via CAN BUS and you
of the X-ray collimators wish to enable the
even without X-ray function.
emission
Remote Console Activates reception of Enable this parameter if
commands via a system the system control panel
control panel with CAN interface is
present.
Check Technique Coherence check Enable this parameter if See paragraph 4.3.1 for details.
between the programmed the remotely controlled
position and presence of stand with CAN interface
the stand is present and the
programmed position
check is enabled.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2.6 X-RAY FILTER CONFIGURATION
This menu lets you define up to 4 different X-ray beam filters on the collimator (if these are fitted).
The filter to be used can be set in the exam card using the RX filter parameter (see paragraph 4.5.4.2
below).
Details of the filter parameter settings are sent by the equipment via the DICOM DOSE SR service
(see paragraph 4.6.16.3 below).
You can set up to 4 different filters, provided these

appear in the RX filter parameter in the exam card:
F0 = corresponds to RX filter =0 No filter

F1 = corresponds to RX filter =1 Filter 1
RX Filter Config
Settings Notes
Filter Use to select the filter Select the relevant
you want to set item in the list.
Type Use to select the type Select the relevant

of filter item in the list (DICOM
specifications).
Material 1, 2, 3 Use to select max 3 Select the relevant

types of material from item in the list (DICOM
which the filter is specifications).
made.
Thickness Min. Minimum thickness of 0 - 5000 microns These two values will
[micron] the material be the same if the filter
Thickness Max. Maximum thickness of 0 - 5000 microns is the same thickness
[micron] the material throughout.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.3 DEFINITION OF INTEGRATED COMPONENTS
The system allows for the presence of the integrated peripheral components listed in the table below:
integrated component ref

X-ray generator See Annex, paragraph 7.5
X-ray collimator See Annex, paragraph 7.6
Stand See Annex, paragraph 7.7
Anti-scatter grid See Annex, paragraph 7.8
The presence of the integrated components/functions is set using the parameters in the Main
Controller RAD Setup menu - Options:
Integrated rx collimator Integrated shutter with CAN interface

Integrated rx generator (CAN Interface) Integrated X-ray generator with CAN interface
Integrated rx generator (RS232 Interface) Integrated X-ray generator with RS232 interface
Remote controlled stand Remote controlled stand with CAN interface
Option 5 N.U.
Option 6 N.U.
Check Technique This enables the check technique if the “Remote
controlled stand” is present (see point 4.3.1 below).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.3.1 EXAMPLES FOR INSTALLATION WITH A REMOTELY CONTROLLED STAND
The figure below shows two typical remotely controlled rooms.
The integrations possible for these systems are:

- X-ray generator:
o by enabling option Integrated rx generator (CAN Interface)
o or Integrated rx generator (RS232 Interface),
- X-ray collimator:
o by enabling option Integrated rx collimator,
- stand:
o by enabling option Remote controlled stand.
You can also use the Remote controlled stand option to check the correct position of the grid.
In fact, the system lets you set the type of grid to be used to suit the exam type (GRID 1, GRID 2 or
NO GRID) and then check that this is correctly position before X-ray emission:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Use the Exam Setup menu to select the type of grid (see paragraph 4.4.4 below)
• Use the Main Controller RAD Setup menu to set the grid acceptance parameters.
For example, if the stand has 2 grids, focussed at 120 and 180 cm, the settings may be:
GRID 1: DFFmin Min focal distance for exposure with grid 1: 110
DFFmax Max focal distance for exposure with grid 1: 150
GRID 2: DFFmin Min focal distance for exposure with grid 2: 140
DFFmax Max focal distance for exposure with grid 2: 200
NO GRID: DFFmin Min focal distance for exposure with no grid : 80

DFFmax Max focal distance for exposure with no grid: 250.
In which case, if the selected exam foresees the use of GRID1 and the focal distance supplied by the
system (via CAN bus) is not within 110 - 150 cm, image acquisition is not enabled.
.
Remotely controlled stands normally let you position the different system components automatically in
order to get the right layout for the type of exam set in the exam card. You can thus program the type
of projection required in the exam card (see paragraph 4.4 below): the system sends the relevant code
to the stand when you open the exam.
For example, the figures below show the system in the positions for:
- projection 1 (exams with patient lying on bed),
- projection 2 (exams with patient standing, e.g.: chest),
- projection 3 (side projection, with patient lying on bed).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 2 3
The position is set in the Exam Setup menu using the Accessory Code option in the Miscellaneous
Properties window.
Up to 8 positions are possible. The code for the selected position (1-8) is sent to the stand (via CAN
bus) when you open the exam.
If the Remote controlled stand option is enabled, the system checks that the current position of the
stand corresponds to that programmed for the exam.
You can, however, decide whether any differences in position should inhibit image acquisition (and
thus X-ray emission) or simply generate a warning for the operator.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Check the following option in the Main Controller RAD Setup menu:
● Check Technique
- Checked: when the stand is incorrectly positioned for the type of projection , X-ray emission is
inhibited and the following alarm appears:
SELECT TECHNIQUE #x (if the selected exam type requires projection x),
- Not checked, X-ray emission is enabled, even if the stand position is not correct. The operator is
warned of this fact:
WARNING: TECHNIQUE #x REQUESTED (if the exam requires projection x).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.4 LOGICAL MODE SETUP
On accessing the Logical Mode Setup menu (after entering the technical password), you can set a
few parameters concerning the detector’s Logical Modes.
Each acquisition mode in the system is identified by a Logical Mode. The following parameters can be
set for each Logical Mode:
Sensitivity: sensitivity of the detector expressed in number of levels/nGy.

Set the value – for the Logical Mode – provided by the detector manufacturer.
This parameter will be inserted to the TAG (0018, 6000) "Sensitivity" when you
send an image to the PACS. The typical values are shown in the table below:
Sensitivity
Logical Mode Field View(cm) Logical Mode Id PU Mode
(Isb/nGy)
Continuous Fluoroscopy 43x43 1 3 16.1
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z1 30x30 2 7 10.7
Pulsed Fluoroscopy 43x43 5 2 16.1
Pulsed Fluoroscopy Z1 30x30 6 7 10.7
Rad 3 i/s 43x43 10 17 0.6
Rad 8 i/s 43x43 11 4 1.2
Tomo 4s 43x43 15 17 0.6
Tomo 2s 43x43 16 17 0.6

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Border: to define the number of lines or columns that should not be shown on each side of the
detector. Set the detector borders as shown in the table below:
Logical Mode PU Mode Left Border Right Border Top Border Bottom Border
1 3 7 7 2 2
2 7 0 0 2 2
3 15 0 0 2 2
4 27 0 0 0 0
5 2 7 7 2 2
6 7 0 0 2 2
7 22 0 0 2 2
8 27 0 0 0 0
10 17 20 20 3 3
11 4 10 10 2 2
15 17 20 20 3 3
16 17 20 20 3 3

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5 EXAM SETUP
The system offers a series of Reference exams covering a wide range of applications, where the
specific exam parameters have been pre-set to get a correct image.
These parameters are found in the EXAM SETUP card and are split as follows:
• Image processing parameters, under a single heading Post Processing Setup (only accessed by
the system integrator).
• Radiological, image orientation and DICOM parameters, that can be changed to suit the type of
installation and operator requests (see point 4.4.4 below).
There are two steps involved in setting the system exams:

a) Selection of the exam you're interested in (from the “Reference Exams” list); the selected
exams will be proposed each time.
b) Changes to the accessible parameters in the Exam setup card.
Access to the Exam Setup card (and thus the exam) involves two choices: anatomic part and
projection type.
Up to 100 different anatomic parts can normally be defined, with up to 100 different projection types
per zone:
- each anatomic part has an ID (00 - 99),
- and each projection type a second ID (00 - 99).
See annex 7.10 in this Part of the manual for the full list of exams possible with this system.
Example:
Anatomic part Projection type
ID Description ID Description
00 SKULL 00 AP
01 LL
02 …
… …
… … … …
03 ABDOMEN 00 AP
01 Decubitus
02 …
… … … …
An exam is always shown preceded by its ID.

e.g.: 16 21 Abdomen Decubitus.
ID (zone) + ID (projection type) unmistakably identify an Exam Setup card.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.1 SELECTING THE TYPE OF EXAM YOU WANT
During installation, you need to decide which exams are to be added to the “local library” for the
operator.
The following functions let you create this Local exam library, starting from the Reference exams:
o Clone, this generates a new Exam Setup card, identical to the current one, but with a
new ID. You change the name and free parameters in this card (radiological parameters,
image orientation, zoom, etc.).
o Remove, to eliminate the card from the archive of reference exams.
To access the exam card manager, select Option / Setup / RF Exam Setup and enter the technical
password. The RF Exam Setup Manager opens:
Click on Go to card to select the card: the Exam Setup menu opens. This is split into 4 groups of
parameters, as shown in the figure below:
exam ID parameters DICOM ID parameters
“Miscellaneous”
parameters
exposure and display parameters
Not all the parameters shown in the exam card can be changed by the operator: the ones that can be
changed are described in paragraph 4.4.4 below.
Note: - To select the exams linked to the Wireless DRX1 detector see paragraph 2.3.4 in Part 6 of this
manual (for the system fitted with two detectors).
- To select the exams linked to the Wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ detector see paragraph 2.3.4 in
Part 7 of this manual (for the system fitted with two detectors).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.2 CREATING A NEW EXAM CARD
If necessary, you can create a new exam card, starting from an existing one. Of course, the new exam
card needs to be given a different ID. You can then change the name of this new card and the free
parameters (radiological parameters, image orientation, zoom, etc.):
- Click on the Clone command that appears in the window that lets you select the card you want to
clone.
- Confirm with OK: the window for the new card automatically opens, letting you assign the new codes.
- Fill in the Anatomic Part and Card Name

fields:
- Anatomic Part - Code:

the numerical code that identifies the
anatomic part for that exam,
- Anatomic Part - Description: description of the anatomic part,
- Card Name - Code: numerical code identifying the type of projection,
- Card Name - Description: description of the type of projection,
Note: You do not usually need to create a new anatomic part, but simply a new exam within a
given anatomic part. We therefore recommend that you keep the same Anatomic Part -
Code/ Description as the cloned exam.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.3 HOW THE EXAM LIST IS ORGANISED
Click on the Organize option in the Exam Setup Manager menu to open the Tech Card Organizer
menu that contains the list of all the reference exams in the system.
This menu lets you:

- Change the name of the anatomic parts and their associated exams.
- Decide which anatomical parts and relevant exams are to appear in the exam list.
- Decide the order in which these exams will be shown in the selection list in the working frame.
• Change name
- Move the cursor to the anatomic part of exam you want
- Use the Change Anatomic Name or Change Card Name commands to open the Change
Name window
- Select the name and change this (NB: no double names are permitted).
- Confirm with OK.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Define local library: the Tech Card Organizer menu presents the list of all the anatomic parts and
their exams in the system and forms the reference exam archive, available to the installer.
The anatomic parts and the “activated” exams form the Local exam library, available to the installer
(in the working frame).
- To add an anatomic part or exam to the local library, select it and then click on Activate: a
green symbol indicates that it has been activated.
- To remove an anatomic part or exam from the local library, select it and then click on
Deactivate: a red symbol indicates that it has been deactivated.
Skull deactivated for projection Sinuses lat Skull deactivated
• Reorganise local library: the Tech Card Organizer menu lists the anatomic parts and their exams
in the local library in the order in which they will be presented to the operator in the working frame.
To change the order:
- Select the anatomic part or exam you want to move.
- Use the Up or Dw commands to move its position within the list.
Example: - select anatomic part UPPER EXTREMITY

- use Up to move it up the list
- UPPER EXTREMITY is now 2nd in the list.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.4 CHANGING FREE PARAMETERS
You need to check (and possibly modify) the free parameters of each selected exam in the card.
Below is a description of each parameter, split into “general parameters” and “specific parameters for
each acquisition mode” (radiography / continuous fluoroscopy / pulsed HCF fluoroscopy).
general parameters
Acquisition mode parameters

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.4.1 GENERAL PARAMETERS
Settings Notes
Size valid To enable the patient Select at least one size If a size is not enabled
types (no check), the relevant
column of parameters
will be disabled.
Miscellaneous
Settings Notes
Accessory Code To set the working 0 - 100 (RF43 det.) Use to set the working
position of the stand 101 - 199 (wireless position of an integrated
det.) stand with programmable
positioning.
See also paragraph 4.3.1.
Shutters X/Y Inversion X / Y inversion of the Use if the current X/Y
electronic shutters on representation of the
the image electronic shutters is
not the actual
situation.
Flip/Rotation Code Digital orientation: set to The value to be set depends
get the right orientation 0-7 on the orientation of the
of the image on the detector with respect to the
monitor. patient.
The table below* explains the
meaning of the code.
Auto Select HCF To select HCF pulsed To select HCF pulsed If not selected, Continuous
fluoroscopy as the fluoroscopy as the Fluoroscopy is the default
default mode when the default mode when the mode when the exam is
exam is opened. exam is opened. opened
Select Fluoro LOCK-IN To select Continuous Choose this function In fluoroscopy with automatic
Fluoroscopy with active in order to activate the kV, the system will adjust the
LOCK-IN acquisition in kV until reaching the correct
Continuous dose value, then it will
Fluoroscopy with maintain the dose value for all
LOCK-IN the acquisition.
Single Exposure With Automatic Check to enable If single exposure is checked,
Procedure modality, if Single Exposure during Automatic Procedure
checked set the exam modality exam with modality, if a single
as a single exposure Automatic Procedure radiography image is
modality exam modality performed, the procedure
otherwise, a multi image step increase automatically.
modality exam is Otherwise, multi image
enabled. exposure can be performed
and the step of the procedure
increase manually by the
operator (see User Manual)
*Image orientation:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
This section of the Exam Setup menu contains all the

Dicom parameters used to identify the exam in accordance
Properties with the DICOM standard. These parameters are
associated to each image and the patient data each
time the exam is saved or printed in DICOM format.
Settings Notes
Modality To set the default To set one of the foreseen The 2 parameters
DICOM mode. fields: (radiography /
CR \ RF fluoroscopy) are only
CR \ XA used if the exam
DX \ RF creation mode is not
DX \ XA already defined when
(radiography \ fluoroscopy) the Worklist is received.
Protocol Code identifying the To be agreed with the
procedure network administrator
Description Description of the exam To be agreed with the
network administrator
Body Part Part of the body to which Select one of the set fields:
the exam refers UNDEFINED
SKULL
CSPINE
TSPINE
LSPINE
SSPINE
COCCYX
CHEST
CLAVICLE
BREAST
ABDOMEN
PELVIS
HIP
SHOULDER
ELBOW
KNEE
ANKLE
HAND
FOOT
EXTREMITY
LEG
HEAD
HEART
JAW
ARM
NECK
Laterality Projection side Select one of the set fields:
Undefined
Right
Left
Unpaired
Both L&R
View Envisaged projection Select one of the set fields:
(view) Undefined
AP
PA
LL
RL
RLD
LLD
RLO
LLO

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.4.2 RADIOGRAPHY PARAMETERS
• Radiological parameters
Rad /item Set the parameters for each programmed patient type (Size
valid).
Settings Notes
Max rate To set the max - Max Rate: selection of max rate of acquisition for the
radiography rate possible selected logical mode.
for each size. When the
max rate is selected, the LM10:
max X-ray pulse time is - up to 1i/s with max X-ray pulse lasting 500ms
automatically defined. - up to 3i/s with max X-ray pulse lasting 150ms
LM11:
- up to 1i/s with max X-ray pulse lasting 500ms
Rate Mode To set the acquisition - Def Rate: acquisition at a The chosen mode is
mode constant rate throughout X-ray automatically set when
emission you open the exam.
- Sequence: acquisition at
variable rates, as per
programmed sequence.
- Angio Step (function not

available)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
To select the default Log. Mode 10: Log. Mode 11: Rate set automatically
radiography rate, Single Single when you open the exam.
Default Rate presented to the operator 1/s 1/s You can, however,
when the exam opens. change it manually.
You only can set this
parameter if the Rate 1.5i/s 1.5i/s 2i/s
Mode is set as Def Rate. 3i/s 3i/s 4i/s
The choice of rates 8i/s
depends on the Max rate
parameter (see above).
Phase 1( ..6) : To set the timing and rate The Rate field has the same You can program from 2
Rate / Time of acquisition for each settings as the Default Rate field to 6 phases.
phase (max 6) in a described above. The first phase with the
programmed sequence. The Time field is expressed in time set as 0 will act as
This can only be set if field seconds. the end of the sequence.
Rate Mode is set as Acquisition will continue at
Sequence. the rate set for this last
phase until you release
the X-ray command.
Lockin Enable To enable the Lockin Select to enable the function. Only available with the
function. DSA option.
This calculates the
exposure time from the
start of a radiography run
and keeps it constant until
the X-ray command is
released.
Auto Mask Enable To enable the automatic Select to enable the function. Only available with the
mask pickup function, with DSA option.
the timing programmed in
field Auto Mask Delay.
Auto Mask Delay To set the delay with Set the delay in seconds. Only available with the
which the auto mask is DSA option.
picked up after the start of
X-ray emission.
Injector Enable To enable the start Select if the exam foresees the Only available with the
command for an injector use of the injector. DSA option.
integrated in the X-ray
system (optional).
Injector Delay To set the time (delay or The Injector Delay field is Only available with the
advance) when the expressed in seconds. A DSA option.
injector starts with respect negative time will activate the
to the start of X-ray start injector signal before X-ray
emission. emission starts; a positive value
will delay the activation of the
signal.
Dose uGy To set the X-ray dose in Typical working value:
radiography mode 0.5 - 10 µGy 2.5 µGy.
kV Optimal kV value for 40 - 150 kV This value will be sent to
exposure the X-ray generator when
the exam is opened
mA Optimal mA value for 1 - 1000 mA This value will be sent to
the exam is opened.
Field only active if in AEC
mode.
mAs Optimal mAs value for 1 - 1000 mAs This value will be sent to
the exam is opened.
Field only active if in
manual exposure mode,
i.e. not AEC mode.
AEC Left To enable the automatic Left If you do not select any
AEC Center AEC control by choosing area, the X-ray generator
AEC Right at least one area of the Center performs exposure of a
ion chamber controlled length. (NO
Right AEC)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Focal Spot Focus of the X-ray tube 0 = small focus This value will be sent to
used for exposure the X-ray generator when
1 = large focus the exam is opened.
Focal distance Envisaged focal distance 80 - 250 cm This value will be
for exposure compared with the actual
focal distance in order to
enable exposure
To set the image This factor will be used by
Calibration Factor enlargement factor the system for TRUE SIZE
(depending on the focal 1.0 - 1.5 printing and default
distance and the distance calibration of the
between the object and measurements on the
the detector). image.
Grid Anti-scatter grid to be 0 = no grid This value will be sent to
used 1 = grid 1 the stand when the exam
2 = grid 2 is opened .
the value is then
compared with the actual
grid to enable exposure
Rx Filter To select the X-ray beam 0 = no filter This value will be sent to
filter in the collimator 1 = filter 1 the collimator when the
2 = filter 2 exam is opened
3 = filter 3
Screen selector X Horizontal aperture of the 1 - 43 cm This value will be sent to
X-ray collimator the collimator when the
exam is opened
Screen selector Y Vertical aperture of the X- 1 - 43 cm This value will be sent to
ray collimator the collimator when the
exam is opened
Default Rate Default radiography rate, Log. Mode 10: Log. Mode 11: The rate is set
presented to the operator Single Single automatically when the
when the exam is opened 1/s 1/s exam is opened
1.5/s 2/s
3/s 4/s
8/s
Note: In the case of an integrated X-ray generator, the kV, mA, mAs and Focal Spot parameters are
automatically sent to the X-ray generator. See also paragraph 7.5 below.
The values of the mA and mAs parameters set here must match those envisaged by the X-ray
generator scales.
Even if the generator is not integrated, it is important that these parameters are set correctly, as
they are a guide for the operator (who can view them by pressing a symbol in the working
frame).
• Display parameters

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Rad /item This section of the Exam Setup menu groups the
parameters that determine how the radiography image
will be displayed.
Settings Notes
View negative Positive/negative display Select to suit exam Radiography images are
of the image normally negatives.
Automatic enlargement
Fill the Size of the collimated images Select to suit exam
to fit the max size
permitted by the monitor
Default image zoom 1.0 - 2.9 1.0 = full screen (43x43
Geometric mag. factor on monitor cm)
2.9 = an area of about

14x14 cm (1 monitor pixel
= 1 detector pixel).
Nom. Field + Fill Size Enlargement mode for Select when you want the
the radiography image radiography image to be
on the monitor: shown:
- depends on the zoom - during X-ray acquisition,
factor selected during X- in the same dimensions
ray acquisition and the as a previous fluoroscopy
size of aperture of the image,
collimator at the end of - at the end of acquisition,
acquisition. with the collimated area in
the max size permitted by
the monitor.
Nom. Field + Geom Mag. Enlargement mode for Select when you want the
the radiography image radiography image to be
on the monitor: shown:
- depends on the zoom - during X-ray acquisition,
factor selected during X- in the same dimensions
ray acquisition and as a previous fluoroscopy
enlarged by the value image,
set in the Geometric - at the end of acquisition,
mag. at the end of with a set enlargement
acquisition. value.
Field View Ext. Enlargement mode for Select when you want the This is the normal setting
the radiography image radiography image to be during a DSA exam
on the monitor: shown in the same
- depends solely on the dimensions as a previous
selected zoom factor. fluoroscopy image.
To identify the Default parameter, to suit
Post Processing radiography image P.P. Name exam type.
processing parameters
for that exam.
To identify the Only available with the
Post Processing fluoroscopy image P.P. Name DSA option.
processing parameter in
DSA mode during MAX Parameter set in the
OPACIFICATION factory to suit the exam
type.
To identify the Only available with the
Post Processing radiography image P.P. Name DSA option.
in DSA mode. Parameter set in the
factory to suit the exam
type.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.4.3 CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY PARAMETERS
Accessed from the general Fluoro card that opens the specific cards for each acquisition mode:
Continuous Fluoroscopy → 43x43 cm field
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z1 → 30x30 cm field
• Common parameters for all acquisition formats
Only DSA
Only DSA
Fluoro /item
Settings Notes
To set the weight of the None This filter setting is an

Weight Rec filter recursive filter in Filter with K = 2 alternative to the spatial
continuous fluoroscopy Filter with K = 4 filter setting (Real Time
mode Filter with K = 8 Proc.).
Filter with K = 16
To set the weight of the None Only available with the
Weight Rec filter recursive filter in ROAD Filter with K = 2 DSA option.
MAPPING mode Fitler with K = 4
Filter with K = 8
Filter with K = 16
View negative Positive/negative display Select to suit exam Fluoroscopy images are
of the image normally positives.
To identify the fluoro Default parameter, to suit

Post Processing image processing P.P. Name exam type.
parameters for that
exam
To identify the fluoro Only available with the
Post Processing image processing P.P. Name DSA option.
parameters during the
MAX OPACIFICATION Parameter set in the
phase factory to suit the exam
type.
To identify the DSA Only available with the
Post Processing fluoroscopy image P.P. Name DSA option.
in ROAD MAPPING Parameter set in the
mode factory to suit the exam
type.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Radiological parameters for all display formats
Continuous Fluoroscopy /item Set the parameters for each programmed patient type
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z1 /item (Size valid).
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z2 /item
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z3 / item
Settings Notes
To choose the X-ray Level adjustment is

Dose Level dose in fluoroscopy high / medium / low normally done in the
mode from the 3 levels factory. See paragraph
of exposure permitted 4.2.2 above
the system
To choose the level The ROI is normally set in
Enable ROI measurement area for ROI 1 - ROI 4 the factory. These are
the automatic X-ray (select just one ROI) circular ROIs in the centre
dose control of the image with the
dimensions indicated in
the table below.
Peak Enable To select the PEAK OP / select to suit exam If enabled, you can select
ROAD MAPPING mode the PEAK OP / ROAD
MAPPING mode in the
exam frame.
Peak Delay Delay before enabling of The Peak Opacification
the Peak Opacification delay in milliseconds function is only activated
function with respect to by the system once the X-
stabilising of the X-ray ray emission has been
emission at the start of stabilised and after the
exposure time specified in field
Peak Delay.
Real Time Proc. This filter settings is an possible settings: You can set new FTH
alternative to the filters (see paragraph
recursive filter setting FTH_CL (default FTH 4.5.5.2.1)
Weight Rec filter. filter)
This filter can only be
DISABLED (not active) enabled on SERIES 2
systems and higher.
Diameter of circular ROI for continuous ROI 1 ROI 2 ROI 3 ROI 4

fluoroscopy
Continuous Fluoroscopy 43x43cm
8 cm 11 cm 14 cm 20 cm
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z1 30x30cm

6 cm 8 cm 10 cm 15 cm
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z2 20x20cm

4 cm 5 cm 6 cm 10 cm
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z3 15x15cm 3 cm 4 cm 5 cm 8 cm

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.4.4 PULSED HCF FLUOROSOCPY PARAMETERS
Accessed from the general Fluoro card that opens the specific cards for each acquisition mode:
Pulsed Fluoroscopy → 43x43 cm field
Pulsed Fluoroscopy Z1 → 30x30 cm field
• Common parameters for all acquisition formats
Pulsed /item
Settings Notes
To set the weight of the None This filter setting is an

Weight Rec filter recursive filter in pulsed Filter with K = 2 alternative to the spatial
fluoroscopy mode Filter with K = 4 filter setting (Real Time
Filter with K = 8 Proc.).
Filter with K = 16
Default pulsed rate, 1i/s The rate is set
Default Rate presented to operator 2i/s automatically when the
when the exam is 4i/s exam is opened You can
opened. The highest 7.5i/s alter the rate within the
rate you can set is the 15i/s range 1i/s - Max HCF
Max HCF Rate value. Rate
Max pulsed rate that can 4i/s
Max HCF Rate be set by operator. 7.5i/s
15i/s
To enable an initial If selected, the system

Burst Impulse pulse burst to speed up Select to suit exam commands the pulse burst
the automatic dose at 7.5i/s until the correct
search. dose is automatically
reached, whatever the set
rate.
To select the save to Select to suit exam If selected, all the
Save on Disk disk mode for acquired acquired images are
images saved to hard disk.
Otherwise no image is
automatically saved.
To enable the automatic
Enable Auto Cineloop start of the CINELOOP Select to suit exam
after acquisition
View negative Positive/negative display Select to suit exam Fluoroscopy images are
of the image normally positives.
To identify the pulsed Default parameter, to suit
Post Processing fluoro image processing P.P. Name exam type.
parameter for that exam

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Radiological parameters for all display formats
Pulsed Fluoroscopy /item Set the parameters for each programmed patient type
Pulsed Fluoroscopy Z1 /item (Size valid).
Pulsed Fluoroscopy Z2 /item
Settings Notes
To choose the X-ray Level adjustment is

Dose Level dose in fluoroscopy high / medium / low normally done in the
mode from the 3 levels factory. See paragraph
of exposure permitted 4.2.2 above
the system
To choose the level The ROI is normally set in
Enable ROI measurement area for ROI 1 - ROI 4 the factory. These are
the automatic X-ray (select just one ROI) circular ROIs in the centre
dose control of the image with the
dimensions indicated in
the table below.
Real Time Proc. This filter settings is an Possible settings: You can set new FTH
alternative to the filters (see paragraph
recursive filter setting FTH_HCF (default FTH 4.5.5.2.1)
Weight Rec filter. filter)
This filter can only be
DISABLED (not active) enabled on SERIES 2
systems and higher.
Diameter of circular ROI for HCF ROI 1 ROI 2 ROI 3 ROI 4
Pulsed Fluoroscopy 43x43cm 8 cm 11 cm 14 cm 20 cm
Pulsed Fluoroscopy Z1 30x30cm 6 cm 8 cm 10 cm 15 cm

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.5 SETTING THE POST-PROCESSING PARAMETERS
You need to set the post-processing parameters for each exam to suit the acquisition mode used by
the exam.
These parameters are normally set during a sample installation and then “transferred” to subsequent
installations without the need to make any changes.
Below is a process flowchart for each mode showing how the image provided by the detector is shown
on the monitor.
The equipment has a number of menus that let you set the image processing parameters.
These menus for each acquisition mode are accessed by technicians (via Technical Password) from
each exam card.
Each menu contains the following commands:
- Load Profile to recall a set of parameters already saved on the machine. The name of this
parameter set is shown in the Exam Setup menu as “Post Processing”.
- Save Profile to save the parameter set with the same name (i.e. “Post Processing”).
- Save as per to save the parameter set with a new name.
4.5.5.1 POST-PROCESSING OF RADIOGRAPHY IMAGES
Post-processing of radiography images involves a series of operations, applied in order to the images
acquired by the detector.
There are typically two types of post-processing:
- linear post-processing (“1” in the diagram): the image acquired by the detector is shown on
the monitor with the original pixel values. This sequence is used for system quality test
images.
- ATH post-processing (“2” in the diagram): the image acquired by the detector is processed
according to the specific anatomical part.
The result is a good quality image that should require no further processing. This sequence
is used for real images.
RAD Image Presentation Algorithm
ROI &
LINEAR (NO ATH) EDGE LINEAR
IMAGE LINEAR IMAGE FILTER LOOK UP
(NONE)
TABLE
1 Image Processing for image analisys
RAW
DETECTOR CORRECTED
IMAGE
Image Processing for real image acquisition

2
PRE- LATITUDE
EQUALIZED REDUCTED EDGE ROI &
IMAGE IMAGE FILTER LOOK UP
(LOG) (ATH) TABLE
ROI of image is identified

LUT Curve is applied on image
Image is ready for Monitor
EDGE filter is applied
ATH Process is applied to image
RF43 pre-equalization algorithm is applied to image
PU processes detector image and provide useful raw image to HIRIS RF43
Not corrected image comes from Detector to Processing Unit

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Use the Post Processing Setup command to open the Post Processing Setup menu which
contains the following parameters:
The parameters are explained in the table below:
This menu contains the parameters for post-processing of

Post-processing Description radiological images.
Settings Notes
Spatial Filter Use to select the spatial filter NONE: no filter Typical setting: SHARPEN
type
SHARPEN: sharpen filter
(edge enhancement)
SMOOTH: smooth filter

(softer edges)
Select to suit the anatomical

part
Weight Use to select the spatial filter 1-5 Typical setting: 1
weight
Kernel Use to select the filter matrix 3x3 Typical setting: 5x5
size (in pixel) 5x5
7x7
9x9
11x11
Pre-equalization Use to select the type of pre- LINEAR Used for images whose
Type equalization. pixel level you want to
keep unchanged.
Typically used to check
image quality.
LOG8000 Use this when acquiring
real images.
Harmonization Use to select the type of Select to suit the anatomical Harmonization is an
Type harmonization to be part. image processing
associated to each exam algorithm that improves
type. The harmonization algorithms image contrast in the case
are set in the factory and of high “latitude”
cannot be altered.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Available algorithms: The filter acts with an

increasing effect, from
CHEST LIGHT CHESTLIGHT to
CHEST DEFAULT.
EXTREMITY For example: select
THORAX CHEST LIGHT for a
DEFAULT THORAX AP exam;
CHEST for a THORAX
LAT exam; EXTREMITY
for a shoulder, arm, leg or
foot.
Note:
Only the Pre-Equalization
Type algorithm is applied
during acquisition.
The harmonization
algorithms are only
applied once acquisition
has been completed.
Harmonization Enables/disables the If acquiring a test image or The harmonization image
Level harmonization function. acquiring real ANGIO images, requires a lot of
you must set: calculation power. As a
0 disabled. result, if acquiring a series
of images, harmonisation
If acquiring real images in any is not done in real-time,
mode other than ANGIO, set: but applied at the end of
1 enabled the run.
Only the following
processes are applied
during acquisition:
- pre-equalization,
- recognition of the
ROI calculated using the
first image in the run,
- application of the
relevant LUT.
Auto Equalization Enables/disables the auto- If acquiring images in ANGIO During acquisition of a
equalization function that mode, set: series of images, the W
automatically calculates and 0 disabled. and L calculation is only
applies the best Window and done for the first image in
Level levels to suit the If acquiring real images in any the run and keep at that
contents of the image. mode other than ANGIO, set: value for all subsequent
1 enabled images. Only at the end of
acquisition of the entire
image is the specific value
calculated for each image
in the run.
ROI Type Use to select the type of ROI Select one of the ROI types You can change or create
used by the equipment for the shown to suit the anatomical new ROI types, as
Auto Equalization function. part. described in paragraph
4.5.6 below.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
LUT Window Manual setting of the image • If Auto Equalization is not

display Window. enabled:
- set a value between 256

and 65536.
- if the Harmonization
Filter is enabled, set 30000
(typ.)
Auto Equalization is
- If an image with linear normally always enabled.
post-processing, set 10000
(typ).
- If acquiring real images in

ANGIO mode, set 3000
(typ).
• If Auto Equalization is
enabled:
- if you set 65536, the

W and L levels are both
determined by the Auto
Equalization function
- if you set a value of

<65536, the W level is that
set, while the L is determined
by the Auto Equalization
function.
- with the Harmonization

function enabled, set 30000
(typ.)
- If an image with linear

post-processing, set 10000
(typ).
LUT Level Manual setting of the Level • If acquiring real images in
when the Auto Equalization ANGIO mode, this level is
function is not enabled. automatically set when you
set the value of the LUT
Window.
You can, however, alter it
manually.
• In all other cases, set: 0

Gamma Type Use to select the gamma Select one of the gamma You can change or create
correction curve. curves shown to suit the a new gamma curve, as
anatomical part. described in paragraph
4.5.7 below.
Enable Tomo Enables/disables the Select (enable) if the exam is
Tomography mode. a Tomography exam.
Enable Stitching Enables/disable the Stitching Select (enable) if the exam is See paragraph 7.11 below
function. a Stitching exam. for a full description of the
parameters for this
function.
Stitching Use to set the number of Set a value between:
Component acquisitions needed for the 2-4
Image (2-4) Stitching procedure.
Stitching Custom Free parameter, passed to Set a value between: This parameter can be
Code the remote control device 1-15 used by the remote
when the exam is opened. control device to set the
stitching types needed to
position the remote
controlled device itself.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Stitching ROI Use to select the type of ROI Select one of the ROI types You can change the
Type used by the equipment to shown to suit the stitching existing ROI types or
perform the Auto type. create new ones, as
Equalization function on the described in paragraph
stitched image. 4.7 below.
Stitching Set Use to select the stitching Select one of the stitching The manufacturer defines
Name algorithm for the stitched algorithms. certain types of stitching
image. algorithms.
You can change the

existing algorithms or
create new ones, as
described in paragraph
7.10 to suit them to the
mechanical characteristics
of the remote control
table.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.5.2 POST-PROCESSING OF CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY AND PULSED HCF IMAGES
Post-processing of continuous fluoroscopy and pulsed HCF images involves a series of operations,
applied in order to the images acquired by the detector.
There are three types of post-processing:
- linear post-processing (“1” in the diagram): the image acquired by the detector is shown on
the monitor with the original pixel values. This sequence is used for system quality test
images.
- dynamic range + recursive filter post-processing (“2” in the diagram): the image acquired by
the detector is processed by applying the following algorithms:
- DYNAMIC RANGE: this changes the dynamics of the image by using a

logarithmic LUT curve.
- RECURSIVE FILTER: application of a temporal noise reduction filter.
This sequence is normally used to acquire real images.

Available in systems with CPU DUAL CORE and QUAD CORE.
- FTH post-processing (“3” in the diagram): the image acquired by the detector is processed
by applying the following algorithms:
- PRE EQUALIZATION
- RECURSIVE FILTER
- MOTION DETECTION FILTER
- LATITUDE REDUCTION
- AUTO EQUALIZATION
- W & L SHIFTING
This sequence is normally used to acquire real images. Given the heavy demands
made of the CPU, it is only possible in systems with CPU QUAD CORE.
FLUORO Image Presentation Algorithm
ROI &
LINEAR NO FILTER EDGE LINEAR
IMAGE LINEAR IMAGE FILTER LOOK UP
(NONE)
TABLE
1
Image Processing for image analisys
RAW DYMANIC RECURSIVE EDGE ROI &

DETECTOR CORRECTED 2 FILTER LOOK UP
RANGE FILTER
IMAGE TABLE
Image Processing for real image acquisition without FTH filter (for DUAL CORE CPU Systems)
Image Processing for real image acquisition with FTH filter (for QUAD CORE CPU Systems)
3
PRE- LATITUDE
EQUALIZED REDUCTED EDGE ROI &
IMAGE IMAGE FILTER LOOK UP
(LOG) (FTH) TABLE
ROI of Image is identified

LUT Curve is applied on image
Image is ready for Monitor
EDGE filter is applied
FTH Process is applied to image
RF43 pre-equalization algorithm is applied to image
PU processes detector image and provide useful raw image to HIRIS RF43
Not corrected image comes from Detector to Processing Unit

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Example of post-processing settings for real continuous fluoroscopy images with dynamic range +
recursive filter algorithms (2):
Example of post-processing settings for real continuous fluoroscopy images with FTH algorithm (3):

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Example of post-processing settings for real pulsed HCF images with dynamic range + recursive filter
algorithms (2):
Example of post-processing settings for real pulsed HCF images with FTH algorithm (3):

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Post-processing Description continuous fluoroscopy and pulsed HCF images.
Settings Notes
type
(edge enhancement)

(softer edges)

part
weight
size (in pixel) 5x5
7x7
9x9
11x11
Pre-equalization Use to select the type of pre- If Real Time Proc. = Only set LINEAR for
Type equalization for fluoroscopy DISABLED, you can set: testing the quality of
images, depending on the images from the detector.
Real Time Proc. setting in - LINEAR
the EXAM SETUP menu. Set a DYNAMIC RANGE
to apply a logarithmic LUT
- DR 03 - DR 12 curve to the image.
The Real Time Proc. (Dynamic Range 1:3 - 1:12) The dynamics of the
algorithm corresponds to the image shown on the
FTH. monitor increase as the
DR value increases.
If Real Time Proc. is set with You must select LOG8000

filter = FTH X then set: if a REAL TIME PROC
LOG8000. filter (FTH) is used.
Harmonization Set: NULL HARM

Type
Harmonization Set: 0
Level
Auto Equalization
Do not enable
ROI Type N.U.
LUT Window - If Pre-Equalization type =

LINEAR, set a typical W
level: 500.
- In all other cases, set:

65536.
LUT Level Set: 0
4.5.7 below.
Typical setting:
LINEAR

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.5.2.1 SETTING THE FTH FILTER
You can set an FTH filter for each EXAM CARD and each continuous/pulsed fluoroscopy image
acquisition format. To access the FTH filter setup page, select the filter you want to change (click on
the filter name) and then press the FTH FILTER SETUP button.
The Fluoroscopy FTH Filter panel opens:
Here you can:
- load the settings for another FTH FILTER using the Load Profile button;
- save the FTH FILTER settings using the Save Profile command;
- save the FTH FILTER settings with a different name by entering this in the
Save Profile As field and then clicking on this button (active).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The fluoroscopy FTH filter consists of 5 modules:
1) Recursive temporal filter

2) Gradient-adaptive spatial filter (sensitive to movement)
3) ATH filter (filter used to reduce latitude)
4) Image histogram repositioning after ATH
5) Fluoroscopy AUTOLUT (image display parameters)
1) Programming the temporal filter and the gradient-adaptive spatial filter
Field Accepted values Description Recommended value
IIR Mode Exec IIR Before Uses the temporal recursive filter Forced to:
before any spatial filters Exec IIR Before
IIR Filter Adaptive Yes / No Uses the adaptive temporal filter
(sensitive to movement) Yes
IIR Filter 100 - 2000 Temporal filter weight;

Weight*100 - 100 = no filtration
- 200 = filter weight K=2 600
- …..
IIR Adaptive Gain 0 - 2000 To adjust the adaptive gain of temporal

filter.
In proportion to the pixel value changes

with respect to the previous frame, the
set value (IIR Filter Weight*100)
decreases by a quantity that depends
on the variation and the gain value set
here.
10
Value 0 = no reduction in the recursive
filter when movement is detected.
Increase this value to increase the

visibility of the noise, at the same time
reducing the persistence effect of the
recursive filter.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2) Programming the gradient-adaptive spatial filter
Recognises movement within the image and enhances the edges of the moving object.
Filter Mode MrGaf Uses the spatial filter Forced to:

MrGaf
Gauss Type Gauss 5x5 Uses noise reduction with a 5x5 kernel Forced to:
Gauss 5x5
Noise K*100 0..20000 Noise reduction gain. The smaller the

value, the greater the noise 15000
Dumping *1000 0..5000 Enhances edges in low noise-level

areas 20
MrGrafPyrLevels 4 Number of planes used to calculate the Forced to:

filter 4
The recommended values shown above help reduce the noise linked to the image resolution.
If you require higher levels of resolution (regardless of an increase in noise), alter the two parameters shown
below (within the accepted ranges):
Field Accepted range Description Min value
Noise K*100 0..20000 - Gain in noise reduction.

The lower this value, the more the 100
noise.
Dumping *1000 0..5000 - Edge enhancement for areas with

low noise. 5

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Programming the ATH filter
PowerFactor*1000 500..1000 General contrast control factor. 860
Set 1000 for no change.
The lower the value, the greater the

latitude reduction (higher contrast)
Upper Break Point 32768 End point in the contrast control Forced to:
curve (lsb) 32768
Lower Break Point 0 Start point in the contrast control Forced to:
curve (lsb). 0
MSE PyrLevels = 9 for formats Number of planes used to break Forced, to suit
672x672 (field down the image acquisition field.
20x20) and
960x960 (field
43x43)
= 10 for formats
1024x1024 (field
30x30 and field
15x15)
Edge Enh Levels 4 Number of planes used to calculate Forced to:

the edge enhancement. 4
Edge Enh Gain x1000 1000..5000 Edge Enhancement Gain 1200
1000 = Gain 1
Increase this value for stronger edge

enhancement, but also more risk of
greater noise
Latitude Reduction Levels 4 Number of planes used to balance Forced to:
the contrast (latitude reduction) 4
Latitude Reduction Gain 1000..5000 Latitude Reduction Gain 1600
1000 = Gain 1
Latitude reduction for the planes

selected using Latitude Reduction
Levels
The higher this value, the smaller the

image latitude (image may be over-
processed).
Negative Side Enh x1000 500..2000 Negative Latitude Reduction Gain 1500
1000 = Gain 1
Latitude reduction for the planes

selected using Negative Enh Levels.
The higher this value, the smaller the

image latitude in the negative part of
the image (image may be over-
processed).
Negative Enh Levels 4 Number of planes involved in Forced to:
processing of the negative parts. 4

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4) Programming image histogram repositioning after using the ATH filter
Border Size 0..480 Size of border (pixels) that reduces 10 pixels for all
the area used to calculate the acquisition formats
histogram
Left Discard Perc. 0.002 Histogram discard on black side Forced to:
(percentage). 0.002
Right Discard Perc. 0.000 Histogram discard on white side Forced to:
(percentage) 0.000
5) Programming the AUTOLUT

Time Auto Adjust Lut 0..60 Delay in activation of automatic LUT

adjustment after start of fluoroscopy 0
(seconds).
FIR Order Auto Adjust 2..30 Recursive filter factor for the L and W
Lut values applied to the LUT (n° frames). 4
Auto Adjust Lut P0B -100..+100 Correction (%) of the L value

calculated by the AUTOLUT 0
algorithm.
Auto Adjust Lut P0W -100..+100 Correction (%) of the W value

calculated by the AUTOLUT 0
algorithm.
W Min 2000..16535 Defines the min W value for viewing 2000

the image, from the AUTOLUT
algorithm.
Note: Lower W Min values create

higher contrast images.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.5.3 POST-PROCESSING OF ANGIOGRAPHY IMAGES (DSA)
In an ANGIO exam (DSA), non subtracted images are treated using the radiography post-processing
parameters shown in paragraph 4.4.5.1 above.
The post-processing described below is used for subtracted images (i.e. acquired after mask pick-up):
The Post Processing Setup command opens the Post Processing Setup menu which contains the
following commands and parameters:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Post-processing Description DSA radiological (angio) images.
Settings Notes
type
(edge enhancement)

(softer edges)

part
weight
size (in pixel) 5x5
7x7
9x9
11x11
Pre-equalization Use to select the type of pre- Always set: LOG8000
Type equalization.
Harmonization Use to select the type of Always set: NULL

Type harmonization to be
associated the exam.
Harmonization Enables/disables the Always set: 0

Level harmonization function.
Auto Equalization Enables/disables the auto- Always set: 0
equalization function that
automatically calculates and
applies the best Window and
Level levels to suit the
contents of the image.
ROI Type Use to select the type of ROI Select one of the ROI types You can change or create
used by the equipment for the shown to suit the anatomical new ROI types, as
Auto Equalization function. part. described in paragraph
4.5.6 below.
LUT Window Manual setting of the image If acquiring real images in
display Window. ANGIO mode, you should
typically set 3000. The LUT
Level will then be calculated
accordingly.
LUT Level Manual setting of the Level If acquiring real images in
when the Auto Equalization ANGIO mode, this level is
function is not enabled. automatically set when you
set the value of the LUT
Window.
You can, however, alter it
manually.
4.5.7 below.
Enable Tomo Enables/disables the Always set: 0
Tomography mode.
Enable Stitching Enables/disable the Stitching Always set: 0
function.
Stitching Use to set the number of Set a value between:
Component acquisitions needed for the 2-4
Image (2-4) Stitching procedure.
Stitching Custom Free parameter, passed to Always set: 0
Code the remote control device

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
when the exam is opened.

Stitching ROI Use to select the type of ROI N.A
Type used by the equipment to
perform the Auto
Equalization function on the
stitched image.
Stitching Set Use to select the stitching N.A
Name algorithm for the stitched
image.
4.5.5.4 POST-PROCESSING OF ROAD MAPPING IMAGES
If the PeakEnable function in the EXAM SETUP frame is enabled in FLUORO mode, fluoroscopy
images can be acquired in three different ways:
- normal fluoroscopy,
- max opacity (first stage of ROAD MAPPING),
- image subtraction (second stage of ROAD MAPPING).
Different image post-processing is envisaged for each mode. See paragraph 4.4.5.2 above for the
post-processing of normal fluoroscopy images.
The settings for the other images are described below.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.5.4.1 POST-PROCESSING OF MAX OPACITY IMAGES
The Post Processing Setup command opens the Post Processing Setup menu with the following
parameters:

Post-processing Description max opacity fluoroscopy images.
Settings Notes
type
(edge enhancement)

(softer edges)

part
weight
size (in pixel) 5x5
7x7
9x9
11x11
Pre-equalization Use to select the type of pre- DR 3 - DR 12 Set a DYNAMIC RANGE
Type equalization for fluoroscopy to apply a logarithmic LUT
images. (Dynamic Range 1:3 - 1:12) compression curve to the
image.
The Real Time Proc. setting The dynamics of the
in the EXAM SETUP menu image shown on the
must be DISABLED. monitor increase as the
DR value increases (i.e.
DR 1:12 compresses the
image more than DR 1:3).
The greater the latitude of
the anatomical part
exposed, the higher this
filter.
Typical setting: DR 1:8

Type

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Level
Auto Equalization Do not enable
ROI Type N.U.
LUT Window Set: 65536
LUT Level Set: 0
4.5.7 below.
Typical setting:
LINEAR
4.5.5.4.2 POST-PROCESSING OF SUBTRACTED IMAGES
The Post Processing Setup command opens the Post Processing Setup menu with the following
parameters:

Processing Description subtracted fluoroscopy images.
Settings Notes
type
(edge enhancement)

(softer edges)

part
weight
size (in pixel) 5x5
7x7
9x9
11x11
Pre-equalization Use to select the type of pre- Always set: LOG8000
Type equalization for fluoroscopy
images.
The Real Time Proc. setting

in the EXAM SETUP menu
must be DISABLED.

Type
Level
Auto Equalization Do not enable
ROI Type N.U.
LUT Window Typical setting: 3000
LUT Level This value is automatically set
after setting the LUT Window
value. It can, however, be set
manually.
4.5.7 below.
Typical setting:
LINEAR

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.6 ROI SETUP
This setup menu lets you set the parameters for automatic calculation of the W and L levels needed to
get the best presentation of the image. Automatic W&L calculation is only active when the Auto
Equalization field has been enabled in the POST-PROCESSING SETUP menu.
These parameters are set by using a reference image on the monitor, which immediately shows the
effects of each new setting.
These parameters will be applied to the image:

- during the acquisition of a series of images (run): the values are calculated using the first
acquired image and the resulting W&L values are then applied to all the other images in
the run,
- the W&L values are then recalculated for each image after acquisition,
- during post-processing, by taking the mouse pointer to the image and then clicking on the
central button on the mouse (trackball) twice,
- during post-processing by using the Auto button in the LOOKUP MANAGER menu.
The ROI setup menu is opened by clicking on the

relevant icon in the LOOKUP MANAGER menu.
The ROI (Region Of Interest), which depends on the image histogram, is

set by eliminating all parts of the image of little interest (e.g. collimators
and direct radiation) and then setting the best W and L levels to present
the anatomical part in the best possible way.
You can set the parameters for low exposure “Blackside” regions of the
image and high exposure “Whiteside” regions separately.
The setup lets you define the following for each part:
- calculation area (ROI section),
- algorithm to be used (Algorithm section).
These settings are saved by the equipment in a file in the

Settings\AutomaticLutParams\ directory; the file extension is
*.Rendition.prm.
4.5.6.1 ROI CALCULATION AREA
● ROI
- Use the mouse to draw a rectangle on the reference image in

order to define the calculation area.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The ROI should contain the anatomic part needed to create a meaningful histogram for calculating the
W&L values.
You can repeat this at will; each new rectangle deletes the previous
one.
- Now select any of these options:
Use shutters if closed the ROI is the area defined by the X-ray collimators if their aperture is
less than 43x43cm
Intersect shutters alternatively, this defines as the ROI the area where the shutters
intersect with the rectangle drawn using the mouse. If the aperture of
the X-ray collimators falls within the drawn ROI, the area will be
calculated using the X-ray collimators
Detect true shutters this option enables an algorithm that recognises the X-ray collimators
within the image using a margin of pixels with respect to the
theoretical position data received from the collimator itself.
Use always blackside ROI the Blackside ROI setting will always be
used, even for the Whiteside region of
the image.
Filter before hist to perform “smoothing” filtering of the

histogram to be used:
None no filter
Smooth 3x3 smooth filtering, kernel 3x3
Smooth 5x5 smooth filtering, kernel 5x5 (recommended)
- the type of algorithm to be applied (Algorithm section).
Below are examples of the effect of the different ROI settings on the calculation of the W&L.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Example 1.
Here two different ROI areas have been used: one for the dark area of the image (BLACKSIDE ROI –
red frame – small frame) and one for the lighter area (WHITESIDE ROI – pink frame – large frame).
The figure below shows the histogram obtained using these two ROI areas; this will then be used for
the automatic W&L calculation.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Example 2.
Two different ROI areas have been used again, but this time the “Use shutter if closed” option has
been enabled for the BLACKSIDE ROI. In this case, if the aperture of the X-ray collimators is less than
43x43cm, the BLACKSIDE ROI will correspond to the actual shutter size (yellow rectangle).
• Example 3.
Once again, two different ROI areas have been used, with the “Use shutter if closed” option enabled
for both the BLACKSIDE ROI and the WHITESIDE ROI. In this case, if the aperture of the X-ray
collimators is less than 43x43cm, the actual shutter size will be used for both ROI areas.
In this case, the histograms for both the BLACKSIDE and the WHITESIDE ROI coincide (see
histograms below).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Example 4.
In this case, two different ROI areas have again been used, with the “Use always Blackside ROI”
option enabled. This means that only one ROI will actually be used.
Needless to say, the histograms coincide:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.6.2 ALGORITHM TYPE
The type of algorithm applied to the image inside the ROI lets you define the L and W levels for the
best display of the image.
The “L” stands for the lowest pixel value in the histogram. The “W” stands for the difference between
the highest pixel value and the lowest pixel value in the histogram.
There are two alternative types of setting, as described below:

- Fixed Window and Algorithm,
● Fixed Window:
This option lets you specify the max W value and its position within the histogram.
If the histogram of the original image has a lower W value, its value remains unchanged.
The Fixed Window function has these options:
Use fixed window to enable this function
Window width to define the max W value

The value set here is only used to determine the optimal W values to
be used in the LUT Windows parameter in the POST-PROCESSING
TYPE menu.
Window anchor to position the W on the histogram:
Black W is positioned by starting at the lowest value in the histogram

(L = min histogram value).
Center W is centred on the histogram (L = min histogram value + W/2)

Note: When using the Center Window anchor function, the general
appearance of the image will be virtually unchanged if the shutter
blades and markers on the image are anchored.
White W is positioned by starting at the highest value in the histogram (L=

max histogram value - W).
● Algorithm: this lets you choose the type of algorithm to be used (and
relative parameter settings) in order to define the L and W.
The possible algorithms are:
Min/Max:
This algorithm detects the min and max grey values in the image and then assigns them:
- min value = L,
- max value – L = W.
You can correct the detected L and W values using the Parameter 0 field.
Select Blackside (min histogram value shown on the monitor):
- and correct the L value (range: –50% to + 50%) by setting Parameter 0 (–0.5 to +0.5),
Select Whiteside (max histogram value shown on the monitor):

- correct the ( L+W) value (range: –50% to + 50%) by setting Parameter 0 (–0.5 to +0.5).
Histogram truncation:
Like the previous option, this algorithm detected the min and max grey values in the image and then
assigns them:
- min value = L,
- max value – L =W.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
You can correct the detected L and W values using the Parameter 0 fields. You can shrink the part
of the histogram shown by eliminating the top and tail of the histogram:
Select Blackside:
- increase the min value ( L) by setting Parameter 0 (0 to 0.5).
For example, if Parameter 0 = 0.1, the L value is increased until 10% of all the pixels in
the image are eliminated from the “dark” part of the histogram.
Select Whiteside:
- decrease the max value ( L+W) by setting Parameter 0 (0 to 0.5).
For example, if Parameter 0 = 0.1, the L+W value is decreased until 10% of all the
pixels in the image are eliminated from the “light” part of the histogram.
Notes:
- Show Histogram on AutoLut if enabled, this lets you show the ROI histograms graphically,
together with the W and L values obtained by using the
selected algorithms.
- Parameter 1 not used.
● The setup menu also includes these commands:
Auto LUT this applies the set ROI, L and W parameters to the image.
Track this function is very useful when you want to find the automatic values of Parameter
0 of the algorithms shown correctly on the monitor.
In this case you should:

- manually adjust the look of the image using the manual L and W commands,
- select the type of L and W calculation algorithm,
- enable this function, which automatically extracts and applied the Parameter 0
values.
Load to load an AutoROI protocol saved earlier.
Save to save the setup parameters as a (*.Rendition.prm) file in the relevant directory so
that these can be used when setting up the exam cards.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.7 GAMMA CORRECTION CURVE SETUP
The grey levels in an image automatically shown on the monitor are mainly defined by the ATH
algorithm used and the Auto LUT function (see paragraph 4.5.6.2).
The “LOOKUP MANAGER” lets you further change the grey levels of an image within the window (W)
using LUT curves (gamma curves) that you can build at will to get the best contrast conditions.
The new curve can then be saved in a file with the *.LutCurve.prm extension in directory
Settings\LutCurves\ . This file can be associated to the exam card during installation.
4.5.7.1 BUILDING THE GAMMA CURVE
Use a typical image for the anatomical part of interest to build the gamma curve.
This image should be acquired under normal projection, X-ray dose and patient type conditions.
• Use the “select curve” icon in the “LOOKUP MANAGER” menu.
Select curve for gamma correction

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Use the “build gamma curve” icon.
The current curve applied to the image is shown in the window.
• 3 types of curve can be used to construct the correction curve:
Linear: Cubic Natural Spline: Cubic Deriv0 Spline.
Linear LUT curve. To create a LUT curve where the To create a LUT curve where the
building points are linked using the building points are linked using the
The linear curve cannot be altered. “Cubic Natural Spline” function. “Cubic Deriv0 Spline” function.
• Build the curve by dragging the building points with the mouse or by moving these points by
selecting a point and then entering its X and Y values and confirming with Set.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Extra building points can be added (max 20 ); they can also

be eliminated.
To do this, simply select a point, open the working menu by
right-clicking on the mouse and then select the relevant
command: Add Point or Delete Point.
selected point
• Once built, the new curve should be saved (with the same name or a new name) as follows:
- right-click on the mouse to open the working menu and then select the Save command,
- the LUT curve file opens: enter the name you want to give to the new curve and then save by
clicking on Save:
o if the curve is saved with the same name, all the exam cards that use this file will be
altered as a result,
o if the curve is saved with a new name, it will appear in the Gamma Curve list and so can
be used when setting up the exam cards (see paragraph below).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.7.2 ASSOCIATING CORRECTION CURVES TO THE EXAM TYPE
Correction curves must be associated to the type of exam for which they have been built.
This is done by using the exam card (see paragraph 4.4 above and paragraph 7.11 below) where the
Gamma type parameter (in the Image Processing Type menu, accessed by authorised installers
only) lets you choose between the saved curve types.
- Access the required exam card.

- Use the Type Processing Info command to open the Image Processing Type Setup menu.
- Open the list of saved curves (Gamma Type).
- Select the one you want to use.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5.7.3 RECALLING AND/OR CHANGING A GAMMA CURVE
You can change a gamma curve or create a new one by starting from a n existing curve.
To do this:
- Open LOOKUP MANAGER and then right-click on the mouse to

select Load and so open the list of saved curves.
- Select the one you want and confirm with OK.
- You can change the curve as explained in point 4.5.71 above.
- Now you can:

- save it with the same name and so change it,
- salve it with a new name to generate a new curve.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6 DICOM
After making the electrical connections to the DICOM network (see point 3.3.2.1 above), the DICOM
setup involves the following steps:
● Network parameter setup (see point 4.6.1 below)

● Defining the system's DICOM AE Title (see point 4.6.2 below)
● Defining the remote DICOM devices (see point 4.6.3 below)
● Checking the connections of the DICOM devices (Custom Name, AE Title, IP Address, Port, …)
(see point 4.6.4 below).
● Setting up the Dicom Spooler application for image transmission control (see point 4.6.5 below)
● Setup of each DICOM operating mode:
● Worklist (see point 4.6.6 below)
● Store (see point 4.6.7 below)
● CD (see point 4.6.8 below)
● Print (see point 4.6.9 below)
● MPPS (see point 4.6.10 below).
● Storage commitment (see point 4.6.11 below).
● Query Retrieve (see point. 4.6.12 below).
● IHE Settings (see point. 4.6.13 below).
● Dose SR Settings (see point. 4.6.16 below).
The menus in the main frame are mainly used for the above operations:
- Option / Setup / Dicom / Setup, for DICOM connection setup, or
- Option / Setup / Dicom / Verify, to check the connection,
DICOM address
(point 4.6.2)
DICOM CD/DVD Image

Manufacturer (point 4.6.8)
field (point 4.6.2)
Store
(par 4.6.7)
Print / Film Editor

(par 4.6.9)
IHE / Worklist / MPPS /

Storage Commitment /
Q/R Settings
(point 4.6.6 / point
4.6.13)
Dose SR Settings
(point 4.6.16)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Device connections check

(point 4.6.4)
and the right click menu in the image frame:
- Dicom / Show Spooler, used to manage the transmission of images to the network and
to set up the remote devices.
Remote devices (point 4.6.3)
Dicom Spooler setup (point 4.6 .5)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.1 NETWORK SETTINGS
ATS supplies all its systems with default local network settings. It’s up to the company’s network
manager to alter these to suit the characteristics of the network that will act as host to the system.
Only the Administrator can access this procedure: see Annex 7.3 below.
4.6.1.1 PHYSICAL DICOM NETWORK CONNECTION CHARACTERISTICS
Connection type in the system:

- Type: Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit on connector RJ45.
- Rate: Autosensing 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
4.6.1.2 WINDOWS XP SETTINGS FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS
You must first exit the application to set the PID

network functions. Select the following tools from
the tool bar on the Windows XP desktop:
- Settings / Network Connections.
- The following frame

appears:
There are 2 network connections in the HIRIS RF43 system:

- PU Network, to connect the PID to the PU4343 device only (see “Detector Calibration”,
paragraph 5.2 below),
- DICOM Network to connect the PID to the hospital’s local network.
Note: there is a third wireless connection – called Wireless Network – if the system is fitted with two
detectors
- with wireless DRX1 detector see paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 6 of this manual
- with wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ detector see paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 7 of this manual

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Select Dicom network.

The following frame appears:
- Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
- Set the Properties of the protocol.

The following frame appears:
- Enter the IP Address and the Subnet Mask

for the station in question, as defined by the
hospital network administrator (e.g. IP address
192.168.50.108).
4.6.1.3 NETWORK CONNECTION TEST
After entering and confirming the network settings, you can proceed with the connection test.
- Select the DOS Prompt in the applications bar by selecting:

Start / Programs / Accessories / Command Prompt.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Enter the PING command followed by the IP Address (provided by the network administrator) of
another device in the network at the DOS prompt, e.g.:
C:\Documents and Settings\Admin2> PING 192.168.50.107
- If there’s a TIME OUT error, check both the network cable (see note below) and the Windows
XP network settings (IP address, subnet mask, any active firewalls, etc.).
- We recommend sending other PING commands to other network devices to check that the
entire network is read properly by the system.
Below are details of the typical wiring for cross-connections and otherwise, should you need to check
the network cable connections for some reason:
2-pin connection Connection to Hub or Switch

via cross-connection cable RJ45 via non cross-connection cable RJ45
(used between PID and PU RF4343)
Name NIC1 NIC2 Name Name Pin Cable Colour Pin Name
TX+ 1 --- 3 RX+ TX+ 1 White/Orange 1 TX+
TX- 2 --- 6 RX- TX- 2 Orange 2 TX-
RX+ 3 --- 1 TX+ RX+ 3 White/Green 3 RX+
RX- 6 --- 2 TX- 4 Green 4
5 White/Blue 5
RX- 6 Blue 6 RX-
7 White/Brown 7
8 Brown 8
4.6.2 ADDRESSING THE SYSTEM
In order to identify the system within the DICOM network, you need to address the system using the
first few fields in the Option / Setup / Dicom / Setup menu (NB: the menu only opens once you have
entered the technical password):
• Local AE Title name identifying the system

in the DICOM network. Example: System XXX
• TCP Port Server TCP port code used by the system. Typically: 104.
These two parameters are established in collaboration with the DICOM network administrator.
• General  Manufacturer Name: this lets you set the DICOM field for the manufacturer’s name.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.3 DEFINING THE REMOTE DICOM DEVICES
The devices are defined using the DicomSpooler application and the Local (local devices) and Rem
(remote device) cards in the Network menu.
- Select Network in the DICOM Spooler menu (you need to enter the Password).
- The DICOM Setup menu opens, letting you define the devices connected to the system in cards:
• Local (DICOM setting for HIRIS RF43)
• Rem 1, 2, … (DICOM setting for any remote devices connected to the HIRIS RF43)
Confirm settings

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- The system is normally supplied with the settings for 5 remote devices:
- PACS, Worklist, Printer, Storage Commitment, Query / Retrieve
These provide a setup example. To add (or remove) a device, use the following options:
- Add Remote: This lets you add a “remote” device to the network and create the
corresponding card.
- Remove Remote: This lets you delete a “remote” device from the network by removing its card.
- Verify: This lets you check the connections between the system and the network
station for the “remote” card in question.
Note. The connection check via the Dicom Spooler menu involves using the
specific name in the Local AE Title for quick remote verification (see
below); normal connection checks (see para. 4.6.4 below) are made
using the name specified in the Local AE Title field in the Option /
Setup / Dicom / Setup menu of the . It is therefore crucial that you use
the same Local AE Title for both fields.
- You must define the parameters using the corresponding REM card for each device.
- Each remote device connected to the HIRIS RF43 system is identified and defined by the
parameters in the Rem cards:
- Custom Name: Conventional name of the DICOM device.
- AE Title: Name given by the network administration to the DICOM device.
- IP Address: IP address of the DICOM device in the local network.
- Port: TCP port of the application that will respond on the remote DICOM device.
- Printer Model: Identification of the printer DICOM (type / model).
- Character Set: Type of character used to send the DICOM parameters.
- Operation: To define the DICOM modes of the device:
- Verify: Device test (normally possible for all devices),

- Store: STORE SERVER DICOM: image archiving service,
• JPEG unsupported: check if the receiving server is not capable of
managing compressed JPEG images (modes XA and RF).
- Print: PRINTER SERVER DICOM: image printing service,
- Worklist: WORKLIST SERVER: service that gathers the exams to be performed,
- StCmt: STORAGE COMMITMENT: PACS confirmation service for archiving received
images,
• StCmt AE Title: you need to enter the AE Title used for the STORAGE
COMMITMENT request; this may differ from the AE Title set for the di STORE
function.
- MPPS: STORAGE COMMITMENT: study status info and update service (study in
progress, study completed, study archived,…).
- Q/R: QUERY / RETRIEVE: service for requesting archived studies stored outside
the system.
- Dose SR: DICOM DOSE STRUCTURED REPORT: DICOM service that lets you collect
information on the X-ray dose.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Print Defaults: This opens the Print Defaults Setup menu that lets you set the default printer
settings:
Image
General Processing
Film
- General: Default printer settings:

- Image Processing: NB info contained in the printer manual
- Film: This lets you set the print layout:

- Film Size: Size of the film
- Orientation: Orientation of the image on the film.
- Enable free orientation on STANDARD\1,1: If checked, you can change the
orientation of the film for each image (horizontal/vertical) and
optimise the available space.
- Format / Cols / Rows: Definition of the print format (rows/columns).
- Set the default devices for each DICOM mode (Storage, Print, Worklist, MPPS, Storage
Commitment) in the Local card.
Options available in the Local card:
- Max non-Jpeg STORE Size field:

This parameter sets the max size of each RUN to be sent to STORE in
NON JPEG mode. If you try to send a RUN bigger than this, an alarm
message appears, asking you to reduce the size. Typically set as 1000
MB (i.e. about 500 fluoro images, full field, at 16 bit or about 1000 fluoro
images, full field, at 8 bit)
- UL Protocol frame: We recommend you do not change the data already entered here
(normally those shown in the figure).
- Default Remote Storage AE Title field:

Enter the name of the default DICOM device (if any) that acts as the
Server when archiving exams. When the DICOM FAST archiving function
is used in the working frame, the exams will automatically be sent to the
server specified here.
- Default Remote Printer AE Title field:
Printer Server when printing exams. When the DICOM PRINT FAST
archiving function is used in the working frame, the exams will
automatically be sent to the server specified here.
- Default Worklist Server AE Title field:

Worklist Server. The Worklist Server is the DICOM device that sends the
list of requested exams.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Default MPPS Server AE Title field:

Enter the name of the default DICOM device(if present) that acts as the
MPPS Server. Once a patient study received by the Worklist server has
been completed, information will also be sent to the MPPS server so that
it can update the exam status (programmed, in progress, completed).
- Default Stg Commit Server AE Title field:

Enter the name of the standard DICOM device(if present) that performs
the Storage Commitment function. Whenever a study is sent to the
PACS, this server tells the system whether the data have been received
correctly and have been stored by the PACS server, which is now
responsible for these data.
- Default Dose SR Server Store:

Enter the name of the standard DICOM device (if present) that performs
the DOSE SR server function, used to archive all the X-ray dose
information.
- Local AE Title for quick remote verification field:

Enter the Local AE Title (name of the DICOM network device) already
entered in the DICOM setup (for example: System XXX; see paragraph
4.6.2 above).
Note: Inside the DicomSpooler application, the connection is verified by

using the name specified in the Local AE Title for quick remote
verification field; during normal use, the connection is verified by
the application (see para. 4.6.4) using the name specified in the
Local AE Title field of the Option / Setup / Dicom / Setup menu
of the application. It is therefore crucial that you use the same
Local AE Title for both applications.
4.6.4 CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
Use Option / Setup / Dicom / Verify in the system main frame to open the AE Title Selection box
with a list of the DICOM devices in point 4.6.3 above:
Select the device you want to check and then click on OK. This way you start testing the device
connections: the test* indicates whether the device is present and active in the DICOM network.
* Note: This check only concerns the connection test. You may therefore find that the check for a
DICOM device (e.g. a printer) is positive, but there are problems when you send an image to
this. In this case, we recommend that you check the Printer Defaults Setup settings (see
paragraph 4.6.3 above).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.5 SETTING UP THE DICOM SPOOLER
The DicomSpooler manages the transmission of the images over the DICOM network via a memory
(on HD) where all the images to be sent are queued.
List of images in transmission queue
Alarm area To suppress alarms To confirm settings To hide the application

and quit without closing it
- Select Setup / Options and enter the technical password; the Spooler Settings menu opens:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
This menu lets you set the transmission queue management using the parameters in 4 different fields:
• Spool directory, set with these parameters:
Path The path you want for the data transmission queue.
Typically “C:\ProgramFiles\Digitec\Dicom\DicomSpooler\SpoolDir\”
Size The size in MB of the transmission queue (size of the Spooler).
Typically 10000 MB, corresponding to roughly 600 radiography
images in high resolution (2400 images in medium resolution)
• Retry, set with this parameter:
After, this specifies the time interval between the last transmission attempt and the next.
Typically 180 seconds.
Note: After 3 failed attempts, the transmission is considered “failed”.
• Failed items, to specify the fate of the exams that for some reason have caused the transmission
to fail:
Keep till manually deleted Keep all the exams in the transmission queue until you delete
these manually.
Keep for XX days Keep all the exams in the transmission queue for the set
number of days and then delete them automatically.
• Warning setup, to select and manage the alarm messages that will be shown in the Dicom
Spooler frame.
Warn if spooldir level greater Warning that the transmission queue filling level has been exceeded.
than xx % Typical value: 80%.
Warn if queue disabled Warning that transmission queue filling has been disabled.
Warn if there is not enough Warning that there is not enough space left in the transmission
spooldir space queue.
Warn if error in item insertion Warning that there are errors when adding of the image to the
transmission queue
Warn if item processing fails Warning that image transmission has failed.
Warn if there are in list items Warning that images have remained in the spooler for more than xx
older than xx days days.
Warn if there are in list more Warning that there are more than xx images in the spooler.
than xx items
Warn if there are in list more Warning that the spooler contains more than xx images whose
than xx failed items transmission has failed.
Check warning status at To enable the alarm status control on starting the system application
startup up: if any alarms exist, the Dicom Spooler frame opens with the
relevant warning(s).
Show spooler on warning To enable the display of the Dicom Spooler frame every time an
activation alarm is enabled (recommended).
Note: The DICOM Spooler menu also lets the operator manage images in the transmission queue.
See point 4.6.11 below.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.6 WORKLIST
In the Setup / Dicom / Setup menu, the Worklist Settings command opens the Dicom Worklist
Setup menu, used to define these options:
• Dicom Get List to establish how to open the Worklist:
- The “Modality Filter” option lets you apply an import filter on the Worklist:
check CR The list shows only CR code studies

check DX The list shows only DX code studies
check XA The list shows only XA code studies
check RF The list shows only RF code studies
- The Merge modality requests option lets you make a single DICOM di GET LIST query that
incorporates the various different filters selected using the Modality Filter option.
If not selected, you will need to send a query for each of the selected filter options.
- The “On Get List …” option sorts the list of exams received by the date in the Date-Time field
(newest to oldest).
If not selected, the order shown will be that of receipt.
- The “Clear list before “Get List” execution” option lets you delete the list before effecting
the get list command.
If not selected, the new list is added to the existing list.
- The Create studies on “Get List” option lets you create any new studies received from the
WORKLIST automatically. The parameters to differentiate a new study can be set using the panel:
Study Matching conditions: using the panel, set the DICOM parameters to be used to recognise
the “new study”. A study is considered “new” when at least one of these parameters differs from the
studies already in the list.
The PATIENT ID and ACCESSION NUMBER are normally used to do this.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- The Exec “Get List” on open dialog option lets you generate the DICOM “GET LIST” request
automatically:
- if a default WORKLIST SERVER has already been set, the WORKLIST command will be
sent directly to this SERVER,
- if there is no default WORKLIST SERVER, a window appears, letting you:
- select the device you want to

request the WORKLIST from,
- skip the request and access

the previously received
WORKLIST,
- cancel the function.
- The Send Empty AE Title request option lets you send the WORKLIST query with an empty
DICOM tag (0040,0001) “Scheduled Station AE Title” (no set value); otherwise the value will be set
using the LOCAL AE TITLE set in the system.
- The Send empty seq. Req. With 0 length option lets you send an empty WORKLIST query
sequence (length = 0).
If not selected, an empty sequence of indefinite length (0xffffffff) is sent with the delimiter: “end of
sequence delimeter”.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
● Study Create – Identifiers to define the configuration of the DICOM MPPS TAGs on the basis of
the DICOM WORKLIST TAGS
Performed Procedure Type Description To copy the contents of the

- Enable copy from “Requested Procedure Description” Requested Procedure Description
field received from the Worklist and
insert this in the Performed
Procedure Type Description field
during transmission of the data to the
PACS and MPPS server.
Performed Procedure Code Sequence To copy the contents of the
- Enable copy from “Requested Procedure Code Sequence” Requested Procedure Code
Sequence field received from the
Worklist and insert this in the
Performed Procedure Code
Sequence field during transmission of
the data to the PACS and MPPS
server.
Performed Procedure Step ID

- Enable copy from “Scheduled Procedure Step ID” -To copy the contents of the
Scheduled Procedure Step ID field
received from the Worklist and insert
this in the Performed Procedure Step
ID field during transmission of the data
to the PACS and MPPS server.
- Enable copy from “Study ID” -If the contents of the Scheduled
Procedure Step ID field is empty
during transmission of the data to the
PACS and MPPS server, the contents
of the Study ID field received from the
Worklist will be copied and inserted in
the Performed Procedure Step ID
field.
Performed Procedure Step Description To copy the contents of the
- Enable copy from “Scheduled Procedure Step Description” Scheduled Procedure Step
Description field received from the
Worklist and insert this in the
Performed Procedure Type
Description field during transmission
of the data to the PACS and MPPS
server.
Performed Protocol Code Sequence To copy the contents of the

- Enable copy from “Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence” Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence
field received from the Worklist and
insert this in the Performed Protocol
Code Sequence field during
transmission of the data to the PACS
and MPPS server.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
● Study Create to establish how to manage the Worklist:
Build description from procedure text This lets you indicate the contents of the DICOM procedure
field in the Description of the exam you want to create.
Build description from step text This lets you indicate the contents of the DICOM step field in
the Description of the exam.
Insert Pr. and St. in description This lets you indicate the two prefixes Pr. and St. (before the
contents of the Procedure field and Step field respectively) in
the Description of the exam.
Lock Patient and Study Data If active, this function makes it impossible to change the data for
the patients/study received from the Worklist. Any created
manually can, of course, be edited.
Create all patient’s studies If the list contains more than 1 exam for the same patient, this
lets you create all the studies with a single command (the
Create exam command will then create a list with all the studies
involving that patient)
Clear item on create study This lets you remove patients from the Worklist as new studies
are created for these.
If this option is not selected, the created study will, in any case,
be checked (see first exam in following figure).
The Study Data menu with the Lock Patient and Study Data option enabled looks like this:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The Study Data menu with the Lock Patient and Study Data option disabled looks like this:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.7 STORE
The Store function is used to transfer the images to a PACS server.

The settings accessed using the DICOM Setup menu normally depend on the different behaviour of
the receiving server.
• Writings on image Select this if you want to transfer the

image complete with its indications
(patient name, image number …), as
displayed on the monitor.
If you don't select this, the image will
be sent without the indications.
In any case, the text can always be
sent to the server using the DICOM
fields.
• Graphics on image Select this if you want to transfer any

text or graphics together with the
image.
• Send series/image Select this to transfer the DICOM “series/image number” parameter”.
• Presentation LUT (DX) Only for devices with DICOM code “DX“: select this to get "linear" transfer
of the image, followed by the LUT correction parameters.
• Lut expansion 0-30% To expand the size of the LUT sent to the workstation (0 - 30%) towards
black (B) or white (W): you can thus include in the image external parts
not presently shown on the system monitor.
• If Patient ID is empty transfer options if the “Patient Data” ID field has not been filled in:
Send nothing the exam is sent if the ID field is left empty.
Use patient name the exam will be sent on entering the name of the patient in the ID field.
Use “PATIENT ID” the exam will be sent on entering the word “PATIENT ID” in the ID field.
• If Study ID is empty Transfer options if the “Study Data” ID field has not been filled in:
Send nothing the exam is sent if the ID field is left empty.
Use study UID the exam will be sent on entering the "UID" in the ID field.
Use “STUDY ID” the exam will be sent on entering the word “STUDY ID” in the ID field.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Auto Store Settings to access the Setup menu for the Auto Store function:
The Auto Store Setup menu lets you define the options and activation modes for the Auto Store
function.
The Auto Store function can be set up with 2 modes:
• Automatic mode
Enable just one of the three options in the Image Selection panel. Do not enable the
“Always show Exit without store and Cancel” option.
This way, the images are automatically sent in the mode selected on the Image
Selection panel when you quit the image.
• Manual mode
In this mode, you are asked to select the relevant option before images can be sent.
Transmission only starts after selecting:
- more than one option on the Image Selection panel,
- or the “Always show Exit without store” and “Cancel” option,
The following options are available for these two Auto Store modes:
- Always execute Auto Store on close study: to enable the Auto Store function on closing a
study that contains studies that have not been sent before, even if no new images have been
acquired.
- Send to default store server: the images will be sent directly to the default STORE SERVER
device.
If this option is not selected, the image selection panel appears in the list of STORE devices
when you close the study.
- Max number of frames sent automatically: use this to set the max number of frames that can
be sent without generating an operator warning.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.8 CD/DVD IMAGE
The CD/DVD Image function transfers the image to

CD/DVD in DICOM-3.0 format.
The settings are:
• CD/DVD-Images root: To set the directory of the

CD used to create the
image archive for CD
writing (normally
“C:\CDImages”).
• Writings on image: Check if you want the

DICOM images in the CD
archive to contain all the
writing currently on the
image.
• Graphics on image: Check if you want the DICOM images in the CD archive to contain all the
graphics currently on the image.
• Presentation LUT (DX): only for “DX” mode: select to transfer the "raw" image and, separately,
the correction parameters (LUT). Normally not selected.
• CR/DX Bits/px: To select the number of bits/pixel in the image being transferred to CD
(accepted range: 8 - 16 bits/pixel); typically 16. Valid for DICOM CR/DX
transmission mode.
• XA/RF Bits/px: To select the number of bits/pixel in the image being transferred to CD
(accepted range: 8 - 16 bits/pixel); typically 16. Valid for DICOM XA/RF
transmission mode.
• Multimodality Studies (CR/DX + XA/RF):
- Single DataSet: Select if you want all the DICOM images to be saved in a single archive.
- Double DataSet: Select if you want the DICOM images to be saved separately, in 2
archives (CR/DX and XA/RF).
4.6.9 PRINT
The Direct Print and Film Editor options are:
• Use max bit/pixel Select this to automatically transfer

the image to the printer with the
max number of bits/pixel
established by the printer.
Otherwise, the transmission will be
at 8 bits/pixel.
• Use calibration in true Select this to get a printout of the images in true size mode with corrected
measurements using the Gauge tool in the working frame.
• Start FE in true size Select this to open the Film Editor menu and automatically select the
True size print function.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Fast Print Settings To open the Fast Print Setup frame which lets you associate the printer
and format for each of the four fast print symbols in the working frame.
It also lets you select the True size option for each printer.
• Single Image Settings To enable the print layout setup frame for the indications to be inserted
on the film.
The menu (see figure below) defines the text, its position and the size of
the text on the film.
Size and position of text
Size and position of fields
General data to be printed Selection and enabling of fields
Settings for position and size

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Set the following fields:
Hospital/Dept. Text (normally the name of the hospital / ward) to be entered in the
Hospital field.
st
Model Model of the equipment: enter in the 1 line of the Device field.
rd
Manufacturer Name of the manufacturer: enter in the 3 line of the Device field.
st
Serial nu. Serial number of the equipment: enter in the 1 line of the Device field.
- Set the position and size of all the text on the film. The text is split into groups defined using
Select field:
groups
Hospital Hospital name as entered in this menu (if the box has been left empty in
this menu, the name entered as the Hospital Name in the General
Settings menu will be used)
1 line: AreaDose
st
Exposition
nd
2 line: kV / mA / ms (or kV / mAs)
Exposition no dose kV / mA / ms (or kV / mAs)
Note: These two fields are alternatives (you cannot enable both at the same time).
st
Elaboration 1 line: Calibration Factor (K=n.nnn)
nd
2 line: L / W / E / H, i.e.: Level (L=nnnnn)
Window (W=nnnnn)
Edge (E=n-Nxx) *
Harmonization (H=n)
Patient name Name and surname of the patient
Patient data Date of birth / sex
Patient ID Identification code for patient
Physician Name of technician / doctor / physician responsible for exam
Exam date Date and hour of exposure (format: dd-mm-yyyy hh:mm)
st
Device 1 line: Model / Serial n°.
nd
2 line: SW rel.
rd
3 line: Manufacturer.
True size Indication Text/symbol shown in True size Indication
Stitching Indication Text/symbol shown in Stitching Indication
Accession Number Accession Number
Free Text 1 String for free comment
Free Text Quick This lets you set a few set strings in the Free Text 1, Free Text 2 and Free
Selection Text 3 fields:
Ser: n : n  number of the run (series) to which the image belongs
Ser: n/m : n  number of the run (series) to which the image belongs, m
 total number of runs in the study
Img: n or Frm: n : n  image number (Img:) in the case of a singleframe

run or frame number (Frm:) in the case of a multiframe run
Img: n/m or Frm: n/m : n  image number (Img:) in the case of a

singleframe run or frame number (Frm:) in the case of a multiframe run, m
 total number of images/frames in the run
Ser: n Img: n1 or Frm: n1 : n  number of the run (series), n1 

number of the image (Img:) in the case of a singleframe run or frame
number (Frm:) in the case of a multiframe run
Ser: n/m Img: n1/m1 or Frm: n1/m1 : n  number of the run (series), m
 total number of runs in the study, n1  number of the image (Img:) in
the case of a singleframe run or frame number (Frm:) in the case of a

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
multiframe run, m1  number of images/frames in the run
Mod: XX : XX  acquisition mode (FL, PL, RD)
Mod: XX Ser: n : XX  acquisition mode, n  number of the run (series)

to which the image belongs
Mod: XX Ser: n/m : XX  acquisition mode, n  number of the run

(series) to which the image belongs, m  total number of runs in the study
Mod: XX Img: n or Frm: n : XX  acquisition mode, n  image number

(Img:) in the case of a singleframe run or frame number (Frm:) in the case
of a multiframe run
Mod: XX Img: n/m or Frm: n/m : XX  acquisition mode, n  image

number (Img:) in the case of a singleframe run or frame number (Frm:) in
the case of a multiframe run, m  total number of runs in the study
Mod: XX Ser: n Img: n1 or Frm: n1 : XX  acquisition mode, n 

number of the run (series) to which the image belongs, n1  image
number (Img:) in the case of a singleframe run or frame number (Frm:) in
the case of a multiframe run
Mod: XX Ser: n/m Img: n/m or Frm: n/m : XX  acquisition mode, n

 image number (Img:) in the case of a singleframe run or frame number
(Frm:) in the case of a multiframe run, m  total number of runs in the
study
* Note: The table below shows the meaning of the Edge field indications:
E=n-Nxx
(Edge filter)
n N xx
(kernel) (weight) (filter)
indication meaning indication meaning indication meaning
3 3x3 0 0 SH sharp
5 5x5 1 1 SM smooth
7 7x7 2 2
9 9x9 3 3
11 11x11 4 4
5 5
- You can set the following parameters for each group:
Enable Enable/disable field (check to get a printout of the relevant field on

the film)
Box To set the space for the field:
- Top / Bottom
- Left / Center / Right
- External to image
- Minimize width
- Minimize height
- Dimensions H / V
- Offsets H / V (distance from edge)
Text To set the text inside the field:
- H Alignment Left / Center / Right
- V Alignment Top / Center / Bottom
- Font
- Border
- Interline
- Line X (0 disables the line)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The figure and the table below shows a typical setup.

Hospital
Elaboration Patient ID Device
Exposition Patient name Patient data Exam date

Text Alignment H (mm)
Text Alignment V (mm)
Line 1/2/3/4/5 (mm)

Dimension H (mm)
Dimension V (mm)
External to image
Minimize Height
Minimize width
Offset H (mm)
Interline (mm)
Offset V (mm)
Border (mm)
Enable
Font
Box
HOSPITAL Yes Top Left Yes Yes Yes 200 10 0 0 Left Top Arial 0 0 6
EXPOSITION No
EXPOSITION NO DOSE Yes Bottom Right Yes Yes Yes 60 6 0 6 Right Center Arial 0 0 4
ELABORATION Yes Bottom Right Yes Yes Yes 60 10 0 10 Right Center Arial 0,5 0 2/4
Patient NAME Yes Bottom Center Yes Yes Yes 200 12 0 0 Center Center Arial 0 0 10
Patient DATE Yes Bottom Center Yes Yes Yes 50 6 0 10 Center Center Arial 0 0 5
Patient ID Yes Bottom Center Yes Yes Yes 50 6 0 15 Center Center Arial 0 0 6
EXAM DATE Yes Bottom Right Yes Yes Yes 50 8 0 0 Right Center Arial 0 0 6
DEVICE Yes Bottom Left Yes Yes Yes 70 15 0 0 Left Bottom Arial 0 0 4/4/4

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.10 MPPS FUNCTION
The MPPS Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu opens the MPPS Setup menu used to set
the relevant options:
General Settings:
• Enable Server Notification: check to enable communication with the server.

Otherwise the MPPS objects will be created,
modified and serialised locally, but no messages
are ever sent to the MPPS server.
• Enable MPPS On New Studies: check to enable the MPPS mode whenever a new
study is created.
• Dicom Direct Print is Dicom Transfer: check for the MPPS to treat the Print Dicom
command for an image as a Store Dicom
command.
• Dicom Direct Media Write is Dicom Transfer:

check for the MPPS to treat the sending of an
image to the CD/DVD burner as a Store Dicom
command.
Server Notification Conditions:
• On Open Study if MPPS already Exists: check to enable the sending of the MPPS N-
CREATE message when an exam is opened that
has already been associated to an MPPS during a
previous session.
• On New Image Acquisition: check to enable the sending of the MPPS N-

CREATE message after acquisition of a new
image.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Before Image Dicom Transfer: check to enable the sending of the MPPS N-
CREATE or N-SET message immediately before a
DICOM transfer to STORE, PRINT or the CD/DVD
burner.
• After Image Dicom Transfer: check to enable the sending of the MPPS N-
CREATE or N-SET message immediately after a
DICOM transfer to STORE. NB: a transfer to
Dicom PRINT or CD/DVD burner is never followed
by MPPS messages to the server.
• After Image Storage Commitment: N.A.
• On Image Modification: check to enable the sending of the MPPS N-

CREATE message after making changes to an
image.
• On Close Study (N-Create + N_Set): After closing a study, this option sends the MPPS
N-CREATE message (if not already sent). This is a
general option: the details of the MPPS function
upon closing an exam are set out below in the On
Close Study N-SET Notification panel.
On Close Study N-SET Notification:
• Auto Always: the MPPS N-SET message is always sent

automatically.
• Auto if New Acquired Images: the MPPS N-SET message is only sent
automatically if ne images have been acquired.
• Auto if Dicom Transferred Images: the MPPS N-SET message is only sent
automatically if images have been sent to Dicom
STORE.
• Auto if MPPS already Created on Server: the MPPS N-SET message is only sent
automatically if the MPPS N-CREATE message
has already been sent to the server.
• Ask Operator if No Auto Conditions: asks you for confirmation before sending the N-
SET message to the server.
MPPS Contents:
• Performed Procedure Step ID (If Empty, enable copy from Study ID):
check to use the Study ID field to enter values for
the Performed Procedure Step ID field, if this has
been received empty from the Worklist and no
values have been entered manually.
• Dose Comment: use to add a comment on the dose in the MPPS

message (e.g. : “dGy*cm2”)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.11 STORAGE COMMITMENT FUNCTION
The Storage Commitment Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu opens the Dicom Storage
Commitment Setup menu used to set the relevant options:
General:
• Enable Storage Commitment on new Studies: check to enable the Storage Commitment
function for each new study. If disabled, the
images for an exam with Storage
Commitment are labelled with the “auto-
committed” marker.
Spooler Notifications:
• Enable Spooler Notifications on Stg Cmt Disabled Studies:

check to enable the notification mechanism
for exams without the Storage Commitment
function enabled. This way you can use the
store symbol to check directly from the
working frame the term and result of the
store search carried out by the spooler (see
table below).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Storage Commitment Status Image Marker

Pending
Store OK
Store FAIL
Autocommit OK
Store OK + Commit OK
Store OK + Commit FAIL
• Spooler Notifications Expiration Time (1-7 days): max time for a notification (days).
• Spooler Notifications Queue Max Length (10-200): max time for the spooler notification
queue.
Storage Commitment Transactions – SCT:
• SCT N-EVENT_REPORT Wait T.O. (3-60 sec): timeout for N-EVENT_REPORT response
after sending the N-ACTION message.
• SCT Expiration Time (1-7 days): max time for an SCT.
• SCT Max Retry Count (1 – 5): max number of SC retries (sending of N-

ACTION and receipt of N-EVENT-
REPORT).
• SCT Retry Delay (5-300 sec): pause between one SC attempt and the next
(min time between 2 N-ACTION
transmissions)
Image deleting:
• Non Stored Images: establishes action when you use the delete
command for images not already sent to the
spooler.
o Always Enabled: deletion always allowed.
o Never Enabled: deletion never allowed.
o Warn & Ask Operator: deletion only allowed after confirmation
• Store Pending / Stg Cmt Pending Images: establishes action when you use the delete
command for images already sent to the
spooler with an SCT (Storage Commitment
Transaction) pending.
o Never Enabled: deletion never allowed

o Warn & Ask Operator deletion only allowed after confirmation.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Stg Cmt Failed Images: deletion of images for which Storage

Commitment has failed
o Never Enabled: deletion never allowed

o Warn & Ask Operator: deletion only allowed after confirmation.
4.6.11.1 SPOOLER SETTINGS
The Storage Commitment request can be sent to the same Store periphery or another one.
For this reason, you can associate a dedicated periphery for Storage Commitment to each Store
server during the Spooler remote periphery setup.
If the STORAGE COMMITMENT device is the same that performs the STORE function:
St. Cmt: check this function

St.Cmt AE Title: leave blank: the same AE Title as the Store function will be used.
If the STORAGE COMMITMENT device is not the same that performs the STORE function:
St. Cmt: leave blank

St.Cmt AE Title: enter the AE Title for the device responsible for the STORAGE
COMMITMENT function.
In this case, the configured STORAGE COMMITMENT device must be set in the Setup menu for
remote DICOM devices and the St.Cmt flag must be enabled.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.12 QUERY / RETRIEVE FUNCTION
The Q/R Settings command in the Dicom Setup menu opens the Query/Retrieve Setup menu used
to set the relevant options:
Calling AE Title: to specify the AE Title used by the system to make the Query / Retrieve (suggested
to use different AE Title than the Local AE Title specified in the DICOM SETUP frame).
Default Called AE Title: to specify the AE Title of the remote device offering the Query / Retrieve
service.
Move Store Server Port: the TCP port where the Query / Retrieve device sends its response.
(different from number 104 and suggested number 107)
Saved File-set Character set: to set the type of font used when saving received files.
Base Retrieve Folder: to specify the directory on the system hard disk containing the exams received
from the remote Query / Retrieve device (typically C:\Retrieve)
Viewer Command Line: to specify the path needed to run the DICOM viewer for exams received from
the Query / Retrieve server.
Typically C:\ProgramFiles\Digitec\DgViewer\Bin\DgViewer.exe
Retrieve Dose SR: if checked, the parameters for the DICOM DOSE STRUCTURED REPORT option
are requested (if the system uses this option).
View Study On Retrieve: if checked, the exam is automatically shown on the monitor after receipt,
using the specified DICOM viewer.
Close Q/R On View Study: if checked, the Query / Retrieve window closes when the image is viewed.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.13 IHE SETTINGS FUNCTION
IHE (Integrating the Healthcare Environment) setup lets you integrate the system with various
linked DICOM components.
This function can only be used if the Worklist, MPPS, Store and Storage Commitment DICOM
functions are present.
Various rules set out in official documents (IHE Radiology Technical Framework) and the
manufacturer’s rules (IHE Integration Statement) apply when integrating the system.
Press the IHE Settings key to

access the IHE setup window.
SWF:
• ACT: Acquisition Modality: to enable the SWF profile (Scheduled Workflow).
• MWL Replace Item if Same Access Num.:

a new patient replaces the old one with the same
Accession Number in the Worklist dialog window,
every time you use the GetList command.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Depending on these options, certain dialog windows will be different for the operator.
If the SWF profile is enabled, some data cannot be edited, as they are fixed by the IHE standard: e.g.
the Code Sequence access keys only let you view this and not edit it.
The Study Data dialog window with the SWF profile enabled looks like this:
The Study Data dialog window with the SWF profile disabled looks like this:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.14 PRINT QUEUE MANAGEMENT
The DicomSpooler application lets you manage the images remaining in the transmission queue.
Operations Enable/Disable Status
The Status panel to view the status of the images and transmission queue at any time. This
shows:
Waiting number of images in queue

Failed number of images not sent (error or system malfunction)
In progress number of images being sent
Spooldir filling level print queue filling level (in %)
Use the panel commands to manage the images in the transmission queue:
Enable/Disable to enable/disable the filling of the queue and/or transmission of the images
by using the following options:
Enable/Disable Queue to enable/disable the filling of the transmission queue

Enable/Disable Spool to enable/disable the transmission of the queued images
Operations
Delete to delete the list.

Reschedule to manage a new transmission request
1) During normal operation you should have:

Status Queue: Enabled
Status Spool: Enabled
2) Use the Enable/Disable buttons to invert the status and so enable the Operations panel commands:
Status Queue: Disabled
Status Spool: Disabled

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Operations:
- Delete: to delete the images from the queue,
- Reschedule: to manage a new transmission request (see figure):
Send again as soon as possible
Set date and time for re-transmission
Set number of transmission attempts
4) Reset the normal conditions by pressing Enable/Disable to get:

Status Queue: Enabled
Status Spool: Enabled
4.6.15 ENABLING THE DICOM COMMUNICATION LOG
If there are problems with DICOM communication, you can call up a LOG file that records all such
events.
This makes troubleshooting easier (especially if also sent to ATS).
To enable this function:
- Access the system as Administrator

- Access directory “C:\ProgramFile\Digitec\Dicom\DicomDll\Settings
- Create an (empty) text file using Windows “Notepad” and save as “Activatelog.txt”
- Run the application and perform the DICOM transactions you want to check
- 2 files are now created:
o “XXX DicomLog.txt” containing the Verify, Worklist and MPPS transactions (not
using the DICOM SPOOLER)
o “Spoolerdicomlog.txt” containing all transactions involving the DICOM SPOOLER
(i.e. Store and Print).
Note: The LOG file is always updated until you remove the “Activatelog.txt” file from the above
directory. To avoid creating excessively big LOG files, we recommend disabling the LOG
function after testing.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.16 DICOM DOSE SR
DICOM Dose SR is a DICOM service that lets you collect X-ray dose data.
The dose data are organised in a specially defined Structured Report.

This service lets you link administered doses to each acquisition mode and characterise the irradiation
context.
A series of parameters need to be set during installation to use this service.
4.6.16.1 GENERAL SETUP
This menu lets you set the general parameters for the various items in the radiological system:
- Dose Area Meter,
- Imaging device (Recording Device),
- Irradiation Device.
The menu is opened with the archive closed. Select the Dose SR Settings option in the Dicom Setup
menu:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The various menu options are explained below:
Enable mode and transmission of the Dicom SR Dose

General Enable Report
Settings Notes
Enable Dose SR on new Study yes / no Enables creation of the dose
report for each new study.
Enable Dose SR Dicom Dose SR Auto Store on yes / no Enables the automatic
Store Close Study transmission of the dose report on
closing the study.
Dose SR Manual Store yes / no Enables manual transmission of
the dose report from the operator
panel.
Enable Dose SR in Dicom Media yes / no Enables saving of the dose report
to CD / DVD.
Source used to obtain dose data

Source of Dose information
Settings Notes
Select Dosimeter

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Calibration parameters for current Dose Area Meter.
Further calibrations may be added at a later date using

the Add key.
Calibrations The DICOM service only takes the most recent into
account.
Use the Remove key to delete a calibration.

Settings Notes
Cal. Date dd.mm.yyyy Date of most recent calibration
Responsible Party Party responsible for

calibration
Cal. Factor Calibration Factor used Set 100% if the value given
for the Dose Area Meter does not need correction
Cal. Uncertainty Imprecision (%) of the
Dose Area Meter
Definition of the Reference Point

Reference Point Definition
Settings Notes
Select the item in the
list you want to use or
enter a new one.
Image acquisition and recording device

Recording Device
Settings Notes
Dev UID 1.3.76.6.1.2.1.1.12 Fixed setting
Dev. Name Device name Set by the user

(e.g. Hiris RF43)
Dev. Manufacturer Manufacturer of the The system uses the
device Manufacturer name setting,
as set in the DICOM SETUP
Dev. Model Name Name given to the The system uses the Edit
device by the application name setting, as
manufacturer set in the GENERAL SETUP
Dev. Serial Num. Device serial number Automatic setting
Dev. Phys. Location Physical position of the Set by the user (e.g. Radiology
device 2)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Irradiating device data

Irradiating Device
Settings Notes
Dev. UID 1.3.76.6.2.a.b.1.sn This setting depends on the
type of device being used.
(See next paragraph for its
composition)
Dev. Name Device name Set by the user
Dev. Manufacturer Manufacturer of the This must match the

device manufacturer code set in the
UID
Dev. Model Name Name given to the This must match the product
device by the code set in the UID
manufacturer
Dev. Serial Num. Device serial number This must match the serial
number set in the UID
Dev. Phys. Location Physical position of the Set by the user
device (e.g. Radiologiy2)
4.6.16.2 DEFINITION OF THE UID FOR THE IRRADIATION DEVICE
If the manufacturer of the radiology system has its own registered code, the UID must be set by the
manufacturer itself.
If not, you can use the ATS codes and set the UID as follows:
1.3.76.6.2. a. b. 1. 1. sn
parameter description
Code used for the manufacturer of the Irradiation Device.
a This is set for each manufacturer by ATS.
Available upon request.
Code used for the Irradiation Device.
b This is set for each manufacturer’s product by ATS.
Available upon request..
Serial number of the equipment. This can consist of a different
sn number of alphanumerical characters.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.6.16.3 REPORT CONTENTS
The DICOM Dose SR service collects and transmits the dose parameters for each X-ray emission.
Right-click over the image frame to view a table containing these parameters:
The table below shows the parameters:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Overall study X-ray dose

Accumulated X-Ray Dose Data
Notes
Acq. Plane Single plane
Reference Point Definition Definition of the Reference Point

(see paragraph 4.6.16.1)
Dose area product Total Total accumulated dose
(Gy*m²) Fluo Total Fluoroscopy dose
Acq. Total Radiography dose
Dose (RP) Total Dose at Reference Point
(Gy) Fluo Total Fluoroscopy dose
Acq. Total Radiography dose
Time Total Total exposure dose
(s) Fluo Total Fluoroscopy time
Acq. Total Radiography time
Dose Area Meter calibration data

Calibrations
Notes
Calibrations Measurement Device (see paragraph 4.6.16.1)
Cal. Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Responsible Party
Cal. Factor
Cal. Uncertainly
Study data
Report Root Data
Notes
Procedure Reported Pre-set data: Projection X-Ray
Has Intent Pre-set data: Diagnostic Intent
Scope of Accumulation Pre-set data: Study
Study Instance UID UID for the study
Source of Dose Information Dosimeter
Imaging and recording device data

Observer Contexts
Notes
Dev. Obs. UID Parameters set in the Recording Device.
(see paragraph 4.6.16.1)
Dev. Obs. Name
Dev. Obs. Manufacturer
Dev. Obs. Model Name
Dev. Obs. Serial Num.
Dev. Obs. Phys. Locat.
Dev. Role in Procedure Recording: device role

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Data for chosen irradiation event.

Individual events can be selected by using menu
Irradiations Events X-Ray Data
keys < and >.
Notes
Acquisition Plane Single plane
Irr Ev UID UID for the event automatically assigned by the

device
Date Time (dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss) Date event started
Target Region Anatomical part, as per selected exam
Exposure Index Target Set value (target) for the Exposure Index.
Obtained from the dose set for the exam (Dose
µGy x 100/µ Gy)
Value EI value of the exposure
(see paragraph 4.9 below )
Deviation DI value of the exposure
(see paragraph 4.9 below)
Acquired Image SOP Class UID UID for the image automatically assigned by the
device
Acquired Image SOP Instance UID UID for the image automatically assigned by the
device
Irradiation Type - Stationary Acquisition for Radiography
- Fluoroscopy for continuous or pulsed fluoro
Fluoro Type - Continuous for continuous fluoro
- Pulsed for pulsed fluoro
Pulses Number Number of radio or pulsed fluoro exposures saved
to HD for that event
Dose and Source Data DAP (Gy*m²) Exposure data
Dose (RP) (Gy)
KVP (kV)
Exp Time (ms)
Exposure (µAs)
Irradiating Device Irr. Dev. UID Irradiating device parameters
Irr. Dev. Name (see paragraph 4.6.16.1)
Irr. Dev. Manufacturer
Irr. Dev. Model Name
Irr. Dev. Serial Num.
X-ray Filters Type Parameters of the X-ray beam filter (if fitted) on
Material the X-ray collimator and used during acquisition of
Min. Thickness the selected event (see paragraph 4.2.6).
Max. Thickness

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.7 MONITOR CONTROL
The geometry of the monitor needs to be checked on a regular basis, together with its
brightness/contrast control.
There is an image frame for this that can be recalled at any time from the patient list as follows:
Options / Diagnostic Functions / Pattern Test Exam. A test pattern appears as shown below.
B A
Using test pattern, adjust the brightness and contrast to view the entire grey scale (the brightness % is
shown in each square). More specifically:
- you should be able to see the grey square in the white box (positions A),
- you should be able to see the grey square in the black box (positions B).
The entire adjustment procedure is explained in point 4.6.1 below, together with the controls required
should the monitor be replaced.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.7.1 MONITOR BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST CONTROLS
• Valid for models:
- 19 "monochrome monitor - model name: IVL-GEV955IMI Part. No: FPM1152

- 19” colour monitor – LED technology - model name IVL-GEV955IMI Part. No: FPM1183
Use the double function OSD command knob as follows:
Control dial
1) Access the main menu.
2) Select Input Source Settings.
3) Select:
- Analog VGA if the monitor is connected via the
VGA connector, or
- Analog BNC if the monitor is connected via the
BNC connector.
4) Select Color Mode Settings
5) Select:
Gamma and set “Dicom”
Once the DICOM curve has been set you can no longer
adjust the brightness and contrast, as these are defined
by the DICOM curve.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Valid for model:
- EM19TFTI/MCIIL-C1 19” colour, LED technology
Access the settings by using the button shown below:
Use the 5 buttons shown in the figure here to adjust the monitor settings.
Settings
Monitor status
ON/OFF
The status LED can be one of three colours:

green indicating that the monitor is switched on;
orange indicating that the monitor is not being used, but not switched off (stand-by);
black indicating that the monitor is not powered up.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Press the MENU button to open the OSD setup menu (see figure below):
Use the following buttons to move within this menu:
To select the next item below (down)
To select the next item above (up)
To confirm your selection (Enter)
To increase the selected value
To decrease the selected value
Video input setup
The monitor has 3 video inputs:

- VGA
- composite BNC video
- DVI

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Use the buttons described above to select the INPUT menu and then the VGA1 option.
Display LUT setup
We recommend setting the LUT as DICOM 9300°K.
Use the buttons described above to select the PICTURE menu, highlight the GAMMA field and then
select DICOM9300°K.
You can also use the setup menu in a simpler manner to adjust the monitor BRIGHTNESS and
CONTRAST only.
• Without entering the general setup menu, press one of the two buttons shown below as
required:
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
• then use the “+” and “-“ buttons to increase or decrease the selected value.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.8 PROCEDURE SETUP
The procedure (procedure / step) sent by the RIS via the Worklist function is a code that defines the
individual exams (X-ray projections) needed for the patient study.
The system interprets this code and guides the operator through the study, automatically providing the
set working parameters for the related exams.
The procedure may require 1 or more exams (typically not more than 4-5).
The system searches the following DICOM fields that may contain the code, in order of priority:
a) Scheduled Protocol (0040,0008) -> Codevalue (0008,0100)

b) Requested Procedure (0032,1064) -> Codevalue (0008,0100)
c) Requested Procedure Description (0032,1060)
d) Scheduled Procedure Step Description (0040,0007)
RIS systems do not, at present, define the procedures with a harmonized code and so the acquisition
system needs to be adapted to suit the code used during installation, as explained below.
4.8.1 ENTERING PROCEDURES
The PROCEDURE SETUP card lets you correlate the procedure codes used by the hospital’s RIS
with the exams (projections) programmed in the machine.
This procedure involves:

- entering the code (normally an alphanumerical code) that identifies the procedure in the box.
This code is defined by the hospital’s RIS system;
- associating one or more exams (projections) to that procedure. Exams previously created using
Exam Setup;
- setting the print format for the Film Editor (if fitted) to be associated to the procedure. This will
then be used as the default layout when printing the images acquired during the procedure.
Access the menu Option / Setup / Procedure Setup

and enter the technical password.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The menu looks like this:
• In order to use the Procedures, you must check the Enable Acquisition Auto Procedure option.
If you do not, the system will ignore the function and so you need to select each exam (projection)
manually, when performing the study, from among those possible with the equipment.
• Click on Add Proc to add a new procedure code, which will then appear in the ProcedureStep
table, called “UNKNOWN”.
• Rename this with the effective procedure code.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• You can also import these codes via a text file including the list of the single Procedure codes
(linked to 2 descriptions separated by using the TAB key, as shown in the example below: the
Procedure Names.txt text file. These codes will then be shown in the main window:
Note: The RIS system administrator is responsible for providing this file.
To use this method:
• Click on Create From File to open the Procedure list File window and then select the path of the
text file containing the list of procedures you want to import:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• After selecting the text file by clicking on Open, the names of the individual procedures are added
to the Procedure Step list and their description appears on the right:
• If you want to delete a code from the list, select it and then click on Remove Proc.
• Click on Insert Proc to add a new code in any position in the list.
The following can be associated to a procedure:

- single projection (e.g.: Thorax PA with just the PA projection of the chest),
- or several projections (e.g.: Complete thorax with two projections: PA and LAT).
• Select either the RF STATION or WD STATION option in the Add Exam Code window to view the
exams foreseen by the relevant equipment: PIXIUM RF4343 detector or WIRELESS detector
respectively (shown in the anatomical technique or single projection boxes). See figure below:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Once you have made your choice, the exam is shown in the Exam protocol field:
• Repeat, using the Add Exam Code option to add other exams to the procedure.
The exams in a procedure are normally printed on a single film (using the Film Editor composition
tool). You can, therefore, program the composition parameters when constructing the procedure.
• Select Setup to view to the Film Editor PRESET menu and then select the printer, the format, the
orientation and how the film is divided:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Some settings will be shown in the Print Format field of the selected procedure.
The exams assigned to the procedure may be one of two types:
• single image: i.e. with a single radiography acquisition,

e.g. THORAX – CHEST PA.
In this case, the system will consider the exam completed after the single
RAD acquisition and then automatically prepares for the next acquisition
(if foreseen by the procedure).
• multiple image: i.e. exams requiring an unspecified number of RAD acquisitions,

e.g. G.I. – ESOPHAG-SWALLOW.
In this case the operator decides when the exam is completed and then
moves on to the next exam (if foreseen by the procedure).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Note: In both these cases, acquisitions in fluoroscopy mode (continuous or pulsed) are always
enabled and do not affect the way the procedure progresses.
The two types of projection can be identified by setting the Single Exposure option in the exam card,
as also explained in paragraph 4.4.4 of Part 2.
The figures below show the typical settings for:
- a single image exam (THORAX CHEST PA):
- a multiple image exam (G.I. - ESOPHAG-SWALLOW):

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.9 EXPOSURE INDEX
The DICOM Dose SR service lets you check for any discrepancies between the set dose and the
actual dose of radiography images. It does this by showing (in accordance with standard EN 62494-1):
• The dose set for the exam (Dose Target = x.x µGy).
• The EXPOSURE INDEX actually detected (EI= xxx).

The EI is a measurement of the exposure to the detector within the area of interest in the image.
This depends solely on the mean exposure reaching the detector within the area of interest and
not any other secondary parameters (e.g. the LUT or other specific exam processes).
• The DEVIATION INDEX (DI) indicates how much the detected EXPOSURE INDEX differs from
that set for the exam: DI = 10 x LOG10 (EI / EI target).
The table below gives an example of EI/DI deviation after different exposures (Dose Target set at
5µGy):
Dose Target Target Exposure Exposure Deviation

Exposure Factor
µGy Index Index Index
5 500 1300 4.0 2.60
5 500 1000 3.0 2.00
5 500 800 2.0 1.60
5 500 630 1.0 1.26
5 500 500 0.0 1.00
5 500 400 -1.0 0.80
5 500 300 -2.0 0.60
5 500 250 -3.0 0.50
5 500 200 -4.0 0.40

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.9.1 CALIBRATING THE DETECTOR CONVERSION FACTOR
The detector conversion factor needs to be set for each type of acquisition in order to calculate the EI.
This is done in the factory. ATS adopts the exposure conditions indicated in standard
EN62494-1.
The resulting conversion factors are set using the logical mode Sensibility parameter:
- RAD 3i/s and
- RAD 8i/s
e.g. for RAD 3i/s
The Sensibility value for logical mode RAD 3i/s is also set in the two tomography Logical Mode
parameters:
- TOMO 4s
- TOMO 2s.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5 PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR CALIBRATION
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The SD4343 software lets you define and calibrate the acquisition modes (logical modes) foreseen by
the system.
This software acts mainly as the user/detector interface (front end + PU processor), by sending the
calibration commands and displaying the corresponding images. The actual calibration is carried out
by the detector itself once it receives these commands.
The SD4343 software can only be accessed by the

administrator (see paragraph 7.3 below) by
clicking on the relevant symbol on the desktop.
revision B PART 2 page 5.1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.2 PU / SYSTEM CONNECTION
In order to calibrate the detector, you must first connect the system video processor (PID) and the
detector (PU).
Run the SD4343 software and then:
1) Open the Options menu
2) Check that the settings are the same

as those shown here and then click
on OK.
Note:You need to set the PU host

name: 10.0.1.2 parameter if the system
is fitted with two detectors and
THALES SW with release less than 2.3.4.
(see para. 2.3.1 in Part 6).
3) Open the File menu and select New.
4) Check that the IP Address for the PU is set

as “192.168.0.2” in the window that appears.
If necessary, enter this IP Address manually.
Note:You need to set the PU host

name: 10.0.1.2 parameter if the system
is fitted with two detectors and
THALES SW with release less than 2.3.4.
(see para. 2.3.1 in Part 6).
5) Connect up the PU using the command File

 New  Online using the current PU
configuration and then confirm with OK.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
6) The Pixium Manager working frame below now opens.
Use the TAB keys at the bottom to access the following menus from this frame:
- Configuration (see paragraph 5.3 below)
- Logical Mode Configuration (see paragraph 5.3 below)
- Logical Mode Manager (see paragraph 5.4 below)
- Calibration (see paragraph 5.5 below).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.3 PU CONFIGURATION CHECK
Once connected, the PU configuration parameters appear.
1) Select the “Configuration” TAB in the right-hand menu and check that the parameters settings
correspond to those shown below. If not, you will need to reset these manually.
The Sync source parameter must be set

as Internalsync

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Before calibrating the acquisition modes, we recommend you check the configuration of each logical
mode:
2) Use the Logical Mode Configuration TAB.
3) Take the pointer to the Logical Mode you want to

check and right-click on this, then click on Edit logical
mode.
4) The following window appears showing the values of calibration parameters for that Logical Mode:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5) Check that the parameters for each Logical Mode correspond to those in the table below; if they do
not correspond, you must restore the default conditions indicated below.
Logical Mode
Physical Offset
acquisition Field Frequency X-ray windows
ID
mode (mHz) (ms)
Continuous Fluoroscopy
1 3 18000 1
43x43
Continuous Fluoroscopy Z1
2 7 15000 15
30x30
3 15 30000 1
20x20
4 27 15000 10
15x15
Pulsed Fluoroscopy
5 2 15000 15
43x43
Pulsed Fluoroscopy Z1
6 7 15000 15
30x30
7 22 15000 15
20x20
8 27 15000 10
15x15
Offset 0: Offset 0:
Radiography 3i/s 1000 500
10 17
43x43 Offset 1: Offset 1:
3000 150
Offset 0: Offset 0:
Radiography 8i/s 1000 500
11 4
43x43 Offset 1: Offset 1:
8000 60
Tomo 4s
15 17 200 4300
43x43
Tomo 2s
16 17 400 2300
43x43

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.4 PRESETTING THE DETECTOR’S WORKING TEMPERATURE
During installation of the equipment and before calibrating the detector, you need to carry out the
detector working temperature preset procedure.
This procedure involves two settings in the detector temperature control system:
1) Preliminary setting, where the speed at which the fans rotate is constant until the thermal
stability of the detector is reached (i.e. after at least 3.5 hours of use).
Using the SD4343 application, access the Configuration panel and then set the parameters
below:
Fan mode: set Specified speed

Target temperature: not used
Fan 1 speed: set 2200
Fan 2 speed: set 0
This is the default setting by the manufacturer when

the equipment is first supplied.
2) Final setting, where the automatic fan speed control is set to keep the detector temperature
constant at the thermal stability value.
The final setting must be set when the detector has reached its thermal stability (i.e. after at
least 3.5 hours of use).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
After this period:
1) Find the temperature reached by the detector, shown in the Pixium Manager 1:1 page;
2) Set this value in the Target Temperature

field in the Configuration panel.
3) Set Pixbox controlled in the Fan Mode

field.
In this mode, fields Fan 1 speed and

Fan 2 speed are not used.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.5 LOADING AND ACTIVATING A LOGICAL MODE
To calibrate a logical mode you need to:

1° deactivate any previously active logical mode.
2° activate the logical mode you want to calibrate. This is done in two steps: first you need to load
the mode and then activate it.
To do this:
1) Select the “Logical Mode Manager” TAB.

All the logical modes created on the PU4343 are listed in the window, indicating which are active
(Active), which are loaded (Loaded) and which are available (Available).
ACTIVE LOG. MODE
LOADED LOG. MODES
LOG. MODES AVAILABLE

ON DISK
2) Deactivate any previously active logical mode (logical

mode “0” in the figure here):
- select it using your mouse and then right-click on the

Deactivate logical mode command.
Note: logical mode “0” is the default mode for the PU

and is not used in the HIRIS RF 43 system.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Load a new logical mode:

(the figure shows logical mode 1):
- select it and then double-click on Load logical

mode on board.
The selected logical mode is then added to the detector’s

Loaded logical modes list.
5) Activate the logical mode:
- select it and then double-click on Activate logical

mode.
The relevant Logical mode now appears as “active” in the list.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6 LOGICAL MODE CALIBRATION
There are three steps involved in calibrating the logical mode:

- OFFSET calibration
- GAIN calibration
- DEFECT MAP and BLINKING PIXEL calibration.
These three stages must be done in order, as each requires that the previous one has been
completed.
We recommend calibrating all the modes at low dose before calibrating them at high dose.
The complete detector calibration sequence is:
 Continuous fluoroscopy mode:

• Offset/gain calibration and defective pixel correction - Mode 1 (43 x 43cm)
• Offset/gain calibration and defective pixel correction - Mode 4 (15 x 15cm).
 Pulsed fluoroscopy mode:

 Radiography mode:
 Tomography mode:
The paragraphs below describe the calibration procedure, making a distinction between the
fluoroscopy modes (continuous/pulsed) and radiography/tomography modes.
Note: See paragraph 5.5 above for details on how to activate the logical mode you want to calibrate.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.1 OFFSET CALIBRATION IN CONTIN./PULSED FLUOROSCOPY MODES
OFFSET calibration involves the acquisition of 15 images (12 of which must be valid) by the detector
without X-ray emission.
Continuous and pulsed fluoroscopy modes foresee only one type of offset calibration for each mode.
The table below details the modes to be calibrated and the relevant parameters:
Logical Mode
ID Field Offset
Frequency X-ray Windows
(mHz) (ms)
Continuous Fluoroscopy
1 18000 1
43x43
2 15000 15
30x30
3 30000 1
20x20
Continuous Floroscopy Z3
4 15000 10
15x15
Pulsed Fluoroscopy
5 15000 15
43x43
6 15000 15
30x30
7 15000 15
20x20
Pulsed Floroscopy Z3
8 15000 10
15x15
Calibration procedure:
1) Select the Calibration TAB.
2) Double-click on the logical mode you want to calibrate (this must be the same as the “active” mode;
logical mode 1 in the figure below). Select Offset and then right-click on Offset calibration.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) The selected logical mode Offset calibration window

now opens:
- click on Start and wait for the offset calibration to be

completed,
- click on Exit.
4) The offset for that logical mode will now be

marked as “valid”.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.2 FINDING THE EXPOSURE VALUES FOR GAIN AND DEFECTIVE MAP CALIBRATION
GAIN and DEFECTIVE MAP calibration requires that you know the X-ray parameters in order to set
the detector at the dose level required during calibration.
Use a special function in the SD4343 application to find these parameters (X-ray filter and X-ray
generator exposure values):
1) Select Logical Modes manager.
2) Load the logical mode whose parameters you’re

interested in by clicking on Load logical mode on
board.
3) Activate by clicking on Activate Logical mode and

grab.
4) Select Calibration to calibrate the Offset of the

activated mode.
5) Go to LastFramePixiumManager1.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
6) Activate the Toggle automatic / manual mode symbol.
7) Access Properties.
High Limit value
High Limit slider
8) Select High Limit value and set a value twice that of the foreseen acquisition levels. You can
also use the “slider”: select and drag the High Limit value to the value you want.
9) Press the X-ray command (Rx) to acquire an image.
10) Release the X-ray command and deactivate the image GRAB using the relevant symbol.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11) Access Statistics and move the cursor over the image to check the Mean value of the acquired
image.
12) Adjust the exposure parameters as necessary and repeat the above procedure until you get the
required dose/image levels (see tables in paragraphs 5.6.3, 4, 6 and 7).
Make a note of the X-ray parameter values (X-ray filter and generator exposure).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.3 GAIN CALIBRATION IN CONTIN./PULSED FLUOROSCOPY MODES
The next step after OFFSET calibration is GAIN calibration of the current mode.
GAIN calibration involves X-ray emission:

- homogeneous X-ray beam filtering,
- X-ray dose set by the system.
The dose must fall within the accepted range, otherwise calibration will be aborted, i.e.:
- the set dose must be sufficient to generate the detector image levels within the accepted
range shown in the tables below.
Therefore, you must know the exposure parameters beforehand: check these before starting
calibration by acquiring images with homogeneous filtering and read the resulting grey level (LSB) (as
described in para. 5.6.2 above).
Continuous Fluoroscopy logical mode

Logical mode nGy /frame
Image level range Default X-ray parameters
ID (LSB) Filter: 10mm Al - SID 120cm
1 Continuous Fluoroscopy 600 7245-12075 80kV, 2.75mA
43x43 (typ. 9600)
2 Continuous Fluoroscopy 800 6420-10700 90kV, 3.60mA eq.*
30x30 (typ. 8560)
3 Continuous Fluoroscopy 800 6420-10700 93kV, 3.48mA
20x20 (typ. 8560)
4 Continuous Fluoroscopy 800 6420÷10700 93kV, 3.60mA eq.*
15x15 (typ. 8560)
* Note: mA eq. = mean mA value
HCF Pulsed Fluoroscopy logical mode

Logical mode nGy /frame
5 Pulsed Fluoroscopy 600 7245-12075 64kV, 60mA
43x43 (typ. 9600)
Pulsed Fluoroscopy 800 6420-10700
6 67kV, 60mA
30x30 (typ. 8560)
Pulsed Fluoroscopy 800 6420-10700
7 67kV, 60mA
20x20 (typ. 8560)
Pulsed Fluoroscopy 800 6420÷10700
8 67kV, 60mA
15x15 (typ. 8560)
The procedure for logical mode GAIN calibration is:
1) Select the Calibration tab.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2) Double-click on the logical mode you want to calibrate (this must be the same as the “active”
mode). Select Linear gain and then right-click on Linear gain calibration.
3) Click on Start.
4) The system warns you that any X-

ray emission is about to be stopped
(confirm with OK) and then tells you
the dose required for calibration
(confirm with OK).
5) To ensure correct GAIN calibration, the aperture of the X-ray collimator must be higher than that
of the input field for the selected logical mode, thus avoiding the risk of the collimator creating
shadow:
- max aperture, greater than 43x43cm, for logical modes 1 and 5

- at least 35cm x 35cm for logical modes 2 and 6
- at least 20cm x 20cm for logical modes 4 and 8.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Set the X-ray generator

- in manual fluoroscopy mode,
- with the exposure parameters needed for the dose required during calibration.
6) Press the X-ray emission command and then wait at least 1 second
before pressing OK.
The X-ray command must be held down through-out the procedure
(several seconds).
7) X-ray emission stops automatically at the end of the procedure. A

message appears: “Stop XRay Generator”
8) Press OK to stop.
After GAIN calibration, the logical mode is automatically deactivated.
9) Gain calibration is successful unless a message appears, warning you that the X-ray dose was
too high or too low or there was an object in the X-ray beam (collimator shutter or something else.
In which case, calibration is not valid and so you need to reactive the Logical mode by pressing
the “Logical mode manager” tab again and repeat the load/activate/Offset calibration and Gain
calibration operations.
10) The logical mode is now correct (Offset and Gain). We recommend you check the acquired image
to make sure that there are no calibration errors. Re-activate the Logical mode and acquire
several images. Assess these using the SD4343 function (see paragraph 5.6.2 above).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.4 DEFECTIVE PIXEL CORRECTION IN CONTINUOUS AND PULSED FLUOROSCOPY

MODES
5.6.4.1 DEFECTIVE PIXEL CALIBRATION WITH X-RAYS
This procedure is similar to gain calibration, but 4 series of acquisitions are required:
- homogeneous X-ray filtering,
- 4 different doses set by the system.
The X-ray data need to be set for each dose in order to get image levels falling within the accepted
range (see tables below).
As with Gain calibration, you must know the exposure parameters beforehand: check these before
starting calibration by acquiring images with homogeneous filtering and read the resulting grey level
(LSB) (see paragraph 5.6.2 above).
Logical mode 1
nGy /frame
(LSB) Filter: 10mm Al - SID 120cm
Continuous Fluoroscopy 43x43
603-1006
Dose 0 50 56kV, 1.40mA
(typ. 800)
1207-2012
Dose 1 100 61kV, 1.68mA
(typ. 1600)
9660-16100
Dose 2 800 85kV, 3.03mA
(typ. 12800)
14490-24150
Dose 3 1200 92kV, 3.42mA
(typ. 19200)
Logical mode 2
nGy /frame
802-1337
Dose 0 100 64kV, 2.04mA eq.*
(typ. 1070)
1605-2675
Dose 1 200 70kV, 2.40mA eq.*
(typ. 2140)
9630-16050
Dose 2 1200 95kV, 3.90mA eq.*
(typ. 12840)
13642-22737
Dose 3 1700 101kV, 4.26mA eq.*
(typ. 18190)
* Note: mA eq. = mean mA value
Logical mode 3
nGy /frame
802-1337
Dose 0 100 65kV, 1.90mA
(typ. 1070)
1605-2675
Dose 1 200 73kV, 2.35mA
(typ. 2140)
9630-16050
Dose 2 1200 101kV, 3.93mA
(typ. 12840)
13642-22737
Dose 3 1700 110kV, 4.43mA
(typ. 18190)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Logical mode 4
nGy /frame
802÷1337
Dose 0 100 64kV, 2.04mA eq.*
(typ. 1070)
1125÷1995
Dose 1 150 67kV, 2.2mA eq.*
(typ. 1500)
9630÷16050
Dose 2 1200 95kV, 3.90mA eq.*
(typ. 12840)
13642÷22737
Dose 3 1700 101kV, 4.26mA eq.*
(typ. 18190)
Logical mode 5
nGy /frame
Pulsed Fluoroscopy 43x43
603-1006
Dose 0 50 46kV, 60mA
(typ. 800)
1207-2012
Dose 1 100 49kV, 60mA
(typ. 1600)
9660-16100
Dose 2 800 67kV, 60mA
(typ. 12800)
14490-24150
Dose 3 1200 73kV, 60mA
(typ. 19200)
Logical mode 6
nGy /frame
802-1337
Dose 0 100 49kV, 60mA
(typ. 1070)
1605-2675
Dose 1 200 53kV, 60mA
(typ. 2140)
9630-16050
Dose 2 1200 73kV, 60mA
(typ. 12840)
13642-22737
Dose 3 1700 78kV, 60mA
(typ. 18190)
Logical mode 7
nGy /frame
802-1337
Dose 0 100 49kV, 60mA
(typ. 1070)
1605-2675
Dose 1 200 53kV, 60mA
(typ. 2140)
9630-16050
Dose 2 1200 73kV, 60mA
(typ. 12840)
13642-22737
Dose 3 1700 78kV, 60mA
(typ. 18190)
Logical mode 8
nGy /frame
802÷1337
Dose 0 100 49kV, 60mA
(typ. 1070)
1125÷1995
Dose 1 150 51kV, 60mA
(typ. 1500)
9630÷16050
Dose 2 1200 73kV, 60mA
(typ. 12840)
13642÷22737
Dose 3 1700 78kV, 60mA
(typ. 18190)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
To calibrate the DEFECTIVE PIXEL WITH X-RAYS of the active logical mode:
1) Select Calibration.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2) Double-click on the logical mode you want to

calibrate (this must be the same as the “active”
mode). Select Defective Map and right-click on
Build Defect Map.
3) Click on Next.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4) Click on Start.
5) The system warns you that any X-ray
emission is about to be stopped
(confirm with OK).
6) To ensure correct Detective Map calibration, the aperture of the X-ray collimator must be higher
than that of the input field for the selected logical mode, thus avoiding the risk of the collimator
creating a shadow:
- max aperture, greater than 43x43cm, for logical modes 1 and 5
- at least 20cm x 20cm for logical modes 4 and 8.
Set the X-ray generator:

- in manual fluoroscopy mode,
- with the exposure parameters for the right dose required for calibration.
7) Press the X-ray emission command and then wait at least 1 second
before pressing OK: acquisition/emission starts. The X-ray command
must be held down through-out the procedure (several seconds).
8) X-ray emission stops automatically at the end of the procedure. A

message appears: “Stop XRay Generator”. Press OK.
9) Repeat this procedure (steps 5, 6, 7 and 8) for the other 3 series of

acquisitions required.
10) Click on Finish.

Once DEFECTIVE MAP calibration has been completed, the logical mode is automatically de-
activated.
11) Defective Map calibration is successful unless a message appears, warning you that the X-ray
dose was too high or too low or there was an object in the X-ray beam (collimator shutter or
something else. In which case, calibration is not valid and so you need to reactive the Logical
mode by pressing the “Logical mode manager” tab again and repeat the load/activate/Offset
calibration and Defective Map calibration operations.
12) The logical mode is now correct (Offset, Gain and Defective Map). We recommend you check the
acquired image to make sure that there are no calibration errors. Re-activate the Logical mode
and acquire several images. Assess these using the SD4343 function (see paragraph 5.6.2
above).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.4.2 BLINKING PIXEL CALIBRATION
BLINKING PIXEL calibration comes after DEFECTIVE MAP calibration.

This involves the acquisition of a series of images without X-ray emission.
1) To activate Blinking Pixel calibration: click on Next in the Defect map calibration frame: the
Blinking defect map table calibration frame appears.
2) Press Start to start calibration. This lasts a few seconds.
3) Click on Finish once completed.

The logical mode is automatically deactivated after BLINKING PIXEL calibration.
4) Blinking Pixel calibration is successful unless a message appears, warning you that the X-ray dose
was too high or too low or there was an object in the X-ray beam (collimator shutter or something
else. In which case, calibration is not valid and so you need to reactive the Logical mode by
pressing the “Logical mode manager” tab again and repeat the load/activate/Offset calibration and
Blinking Pixel calibration operations.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.4.3 LINEAR GAIN DEFECTIVE PIXEL CALIBRATION
This form of calibration involves acquiring a series of images without X-ray emission.
1) Click on Build defect map in the CALIBRATION frame to activate the calibration.
2) Press Next to access the next frame.
3) Click on Start.
Calibration takes a few seconds.
When completed, click on Finish.
After calibration, the logical mode is automatically disabled.
Calibration of the logical mode is now complete, unless some defects need to be corrected manually.
We recommend you check the acquired image to make sure that there are no calibration errors. Re-
activate the Logical mode and acquire several images. Assess these using the SD4343 function (see

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.5 OFFSET CALIBRATION IN RADIOGRAPHY/TOMOGRAPHY MODE
OFFSET calibration always requires that the detector acquires 15 images (12 of which must be valid)
without X-ray emission.
• RADIOGRAPHY mode uses two different types of offset correction, which the system
automatically applies to suit the acquisition rate:
o Offset 0 one-shot and 1 i/s
o Offset 1 1.5 i/s and 3 i/s (Logical Mode 10)
2 i/s, 4 i/s and 8 i/s (Logical Mode 11)
The table below shows the two offset parameters for the two RADIOGRAPHY Logical Modes:
Logical Mode
Offset
ID Field Frequency X-ray Windows
(mHz) (ms)
2880x2880 Offset 10-0 1000 500
10 pixel
43x43cm Offset 10-1 3000 150
Offset 11-0 1000 500

1440x1440
11 pixel Offset 11-1 3000 250
43x43cm
Offset 11-2 8000 60
The calibration of the two Offset 0 values is sufficient to calibrate the detector.
• TOMOGRAPHY requires just one Offset calibration per mode.

The table below shows the offset parameters:
Logical Mode
Offset
ID Field Frequency X-ray Windows
(mHz) (ms)
Tomo 4 s
15 200 4300
2880x2880 pixel
43x43cm
Tomo 2 s
16 400 2300
2880x2880 pixel
43x43cm

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Procedure:
2) Go to the GRAPHY / TOMO Logical mode you want to

calibrate (this must coincide with the active mode). Select
Offset 0 and then right-click on Offset calibration.
3) The calibration frame for the selected logical mode

appears. Click on Start and then wait for OFFSET
calibration to be completed.
4) Then click on Exit: Offset 0 for the selected logical

mode will now be marked as “valid”.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.6 GAIN CALIBRATION IN RADIOGRAPHY AND TOMOGRAPHY MODE
The next step after OFFSET calibration is GAIN calibration of the current mode, always using Offset 0
for radiography Logical Modes.
GAIN calibration involves a series of 12 X-ray emissions:

- homogeneous X-ray beam filtering,
- X-ray dose set by the system.
Emission is controlled by the system at a rate of:

- 1 image/second for both Radiography Logical Modes
- 1 image every 5 seconds for Tomography Logical Mode 15
- 1 image every 2.5 seconds for Tomography Logical Mode 16
The dose must fall within the accepted range, otherwise calibration will be aborted, i.e.:
- the set dose must be sufficient to generate the detector image levels within the accepted
range shown in the tables below.
Therefore, you must know the exposure parameters beforehand: check these before starting
calibration by acquiring images with homogeneous filtering and read the resulting grey level (LSB) (as
described in paragraph 5.6.2 above).
RAD Logical modes

Logical mode Image level range Default X-ray parameters
nGy /frame
Rad 3i/s 10875-18125

10 25000 70kV, 160mA, 100ms
43x43 (typ. 14500)
Rad 8i/s 13500-22500

11 15000 70kV, 100mA, 100ms
43x43 (typ. 18000)
TOMO Logical modes

Logical mode Image level range Default X-ray parameters
nGy /frame
Tomo 4 s 10875÷18125
15 25000 70kV, 160mA, 100ms
43x43 (typ. 14500)
Tomo 2 s 10875÷18125
16 25000 70kV, 160mA, 100ms
43x43 (typ. 14500)
Procedure for GAIN calibration of the radiography/tomography Logical Modes:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2) Double-click on the RADIOGRAPHY/TOMOGRAPHY logical mode you want to calibrate (this

must coincide with the active Logical Mode). Select Linear gain and then right-click on Linear
gain calibration.
3) Click on Start.
4) The system warns you that any

X-ray emission is about to be
stopped (confirm with OK) and
then tells you the dose required
for calibration (confirm with OK).
5) To ensure correct GAIN calibration, the aperture of the X-ray collimator must be higher than that
of the acquisition field (i.e. greater than 43x43cm), thus avoiding the risk of the collimator creating
a shadow.
Set the X-ray generator with the exposure parameters needed for the dose required during
calibration.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Note: - the set radiography time for all Logical Modes must be less than 450 ms,
- A series of 12 exposures now follows: make sure that the energy required for this series of
exposures is compatible with the fitted X-ray tube.
6) Press PREP + RAD, wait at least 1 second and then press OK. The X-
ray commands must be held down throughout the procedure.
7) The X-ray emission sequence automatically stops. The system tells you
so with the warning “Stop XRay Generator”.
8) Press OK to end the procedure.

The logical mode is automatically deactivated at the end of GAIN calibration.
9) Gain calibration is successful unless a message appears, warning you that the X-ray dose was
too high or too low or there was an object in the X-ray beam (collimator shutter or something
else). In which case, calibration is not valid and so you need to reactive the Logical mode by
pressing the “Logical mode manager” tab again and repeat the load/activate/Offset calibration
and Gain calibration operations.
10) The logical mode is now correct (Offset and Gain). We recommend you check the acquired image
to make sure that there are no calibration errors. Re-activate the Logical mode and acquire
several images. Assess these using the SD4343 function (see paragraph 5.6.2 above).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.7 DEFECTIVE MAP AND BLINKING PIXEL CALIBRATION IN RADIO/TOMO MODE
5.6.7.1 DEFECTIVE MAP CALIBRATION
Having calibrated the GAIN, you can then calibrate the DEFECTIVE MAP.
This procedure is similar to gain calibration, but 4 series of acquisitions (each with 12 emissions) are
required:
- 4 different doses set by the system,
The exposures are controlled by the system at a rate of:

- 1 image/second for both Radiography Logical Modes
- 1 image every 5 seconds for Tomography Logical Mode 15
- 1 image every 2.5 seconds for Tomography Logical Mode 16
The X-ray data need to be set for each dose in order to get image levels falling within the accepted
range (see tables below).
As with Gain calibration, you must know the exposure parameters beforehand: check these before
starting calibration by acquiring images with homogeneous filtering and read the resulting grey level
(LSB) (as described in paragraph 5.6.2 above).
RAD Logical Modes

Logical mode 10
Rad 3i/s nGy /frame
43x43
1087-1812
Dose 0 2500 70kV, 32mA, 63ms
(typ. 1450)
2175-3625
Dose 1 5000 70kV, 50mA, 80ms
(typ. 2900)
17400-29000
Dose 2 40000 70kV, 160mA, 200ms
(typ. 23200)
21750-36250
Dose 3 50000 70kV, 160mA, 250ms
(typ. 29000)
Logical mode 11
Rad 8i/s nGy /frame
43x43
1350-2250
Dose 0 1500 70kV, 25mA, 40ms
(typ. 1800)
2700-4500
Dose 1 3000 70kV, 50mA, 40ms
(typ. 3600)
21600-36000
Dose 2 24000 70kV, 100mA, 160ms
(typ. 28800)
27900-46500
Dose 3 31000 70kV, 100mA, 200ms
(typ. 37200)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TOMOLogical Modes
Logical mode 15
Tomo 4 s nGy /frame
43x43
1087-1812
Dose 0 2500 70kV, 32mA, 63ms
(typ. 1450)
2175-3625
Dose 1 5000 70kV, 50mA, 80ms
(typ. 2900)
17400-29000
Dose 2 40000 70kV, 160mA, 200ms
(typ. 23200)
21750-36250
Dose 3 50000 70kV, 160mA, 250ms
(typ. 29000)
Logical mode 16
Tomo 2 s nGy /frame
43x43
1087-1812
Dose 0 2500 70kV, 32mA, 63ms
(typ. 1450)
2175-3625
Dose 1 5000 70kV, 50mA, 80ms
(typ. 2900)
17400-29000
Dose 2 40000 70kV, 160mA, 200ms
(typ. 23200)
21750-36250
Dose 3 50000 70kV, 160mA, 250ms
(typ. 29000)
The procedure for radiography logical mode DEFECTIVE MAP calibration is:
2) Select the RADIOGRAPHY/TOMOGRAPHY logical 10

mode you want to calibrate (this must coincide with
the active logical mode). Select Defective Map and
then right-click on Build Defect Map.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Click on Next.
4) Click on Start.
5) The system warns you that any X-ray

emission is about to be stopped
(confirm with OK).
6) To ensure correct calibration, the aperture of the X-ray collimator must be higher than that of the
acquisition field (i.e. greater than 43x43cm), thus avoiding the risk of the collimator creating a
shadow.
Place a homogeneous filter on the X-ray tube and set the X-ray generator with the exposure
parameters needed for the dose required during calibration.
Note: - the set radiography time must be less than 450 ms for all logical modes,
- a series of 12 exposures now follows: make sure that the energy required for this series of
exposures is compatible with the fitted X-ray tube.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7) Press PREP + RAD, wait at least 1 second and then press OK.
The X-ray commands must be held down throughout the procedure.
8) The X-ray emission sequence automatically stops. The system tells you
so with the warning “Stop XRay Generator”
9) Now repeat the procedure (steps 6, 7 and 8) for the other 3 series of
image acquisitions.
10) Click on Finish.

The logical mode is automatically de-activated once DEFECTIVE MAP calibration has been
completed.
11) Defective Pixel with RX calibration is completed successfully.
If an alarm appears, e.g. the X-ray dose was too high or too low or there was an
object in the X-ray beam (collimator shutter or something else), then the calibration is not
valid and so you need to reactive the Logical mode by pressing the “Logical mode manager” tab
again and repeat the load/activate/Offset calibration and Defective Map calibration operations.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.7.2 BLINKING PIXEL CALIBRATION
BLINKING PIXEL calibration comes after DEFECT MAP calibration.

This involves the acquisition of a series of images without X-ray emission.
1) To activate Blinking Pixel calibration: click on Next in the Defect map calibration frame.
2) Press Start to start calibration.

This lasts several minutes.
3) Click on Finish when ended.

The Logical Mode is automatically deactivated after BLINKING PIXEL calibration.
4) Blinking Map calibration is successful unless a message appears, warning you that the X-ray
dose was too high or too low or there was an object in the X-ray beam (collimator shutter or
something else). In which case, calibration is not valid and so you need to reactive the Logical
mode by pressing the “Logical mode manager” tab again and repeat the load/activate/Offset
calibration and Blinking Pixel calibration operations.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6.7.3 LINEAR GAIN DEFECTIVE PIXEL CALIBRATION
This form of calibration involves acquiring a series of images without X-ray emission.
1) Click on Build defect map in the CALIBRATION frame to activate the calibration.
2) Press on Next to access the next

frame.
3) Click on Start.
Calibration takes a few seconds.
4) When complete, click on Finish.
After calibration, the logical mode is automatically disabled.
Calibration of the logical mode is now complete, unless some defects need to be corrected manually.
We recommend you check the acquired image to make sure that there are no calibration errors. Re-
activate the Logical mode and acquire several images. Assess these using the SD4343 function (see

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.7 MANUAL DEFECTIVE MAP
If the DEFECTIVE MAP calibration procedure has failed to intercept defective pixels, you can identify
these manually, as follows.
1) Activate the Toggle automatic / manual mode symbol.
2) Access the Service menu and click on Defect maps.
3) Select the Logical Mode

containing the defective pixels
that have not been
automatically corrected.
4) Click on Start live.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5) Acquire the image in the relevant mode.
6) Go to the defective pixels and zoom into the image using the mouse trackball until you see the
PIXEL grid.
7) Make sure that the Defect map views synchronized option is

activated and then go to the defective pixel and right-click on Mark
defect.
8) Access the maps:

a. Manual (map of pixels that have been manually added)
b. Total (complete map)
and then check that the defective pixels have indeed been added to both maps.
9) Click on Stop Live, quit the Defect Maps menu.
10) Load the Logical Mode again and activate it. Calibrate its offset and then make a new image
acquisition and check that the defective pixels have been corrected.
Note: To compensate for a full row of defective pixels, you need to mark at least 5% of its pixels:
- continuous/pulsed fluoroscopy: mark at least 25 pixels
- radiography: mark at least 75 pixels.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.8 CHECKING THE DETECTOR
After calibrating the detector, the Defective map image shows the position of the defective pixels on
the surface of the detector.
In order to assess the quality of the detector, the SD4343 application also provides the ECV
parameter (Effective Cluster Value) for the Defective map, where each defective pixel is associated to
a given Defect class, depending on the presence of other defective pixels surrounding it.
Each defect class is given a weight. The sum of the weights of all these classes produces the ECV.
To check the ECV:
- After calibration, select the Calibration TAB.
- Double-click on Logical mode 1; select

Defect map and then right-click to explode
the menu.
- Select Get ECV.
- The Effective Cluster Value window opens,

showing the ECV.
- Repeat the procedure for Logical mode 10.
TRIXELL assumes the following as accepted values: 79422
ECV ≤ 115000 for Logical mode 1 (fluoroscopy)

ECV ≤ 109000 for Logical mode 5 (pulsed fluoroscopy)
ECV ≤ 128000 for Logical mode 10 (radiography).
Note: If the ECV exceeds this accepted value, contact the ATS technical service.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.9 SAVING THE CALIBRATION DATA
5.9.1 CALIBRATION BACK UP
The detector calibration is saved directly to the detector (see paragraph 5.9.2).
We recommend making a back-up copy in the system memory so that you can then reload it on the
detector if necessary (see paragraph 2.8 in Part 5).
The SD4343 software offers the following back-up functions:
- UPLOAD to copy the entire detector calibration in the system memory
Only possible if no logical mode is active.
Service  Maintenance  Upload.
Use the Whole Configuration option to transfer the entire detector calibration parameters: all the files
will be saved to the path indicated in the Destination Folder field. This is typically:
C:\Backup PU4343\Upload 4343.
Once transferred, a message appears in the Status box.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.9.2 HARDWARE RESET
The detector saves the calibration data as soon as you switch the system off.
We strongly advise that you do this immediately using the Hardware Reset function described below:
1) Service  Maintenance  Reset and turn off. Then use the Hardware reset function.
2) The SD4343 application shuts down. Then use the Windows Restart function.
3) Once the system has restarted, the software system automatically runs and the new
calibration parameters are automatically loaded.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.10 SAVING CALIBRATION IMAGES
During calibration of the detector, you may need to save the acquired images in RAW format in order
to export them and so view them on an external PC.
To save an image in RAW format, simply stop any active acquisition and then take the mouse pointer
to the image frame, right-click on the mouse and then select the Export raw image function:
You need to name the image file (Save as)

and set its position:
Depending on the acquisition Logical Mode, the formats used to save RAW images are shown in the
table below. These are specific for use of the IMAGE J application:
Acquisition modality Number type Horizontal Vertical Offset from start of file Little Endian White is 0
(LM Mode) size size
43x43 fluoroscopy 16bit Unsigned 960 960 256 Yes No
(LM 1) int
(LM 2) int
(LM 3) int
(LM 4) int
43x43 pulsed 16bit Unsigned 960 960 256 Yes No
fluoroscopy (LM 5) int
43x43 HR radiography 16bit Unsigned 2880 2880 256 Yes Yes
(LM 10) int
43x43 MR radiography 16bit Unsigned 1440 1440 256 Yes Yes
(LM 11) int
43x43 tomography
(LM 15,LM 16) 16bit Unsigned 2880 2880 256 Yes Yes
int

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
6 SAVING THE SETUP
6.1 GENERAL INFO
After installing the equipment, we recommend

saving the system setup and calibration data by
making a back-up copy of the video processor
system’s hard disk using the back-up drive in the
cabinet.
The back-up copy should then be stored in the
drawer for this purpose in the cabinet.
Back-up unit
We also recommend making a back-up CD/DVD of

the system disk (to be kept by the Technical
Office).
By making these two back-up copies you

guarantee that the system can quickly return to
normal functioning in the event of a hard disk
problem or corruption of the data in the system.
The procedures for saving data are explained in the following paragraphs:
- Updating the back-up hard disk (Part 5, para. 5.7)
- Creating a back-up CD/DVD (ghost disk) (Part 5, para. 5.8)
The procedures for restoring data are explained in the following paragraphs:
- Replacing the system hard disk with the back-up hard disk (Part 5, para. 2.1)
- Restoring the video processor system hard disk (Part 5, para. 2.2)
Note: The system comes with a back-up hard disk and a back-up CD/DVD (exact copies of the
system hard disk upon delivery ) and a CD containing the application that lets you make the
back-up CD/DVD.
revision 0 PART 2 page 6. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S2 06.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7 APPENDICES
7.1 CONTINUITY UNIT
Should there be a blackout long enough to cause the Personal Computer (PID) to shut down, there's a
tiresome system reboot procedure that's relatively long (about 10 minutes) before the operating
system and the applications are back up. This procedure also ensures complete acquisition of the
detector offset.
Moreover, even though the Windows operating system foresees the possibility of sudden switching-
off, we recommend avoiding this where at all possible for the above reason.
To avoid this problem, the system can be fed via a continuity unit (UPS), which feeds the main
Acquisition System supply line.
The function of the UPS is to cover for any brief cuts in the power supply or at least for the time
needed for the operator to carry out the shutdown procedure required by Windows 2000.
A 1000 VA continuity unit is normally capable of ensuring the power supply for the system for about
15 minutes.
7.1.1 INSTALLING THE UPS
The feasibility of adding a continuity unit (not provided by ATS) should be considered on the basis of
the following:
1) The UPS must be installed outside the acquisition system cabinet and its on/off button must always
be easily accessible.
2) The power of the UPS must be at least 1000 VA .

This power means that the system will have max autonomy for about 15 minutes. This max
standby time is a max limit and should never be reached.
3) The UPS supply must not come from the main circuit breaker in the room, otherwise whenever the
room power supply is switched off, this will be recognised as a drop in voltage.
The UPS should always be fed via an appropriate backup and circuit-breaking circuit.
4) If the system power supply is cut for a prolonged period (normally the UPS indicates this via an
intermittent buzzer), you should quickly carry out the WINDOWS 2000 "SHUTDOWN" procedure.
After which, you need to switch off the acquisition system cabinet (switch on cabinet) and then
switch off the UPS using its ON/OFF button. The UPS then needs to be switched back on once the
power returns.
5) At the end of each day, the system is normally switched off after the usual SHUTDOWN
procedure, by using the switch on the cabinet.
The UPS stays ON.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
General system power supply diagram, with UPS
ON/OFF
PIXIUM RF4343
PIXIUM RF4343

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.2 ON-LINE MANUALS
The user and technical manuals are available on-line in PDF format:
- see the explanation below for details of how to open and use the manuals,
- see paragraph 2.6 (PART 5). for details of how to install the manual upgrades.
The system manuals are opened from the operating frame.
- Click on Help / Operator Manual to open the

user manual.
- This command opens the Acrobat Reader SW and displays the user manual with its list of contents.
- To open the technical manual click on the

“information” symbol:

TECHNICAL MANUAL
- This command opens the relevant window containing the Technical Manual command.
- Use this command and enter the “technical” password to open the Acrobat Reader SW and display
the manual with its list of contents:
Note: The list of contents has links to each paragraph to speed up the use of the manuals.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.3 ADMINISTRATOR / OPERATOR LOG-IN
You need to access the system as the network administrator in order to set the system up.
To do this, during operation (system already running):
1) Close the system application.
2) Click on START in the Windows task-bar,

end select Log Off :
3) Then select Log Off in the page that now appears :
4) Enter the following codes in the new page:
- User name: Admin2

- Password: ats_PED.24
5) Press OK.
Note: - To return to normal operator mode, repeat the above steps, this time entering:
- User name: operator
- Password: operator

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.4 EXAM CARDS
EXAM CARDS (study folders) are identified by a 4-figure code, where:

- the first two figures stand for the body zone (Anatomic Part),
- the second two figures stand for the single projection (Projection).
The Anatomic Part and Projection parameters are those shown during the SELECT EXAM stage.
● The foreseen body zones are:
01-05 SKULL
06-10 THORAX
11-15 SPINE
16-20 ABDOMEN
21-25 PELVIS
26-30 G.I.
31-35 UPPER EXTREMITY
36-40 LOWER EXTREMITY
41-45 STITCHING
46÷50 URO
51 ANGIO (DSA)
56 TOMO
57-98 TBD
99 TEST
• The foreseen exams are listed in the table in paragraph 7.4.1.
In theory 99 x 99 cards may exist (99 body zones and 99 projections for each body zone).
These cards are available for the installer, who can then enable/disable them (using a password) in
order to create the list of projections available for the operator.
You can also create a new exam by starting from an existing exam and then use the Clone function
(see para. 4.4.2); you can then change the parameters and name in the cloned exam, while keeping
the same image process (“POST PROCESSING SET UP”).
If, on the other hand, you need to create a new exam with a different image processing algorithm, you
will need to construct a new EXAM CARD with a new “POST PROCESSING SET UP”: only ATS and
the authorised system integrator can do this.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.4.1 LIST OF SAMPLE EXAMS
The tables below list the sample exams with their main parameters programmed by ATS.
“SKULL” anatomic part
Code default name Rad Contin. Pulsed

(set by physician) Fluoro HCF
post-processing mean patient data post- post-
name processing processing
name name
01 02 SKULL AP & PA TBD 76kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 35x35 TBD TBD
01 07 SKULL AP & PA IP_SKULL_AP_ATH_M 76kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 35x35 TBD TBD
01 12 SKULL LAT TBD 70kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 35x35 TBD TBD
01 17 SKULL LAT IP_SKULL_LAT_ATH_ 70kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 35x35 TBD TBD
M
01 42 SKULL SINUSES PA TBD 75kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 24x30 TBD TBD
01 47 SKULL SINUSES PA IP_SINUSES_ATH_M 75kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 24x30 TBD TBD
01 62 SKULL SINUSES LAT TBD 75kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 24x30 TBD TBD
01 67 SKULL SINUSES LAT IP_SINUSES_ATH_M 75kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 24x30 TBD TBD
“THORAX” anatomic part
Code default name post-processing name mean patient data

(set by physician)
06 02 CHEST AP/PA IP_CHEST_PA_LRH_M 120kV 200mA / Camera Lat 5µGy/ 43x43
06 07 CHEST AP/PA IP_CHEST_PA_ATH_M 120kV 200mA / Camera Lat 5µGy/ 43x43
06 12 CHEST LAT IP_CHEST_LAT_LRH_M 120kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 43x43
06 17 CHEST LAT IP_CHEST_LAT_ATH_M 120kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 43x43
06 42 RIBS PA/AP IP_RIBS_PA_LRH_M 73kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
06 47 RIBS PA/AP IP_RIBS_PA_ATH_M 73kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
06 82 CHEST TRAUMA IP_CHEST_TRAUMA_LRH_M 85kV 200mA / Camera Lat 5µGy/ 43x43
06 87 CHEST TRAUMA IP_CHEST_TRAUMA_ATH_M 85kV 200mA / Camera Lat 5µGy/ 43x43
“SPINE” anatomic part

(set by physician)
11 02 CERVICAL AP IP_CERVICAL_AP_LRH_M 68kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 24x30
11 07 CERVICAL AP IP_CERVICAL_AP_ATH_M 68kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 24x30
11 12 CERVICAL LAT IP_CERVICAL_LAT_LRH_M 67kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 24x30
11 17 CERVICAL LAT IP_CERVICAL_LAT_ATH_M 67kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 24x30
11 22 THORACIC AP IP_THORACIC_AP_LRH_M 81kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 27 THORACIC AP IP_THORACIC_AP_ATH_M 81kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 32 THORACIC LAT IP_THORACIC_LAT_LRH_M 77kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 37 THORACIC LAT IP_THORACIC_LAT_ATH_M 77kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 42 LUMBAR AP IP_LUMBAR_AP_LRH_M 80kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x43
11 47 LUMBAR AP IP_LUMBAR_AP_ATH_M 80kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x43
11 52 LUMBAR LAT IP_LUMBAR_LAT_LRH_M 83kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 57 LUMBAR LAT IP_LUMBAR_LAT_ATH_M 83kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 62 L5/S1 AP IP_L5/S1_AP_LRH_M 85kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 67 L5/S1 AP IP_L5/S1_AP_ATH_M 85kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 72 L5/S1 LAT IP_L5/S1_LAT_LRH_M 85kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
11 77 L5/S1 LAT IP_L5/S1_LAT_ATH_M 85kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 20x40
“ABDOMEN” anatomic part

(set by physician)
16 02 ABDOMEN SUPINE IP_ABDOMEN_LRH_M 73kV 400mA / All cameras 5µGy/ 43x43
16 07 ABDOMEN SUPINE IP_ABDOMEN_ATH_M 73kV 400mA / All Cameras 5µGy/ 43x43

TECHNICAL MANUAL
“PELVIS” anatomic part
Code default name post-processing name mean patient kV data

(set by physician)
21 02 PELVIS AP IP_PELVIS_AP_LRH_M 75kV 250mA / Camera Lat 5µGy/ 43x43
21 07 PELVIS AP IP_PELVIS_AP_ATH_M 75kV 250mA / Camera Lat 5µGy/ 43x43
21 22 HIP AP IP_HIP_AP_LRH_M 75kV 250mA / All cameras 5µGy/ 43x43
21 27 HIP AP IP_HIP_AP_ATH_M 75kV 250mA / All cameras 5µGy/ 43x43
“UPPER EXTREMITY” anatomic part

(set by physician)
31 02 HAND PA IP_HAND_PA_LRH_M 44kV 4mAs / Camera off / 23x30
31 07 HAND PA IP_HAND_PA_ATH_M 44kV 4mAs / Camera off / 23x30
31 22 WRIST PA IP_WRIST_PA_LRH_M 52kV 160mA / Camera C 5µGy / 24x30
31 27 WRIST PA IP_WRIST_PA_ATH_M 52kV 160mA / Camera C 5µGy / 24x30
31 32 WRIST LAT IP_WRIST_LAT_LRH_M 52kV 160mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 24x30
31 37 WRIST LAT IP_WRIST_LAT_ATH_M 52kV 160mA / Camera C 5µGy / 24x30
31 52 ELBOW AP/LAT IP_ELBOW_LRH_M 56kV 160mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
31 57 ELBOW AP/LAT IP_ELBOW_ATH_M 56kV 160mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
31 92 SHOULDER PA IP_SHOULDER_LRH_M 63kV 100mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
31 97 SHOULDER PA IP_SHOULDER_ATH_M 63kV 100mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
“LOWER EXTREMITY” anatomic part

(set by physician)
36 02 FOOT AP IP_FOOT_AP_LRH_M 50kV 100mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 07 FOOT AP IP_FOOT_AP_ATH_M 50kV 100mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 12 FOOT LAT IP_FOOT_LAT_LRH_M 50kV 100mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 17 FOOT LAT IP_FOOT_LAT_ATH_M 50kV 100mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 22 ANKLE AP IP_ANKLE_AP_LRH_M 52kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 27 ANKLE AP IP_ANKLE_AP_ATH_M 52kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 32 ANKLE LAT IP_ANKLE_LAT_LRH_M 50kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 43x43
36 37 ANKLE LAT IP_ANKLE_LAT_ATH_M 50kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 52 KNEE PA IP_KNEE_AP_LRH_M 58kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 57 KNEE PA IP_KNEE_AP_ATH_M 58kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 43x43
36 62 KNEE LAT IP_KNEE_LAT_LRH_M 58kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x43
36 67 KNEE LAT IP_KNEE_LAT_ATH_M 58kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy/ 43x43
“STITCHING” anatomic part

(set by physician)
41 07 LEGS 60 cm IP_STIT_LEGS60_M 70kV 10mAs / Manual / 43x35 / no grid
41 37 SPINE AP 60 cm IP_STIT_SPINEAP60_M 80kV 200mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x35
41 67 SPINE LL 60 cm IP_STIT_SPINELL60_M 83kV 400mA / Camera C 5µGy / 43x35
“ANGIO (DSA)” anatomic part

(set by physician)
51 XX PERIPHERIC ANGIO IP_RAD_ANGIO 80kV 400mA / Camera C 5uGy / 43x43 / no
grid
51 XX PERIPHERIC ANGIO IP_RAD_ANGIO 80kV 400mA / Camera C 5uGy / 43x43 / no
grid
51 00 PERIPHERIC ANGIO IP_RAD_ANGIO 80kV 400mA / Camera C 5uGy / 43x43 / no
grid

TECHNICAL MANUAL

(set by physician)
griglia
grid
grid
grid
grid
grid
“TEST” anatomic part
Code default name post-processing name mean patient kV data

(set by physician)
99 01 TEST_70kV_Linear IP_LINEAR 70kV
99 02 TEST_40kV_Linear IP_LINEAR 40kV
99 03 DAM check IP_LINEAR 70kV
7.4.2 LIST OF TOMOGRAPHY EXAMS
There are special exam cards for tomography exams, clearly indicating the angle, speed and X-ray
emission time. See table below:
CODE TOMOGRAPHY TYPE
Group Projection Max Time msec Post processing Log. Mode

56 00 - 04 800 ATH xxx 16
56 05 - 09 1800 ATH xxx 16
56 10 - 14 2600 ATH xxx 15
56 15 - 19 4000 ATH xxx 15
56 20 - 24 800 ATH xxx 16
56 25 - 29 1300 ATH xxx 16
56 30 - 34 2000 ATH xxx 16
56 35 - 39 3000 ATH xxx 15
56 40 - 44 800 ATH xxx 16
56 45 - 49 1000 ATH xxx 16
56 50 - 54 1600 ATH xxx 16
56 55 - 59 2400 ATH xxx 15
56 60 - 64 800 ATH xxx 16
56 65 - 69 900 ATH xxx 16
56 70 - 74 1300 ATH xxx 16
56 75 - 79 2000 ATH xxx 16
56 80 - 99 Free

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5 INTEGRATION WITH X-RAY GENERATOR
7.5.1 GENERAL INFO
This document contains the system/X-ray generator interface system specifications.
The system foresees 2 levels of integration:

1st level, obtained by simply using logic signals for synchronisation of X-ray exposure and
image acquisition,
2nd level, this adds the function that sends the exposure parameters
(kV, mA, …) set in the system to the X-ray generator.
7.5.1.1 X-RAY GENERATOR OPERATING MODES
The X-ray emission modes requested by the system are:
• Continuous fluoroscopy,
• Max Opacification / Road mapping fluoroscopy
• Pulsed HCF fluoroscopy (high mA),
• Pulsed fluoroscopy (low mA),
• One-shot radiography and a series of exposures (up to 8/s),
• Tomography
The paragraphs below describe the characteristics of these X-ray emission modes to ensure correct
integration with the acquisition system.
7.5.1.1.1 Radiography
• The generator has to allow for two X-ray emission modes to suit the request for the selected exam:
AEC mode: where the exposure time is determined by the system via the
READY_ACQ_RAD signal,
NO AEC mode: the generator starts X-ray emission on receipt of the READY_ACQ_RAD
signal, but the actual exposure time is determined by parameters mAs or mA-s
set using the generator console.
• In AEC mode, the generator lets you choose the focus and set/view the kV and mA.
• In NO AEC mode (manual mode), on the other hand, as well as choosing the focus, the generator
also lets you set/view the kV, 3 and 2 point technique, mAs (if you chose the 2 point technique) or
mA – s (if you chose the 3 point technique).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
• The X-ray generator back-up time needs to be set, taking into account:
- The duration of a single exposure or a series of 1i/s exposures must not be more than 500
ms
- In high resolution:
o the duration of a series of 1.5 - 3 i/s exposures must not be more than 150 ms.
- In medium resolution:
o the duration of a series of 1.5 - 3 i/s exposures must not be more than 250 ms.
o the duration of a series of 2 - 4 - 8 i/s exposures must not be more than 60 ms.
While the backup time with the Wireless detector may be set to suit the length of exposure, this must
never, in any case, be more than 1 second.
See also point 7.5.2.2 “STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE” for more
details.
7.5.1.1.2 Continuous fluoroscopy
The system envisages the same X-ray generator signals for the acquisition request in both continuous
and pulsed fluoroscopy modes. The operator selects which mode to use from the system monitor.
The acquisition request is sent using the REQ_FL/HCF signal.
On receiving this signal, the system generates the READY_ACQ_FL output, used by the X-ray
generator to enable X-ray emission.
The X-ray generator then adjusts the X-ray dose:

- manual, programming of the kV/mA parameters,
- automatic, kV/mA parameters are set to suit the correction function supplied by the
system.
The choice between manual and automatic dose control is made by the operator directly from the X-
ray generator console.
See also point 7.5.2.3 “STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY

MODE” for more details.
7.5.1.1.3 Max Opacification / Road Mapping in Continuous fluoroscopy
The operator selects the mode via the monitor by selecting an exam programmed for Max Op / Road
Mapping continuous fluoroscopy.
As for normal continuous fluoroscopy:

- the acquisition request is via signal REQ_FL/HCF;
- after sending the request, the system provides the READY_ACQ_FL output signal, used
by the X-ray generator for X-ray emission;
- the X-ray generator should allow for manual and automatic X-ray dose control;
- the operator selects manual or automatic dose control directly from the X-ray generator
control panel.
MaxOp image acquisition starts after X-ray emission starts (delay):

- if manual dose control is selected on the X-ray generator control panel:
o delay time programmed in the exam folder,
- if automatic dose control is selected on the X-ray generator control panel:
o MaxOp will only start once the system has reached the correct dose: the kV/ma
parameters cannot, therefore, be adjusted until the end of the MaxOp / Road
Mapping function.
See also point 7.5.2.3 “STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY
MODE” for more details on this function.
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.1.1.4 Pulsed HCF fluoroscopy
When the operator selects the high contrast pulsed fluoroscopy (pulsed HCF) acquisition mode via the
system, the X-ray generator is informed of this via the activation of the SEL_HCF output by the system
itself; the X-ray generator then shows the right parameters on the console.
The acquisition request in pulsed HCF fluoroscopy is sent to the system using the same REQ_FL/HCF
signal used for a request in continuous fluoroscopy mode.
As a result, the system sends the READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF output to the X-ray generator, i.e. a series
of pulses (15 ms) to time X-ray emission: the X-ray generator then has to emit pulses of a fixed length
(typically 10 ms) to suit this timing.
As for continuous fluoroscopy, the X-ray generator should allow for manual and automatic X-ray
dose control.
Automatic dose control means that the kV/mA parameters are automatically adjusted to suit the
correction signal provided by the system.
NB: with automatic dose control:

- the BURST PULSE function in the EXAM SETUP folder is activated;
- this function commands X-ray emission at 7.5i/s while the system searches for the correct
dose, even if a slower pulsed rate is set.
See also point 7.5.2.4 “STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN PULSED HCF FLUOROSCOPY MODE”
for more details.
7.5.1.1.5 Pulsed fluoroscopy
The detector allows for image acquisition in continuous and HCF pulsed fluoroscopy using fields
43x43 cm and 20x20 cm (zoom2); only pulsed fluoroscopy is used for field 30x30 cm (zoom1) and
field 15x15 cm (zoom3).
The PULSED FLUOROSCOPY mode is therefore envisaged in order to simulate (for the operator)
continuous fluoroscopy, but with pulsed X-ray emission, at the max rate for field 30x30 (15 frame/s)
and field 15x15 (15 frame/s).
The main characteristics of this X-ray emission mode are:

- fixed emission rate: 15 impulses/s,
- max pulse time: 10 ms,
- mA correlated to kV, as with continuous fluoroscopy,
- the mA and pulse length are determined to get an X-ray dose similar to that in continuous
fluoroscopy,
- the mode shown on the X-ray generator console should be continuous fluoroscopy and
not pulsed fluoroscopy,
- the mA value shown should be the mean value during the X-ray pulse.
The system requests this mode from the X-ray generator, via an RS232 serial message or a logic
signal (SEL PULSED) whenever you decide to acquie images in continuous fluoroscopy mode using
fields 30x30 cm and 15x15 cm.
See also point 7.5.2.5 “STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN PULSED FLUOROSCOPY MODE” for
more details.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.1.1.6 Tomography
• The system also lets you acquire images in tomography mode.

Image acquisition in tomography mode involves a single exposure with a full matrix (2880x2880
pixels) lasting max 4.2s.
The X-ray generator and the remote control stand work as normal.
This mode is set when choosing the system exam. The stand and the X-ray generator are
informed of this setting by a series of serial messages (via CAN bus and/or RS232).
• When you choose tomography mode, the X-ray generator also received the NO AEC mode setting
signal.
The generator back-up time must be set to reflect the max acquisition time (4.2s).
See also point 7.5.2.6 “STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN TOMOGRAPHY MODE” for fuller details
of how this function works.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.2 1st LEVEL OF INTEGRATION
This is the min level of integration, basically allowing for synchronisation of the X-ray exposure and
acquisition of the image by the system.
Integration is by means of logic signals.
The setting of the radiological parameters on the generator continues to be manual, as foreseen by
the X-ray generator.
7.5.2.1 LOGIC SIGNALS
The logic interface signals are found on connectors CM2 and CM1 of the system's main controller.
CM6 Name Meaning

-Pin
Inputs
11 REQ_FL/HCF Request signal for fluoroscopy acquisition (continuous or pulsed):
the request is supplied by this signal plus COM_REQ.
30 PREP_RAD Preparation signal for radiography.
The system gets ready to receive signal REQ_RAD.
12 REQ_RAD Request signal for radiography sent to the system.
31 COM_REQ Safety signal for an acquisition request. This signal must be supplied with:
REQ_FL/HCF for continuous or pulsed fluoroscopy, or
PREP_RAD for preparation for radiography acquisition.
34 ZOOM 1 (30X30) Zoom 1 selection (30x30 cm)
17 SEL_FLAT_PANEL 1 Workstation selection signal for the PIXIUM RF 4343 detector.
13 SEL_FLAT_PANEL 2 Workstation selection signal for the Wireless detector.
14 SEL_FLAT_PANEL_1 Workstation selection signal for the PIXIUM RF 4343 detector

_CPI (CPI generators).
33 SEL_FLAT_PANEL_2 Workstation selection signal for the Wireless detector
_ CPI (CPI generators).
15 0V1 ACC. 0V for inputs (see figure 1)
10 0V ACC. 0V for inputs (see figure 1)
Outputs
29 +V ACC +24V (provided by the accessory / generator)
3 SEL_INJ Signal active if the exam is programmed for automatic injector start
21 SYNC_INJ Automatic injector start command
CM11 Name Meaning

-Pin
Output
1 SYNC_INJ_1 (contact NOa) Automatic injector start command via normally open relay contact,
used as an alternative to the signal from opto-insulator SYNC_INJ
2 SYNC_INJ_1 (contact NOb) in CM6-21.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
FLUORO/HCF HIRIS RF43

FOOT SWITCH +24V CM6
REQ_FL/HCF 11
PREP_RAD 30
PREP_RAD REQ_RAD 12
COM_REQ 31
RAD
ZOOM
ZOOM 1 (30x30) 34
ZOOM 2 (20x20) 16
SEL_FLAT_PANEL 1 17
SEL_FLAT_PANEL 2 13
0V1 ACC. 15
0V ACC. 10
+V ACC. 29
+24V
SEL_INJ. 3
SEL_INJ.
SYNC_INJ. 21
SYNC_INJ.
23
CM11
SYNC_INJ_1 1
SYNC_INJ_1
SYNC_INJ_1 2
SYNC_INJ_1
INTERFACE

TECHNICAL MANUAL
CM8 Name Meaning

-Pin
Inputs
23 GEN_READY Generator ready for pulsed/ pulsed HCF fluoroscopy:
Signal activated by the generator confirming that the preparation
stage has been completed.
21 EXON Exposure on:
The generator sends this signal to the system when the X-ray
exposure in pulsed fluoroscopy/ pulsed HCF fluoroscopy /
radiography / tomography mode.
19 0V GEN. 0V
Outputs
7, 20 +24V GEN. +24 V (supplied by the accessory / X-ray generator)
1 SEL_PULSED_HCF Signal sent by the system to the generator to select the pulsed
HCF fluoroscopy.
14 PREP_PULSED Signal sent by the system to the generator to request preparation
for pulsed HCF fluoroscopy.
2 SEL_ PULSED Signal sent by the system to the generator to select the pulsed
fluoroscopy .
17 READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF Signal for acquisition in pulsed fluoroscopy/ pulsed HCF
fluoroscopy / radiography in progress:
The generator must emit X-rays in these modes while this signal
is active.
5 READY_ACQ_FL Signal for acquisition in continuous fluoroscopy in progress:
The generator must emit X-rays in this mode while this signal is
active.
18 ABC_LOW ABC signal too low in fluoroscopy / pulsed fluoroscopy/ pulsed
HCF:
logic signal to generator to adjust X-ray dose.
6 ABC_HIGH ABC signal too high in fluoroscopy / pulsed fluoroscopy/ pulsed
HCF:
logic signal to generator to adjust X-ray dose.
analogue outputs
12 ABC_ERROR Dose error in fluoroscopy / pulsed fluoroscopy / pulsed HCF:
Analogue output signal to generator to adjust X-ray dose.
13 0V Reference 0 V for analogue output.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
HIRIS RF43
CM8
+24V
+24V GEN. 7-20
PREP_PULSED 14
PREP.HCF
SEL_PULSED_HCF 1
SEL_PULSED_HCF
SEL_PULSED 2
SEL_PULSED
READY_AQ_RAD/HCF 17
READY_AQ_RAD/HCF
READY_ACQ_FL 5
READY_AQ_FL.
ABC_LOW 18
ABS_LOW
ABC_HIGH 6
ABS_HIGH
ABC_ERROR 12
ABS_ERROR
0V 13
+24V
GEN_READY 23
EXON 21
0V GEN. 19
SERIAL LINK CM24

RS-232
Rx =2
Tx =3
0V =5
CAN BUS CM5

CAN L =2
CAN H =7
0V =3
CM4
124E
CAN L =2
CAN H =7
0V =3
CAN BUS
TERMINATION
INTERFACE

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.2.2 IMAGE ACQUISITION STAGES IN RADIOGRAPHY MODE
In order to give the image acquisition command, you need to send a preparation signal to the system,
followed by an acquisition request signal.
The preparation command is provided by the PREP_RAD e COM_REQ signal.

After 1 second the system waits for the acquisition command provided by the REQ_RAD signal.
When acquisition starts, the system activates the READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF output to the X-ray
generator, which should then start emitting X-rays. During X-ray emission, the X-ray generator must
return the active X-ray information via the EXON signal.
- If working in AEC mode :

As soon as the system receives the EXON signal, it starts measuring the accumulated X-ray
dose value. Once the set dose value is reached for the current exam, the
READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF output is deactivated and as a result the X-ray generator must
immediately cut X-ray emission.
- If working in NO AEC mode :

The X-ray generator directly controls the exposure time using the set parameters (mAs or mA-
s).
Important: The X-ray generator must cut X-ray emission as soon as the preparation/radiography
commands are released or in the event of a generator alarm, regardless of the actual
status of the READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF signal.
The generator back-up time must be set to reflect the max exposure time:
• With PIXIUM RF 4343 detector:
- for single exposures and a series of 1i/s exposures: 500ms
In high resolution radiography:

- for a series of 1.5 – 3 i/s exposures: 150ms
In medium resolution radiography:

- for a series of 1.5 – 3 i/s exposures: 250ms
- for a series of 2 – 4 – 8 i/s exposures: 60ms
• With WIRELESS detector

-1s
The X-ray generator is informed of the set acquisition rate via a series of serial messages.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO AEC
t1 = 1 s (max)
t2 = 500 ms max
t3 = 250 / 150 / 60 ms max
AEC
t1 = 1 s (max)
t2 = 500 ms max
t3 = 250 / 150 / 60 ms max

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.2.3 IMAGE ACQUISITION STAGES IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY MODE
The acquisition request is supplied by the REQ_FL/HCF and COM_REQ signals.
The system tells the X-ray generator that acquisition is in progress via output READY_ACQ_FL.
The X-ray generator only starts X-ray emission in fluoroscopy mode when it receives this signal. It
must stop X-ray emission when:
- there is no READY_ACQ_FL signal,
- as soon as the fluoroscopy footswitch is released or there is an X-ray generator or accessory
alarm, regardless of the READY_ACQ_FL signal.
During acquisition, the X-ray generator receives a series of signals depending on the image levels
acquired by the detector in order to correct the X-ray dose automatically:
- the analogical output ABC_ERROR
- the logic outputs ABC_LOW and ABC_HIGH (when the X-ray dose is correct, both are
deactivated).
The analogical output ABC_ERROR varies from +10 V to -10 V, with X-ray dose corrected at 0V.
During installation you can associate the polarity of the voltage as “high X-ray dose” or “low X-ray
dose t” (see ”General setup” in Part 4 of this manual).
When there is no acquisition, analogical output ABS_ERROR goes to 0 V and the logic outputs for
control are deactivated.
t1 = 500 ms (typ)
t2 = 100 ms (typ)

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.2.4 STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN PULSED HCF FLUOROSCOPY MODE
The X-ray generator is told that this mode has been selected via output SEL_PULSED_HCF.
The pulsed HCF fluoroscopy acquisition request is sent to the system by the REQ_FL/HCF and
COM_REQ signals from the accessory.
The system then sends the X-ray generator the pulsed fluoroscopy preparation command via output
PREP.PULSED.
The X-ray generator must confirm within 3 seconds that preparation is completed by activating input
GEN.READY.
After checking that the GEN.READY signal has been received, the system informs the X-ray
generator that acquisition is in progress using the READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF input (fixed duration of 15
ms for all zoom factors except for zoom factor 15x15, which lasts 10ms, at rates of between 1 and 15
pulses per second, depending on the value you set).
- there is no READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF signal,
alarm, regardless of the READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF signal.
The X-ray generator must return the EXON signal to the system (X-ray emission).
To get automatic correction of the X-ray dose, the X-ray generator receives the analogical output
ABC_ERROR and the logic outputs ABC_LOW and ABC_HIGH.
As with continuous fluoroscopy, the analogical output varies from +10 V to -10 V, with X-ray dose
corrected at 0 V.
When there is no acquisition, analogical

output ABC_ERROR goes to 0 V and the
logic outputs for control are deactivated.
t1 = 3 s (max)
t2 = 150 ms (typ)
t3 = 15 ms for zoom 30x30 (10ms for zoom 15x15)
t4 = 66 + 1000 (depending of selected rate)
t5 = 100 ms (typ)

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.2.5 STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN PULSED FLUOROSCOPY MODE
The X-ray generator is told that this mode has been selected via output SEL_PULSED.
The pulsed HCF fluoroscopy acquisition request is sent to the system by the REQ_FL/HCF and
COM_REQ signals.
The system then sends the X-ray generator the pulsed fluoroscopy preparation command via output
PREP.PULSED
The X-ray generator must confirm within 3 seconds that preparation is completed by activating input
GEN.READY.
After checking that the GEN.READY signal has been received, the system informs the X-ray
generator that acquisition is in progress using the READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF input (fixed duration of 15
ms for zoom factor 30x30 and 10ms for zoom factor 15x15, at a fixed rate of 15 pulses per second).
- there is no READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF signal,
alarm, regardless of the READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF signal.
To get automatic correction of the X-ray dose, the X-ray generator receives the analogical output
ABC_ERROR and the logic outputs ABC_LOW and ABC_HIGH.
As with continuous fluoroscopy, the analogical output varies from +10 V to -10 V, with X-ray dose
corrected at 0 V.
When there is no acquisition, analogical output ABC_ERROR goes to 0 V and the logic outputs for
control are deactivated.
REQ_FL/HCF
CM6-11
COM_REQ
CM6-31
GEN. READY CM8-23
PREP_PULSED
CM8-14
SEL_PULSED
CM8-2
READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF
CM8-17
ABC_ERROR
CM8-12
ABC_LOW
CM8-18
ABC_HIGH
CM8-6
X-RAY GENERATOR HIRIS RF43
t1 = 3 s (max)
t2 = 150 ms (typ)
t3 = 15 ms for zoom 30x30
(10ms for zoom 15x15)
t4 = 66 ms
t5 = 100 ms (typ)
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.2.6 STAGES IN IMAGE ACQUISITION IN TOMOGRAPHY MODE
Image acquisition in tomography mode is enabled using the same signals as in radiography mode.
As in radiography mode, the system must receive the following signals:

- PREP_RAD and COM_REQ preparation commands,
- REQ_RAD acquisition command in radiography mode. This signals must be received within 10s
from receiving the PREP_RAD command.
The system then enables output READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF, with a max delay of 700 ms after the
acquisition request REQ_RAD.
Signal READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF is used as the command to move the column that will control X-ray
emission directly via the angle signal.
The max acquisition time (READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF active) is 2.2 seconds for high-speed TOMO
exams (using Logical Mode 16) and 4.2 seconds for low-speed TOMO exams (Logical Mode 15) (see
also paragraph 7.4.2 above).
During X-ray emission, the generator must send the system signals containing information on the
active X-rays via signal EXON.
After Tomography angulation, the generator cuts X-ray emission: signal REQ_RAD from the
accessory stops and as a result the system deactivates the output READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF.
The function is deactivated at any time as soon as the PREP_RAD signal stops.
TOMO Selection (to Accessory)

CAN-BUS
PREP_RAD
CM6-30
REQ_RAD READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF
CM6-12 CM8-17
COM_REQ
CM6-31
EXON
CM8-21
TOMO Selection (to Accessory)
PREP_RAD
REQ_RAD
READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF
700ms
X-Ray
EXON
200ms (max)

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.5.3 2nd LEVEL OF INTEGRATION
This level of integration lets you automatically set the X-ray generator parameters (focus, kV, mA or
mAs) on opening an exam. These parameters are programmed during installation of the exam folders
in the system (see paragraph 4.4 “EXAM SETUP”).
• On selecting an exam, the system sends the parameters saved in the exam card (focus, kV, mA or
mAs) to the X-ray generator. Any changes can be made by the operator using the generator
console.
• After exposure, the system asks the X-ray generator for the parameters used (kV, mAs and time)
which are then sent to the image processor in order to get a print-out.
• The original X-ray generator console lets you check the status and settings of the generator at all
times.
Integration is done in such a way that the safety level of the X-ray generator is unaffected. This means
that the generator always keeps the working parameters under control. The system simply proposes
a setting and displays the actual value received from the generator.
The safety of the data transferred to the generator is guaranteed by both the communication protocol
used and the generator itself, which won't accept any out-of-range parameters.
7.5.3.1 INTEGRATION MODE
The system foresees two serial communication channels in addition to the logic signals in paragraph
7.5.2.1. These can be used as an alternative, RS232 or CAN, in order to get this level of integration.
The possible messages are listed below (the system can be adapted to suit the X-ray generator
protocol to code and read these messages).
Contact ATS for details of the communication protocols.
7.5.3.1.1 Messages from the system to the X-ray generator
The following messages are sent to the X-ray generator on opening an exam:
- Focus selection (small, large),
- KV setting, for RAD and FLUORO
- Technique setting (AEC, NO AEC),
- mA setting (in AEC mode),
- mAs (in NO AEC mode).
After exposure, the Main controller asks the X-ray generator for details of the exposure parameters:
- kV value request,
- post mAs value request,
- post exposure time request.
- dose patient request.
7.5.3.1.2 Alarms
• Every time the X-ray generator receives a setup message, it responds with the relevant status
message.
The system checks that the response arrives correctly within 1 second, otherwise it sends the
message again. After 3 failed attempts it ends transmission and sends the “SET X-RAY FAULT”
alarm to the video processor.
• The system checks that the post exposure data are correct. If not (reception error...) it sends the
“POST X-RAY DATA FAULT” alarm to the video processor.
• All the other X-ray generator alarms are not managed by the system: they continue to be visible on
the X-ray generator console.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.6 INTEGRATION WITH X-RAY COLLIMATOR
7.6.1 GENERAL INFO
The system can be integrated with a collimator, interface via CAN line:
The main characteristics of the collimator are:

- collimator with two pairs of parallel shutters,
- aperture of up to 43x43 cm at min focal distance,
- optional X-ray beam hardening filters.
The collimator is controlled by the remotely controlled stand. This automatically limits the X-ray beam
to suit the selected detector field (zoom): 43 x 43 cm, 30x30 cm, 20x20 cm or 15x15 cm.
The remote controlled stand is responsible for controlling the collimator, which automatically limits the
X-ray beam to suit the selected detector field (zoom): 43 x 43 cm, 30x30 cm or 20x20 cm.
The collimator aperture can be programmed for each system exam card and for each size. This value
is communicated at the start of each exam and is typically the set aperture for exposure in
radiography mode.
At the end of one-shot exposure or a series (both in radiography mode), the system receives the
actual aperture size and uses this for the application of the digital shutters on the image.
Considering the normal way the collimator works with a remote controlled stand:
- during fluoroscopy mode (continuous and pulsed HCF) you can manually adjust the aperture so
that it is less than the max aperture on the selected field (zoom).
- there are two scenarios in radiography mode:
- with the collimator in “automatic” mode, the aperture will be that programmed for the
exam,
- with the collimator in “manual” mode, the aperture will be that set by the operator during
the last fluoroscopy acquisition.
There is also a condition called “Total manual control” of the collimator, set via a CAN message sent
by the system during the detector setup, which makes it possible to open the collimator to its
mechanical limit.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.6.2 INTEGRATION
Integration is via the communication of messages using the CAN line.
Contact ATS for details of the communication protocol used.
In order to enable integration with the collimator, you must first enable its selection in the general
system setup menu (General Setup / Main Controller RAD Setup, see paragraph 4.2.1 above).
When you select an exam, the system sends the collimator the various aperture values and the need
for any X-ray beam hardening filter, as programmed in the exam setup card.
Any corrections in aperture can be made by the operator using the controls on the stand or by the
collimator itself.
After exposure, the actual value of aperture will automatically be used to position the electronic
shutters around the useful part of the image.
The communication protocol also foresees that the collimator supplies info on the focal distance. This
is useful for the system to check that the focal distance is coherent with the programmed exam
settings (otherwise an alarm will be generated and acquisition will be inhibited).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.7 INTEGRATION WITH THE MOTORISED MULTIPURPOSE STAND
7.7.1 GENERAL INFO
The system can be integrated with various stands (remote controlled, multipurpose, motorised or
manual).
For example, a multipurpose motorised stand lets you program the system so that it tells the stand
the position to be reached for each type of exam selected by the operator (for example CHEST PA).
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
For example, the figures above show such a system positioned for:
- Fig. 1 - AP/PA projection on a patient lying on the bed,
- Fig. 2 - AP/PA projection on a standing patient,
- Fig. 3 - LL projection on a patient lying on the bed.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.7.2 INTEGRATION
The stand console must include the following settings:

- H. REV.  Horizontal reverse
- V. REV.  Vertical reverse
- FIELD 43x43  Nominal field 43x43 cm
- FIELD 30x30  1st zoom 30x30 cm
- FIELD 20x20  2nd zoom 20x20 cm
- FIELD 15x15  3rd zoom 15x15 cm
The reverse image settings can only be sent to the HIRIS RF43 via CAN bus messages. The field
settings are sent to the system via either logical signals or CAN bus messages.
CAN messages allow for details of the general status of the stand (still, moving), the presence of a
grid, stand alarms and warnings, focal distance, stitching parameters, etc.
Contact ATS for details of the CAN protocol.

Note: The image flip commands are “status change” commands, changing the present image
reverse (i.e. TOGGLE type commands). The reverse status cannot, therefore, be seen
on the stand control panel: check the working monitor to see the actual orientation of
the image.
7.7.2.1 INTEGRATION SETUP
To enable integration with a motorised multipurpose stand, you need to enable its selection in the
general system setup menu (General Setup / Main Controller Setup, see paragraph 4.2 above).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Foreseen options:
- Integrated Remote controlled stand, to enable transmission of CAN messages to the stand.
- Check Technique. If enabled, the system will inhibit image acquisition should the actual position of
the stand not match the programmed position (if disabled, just a WARNING is given and exposure is
allowed).
7.7.2.2 STAND POSITIONING
The choice of the position of the stand can be programmed in the individual exam setup card (Exam
Setup menu, see paragraphs 4.3 and 4.4 above), letting you set up to 8 positions using the
Accessory Code parameter.
When you open the exam, the system sends the code for the programmed position via the CAN line.
This is used by the stand for positioning.
Once positioned, the system checks that the position reached corresponds with that set for the exam:
a warning may appear if the position is wrong (acquisition is still possible) or an alarm (acquisition
inhibited), depending on the installation setup (Check Technique option in paragraph 7.7.2.1 above).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.7.2.3 ALARMS
Integration involves a series of alarms that appear on the system monitor, if used (depending on the
type of stand used).
For example, below is a list of some of the possible alarms:
WARNING: TECHNIQUE “x” REQUESTED

POSITIONER OFFLINE
POSITIONING IN PROGRESS
POSITIONER ALARM
ENABLE MOVEMENT
SELECT TECHNIQUE “ x”
ROTATE X-RAY TUBE
PULL EXT TABLETOP
PULL UP TABLETOP
POSITIONER IN SERVICE
POSITIONER IN PARKING.
INCREASE STITCHING POSITION.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.8 INTEGRATION WITH ANTI-SCATTER GRID
7.8.1 GENERAL INFO
The system allows for the management of 2 anti-scatter grids, focussed at two different focal
distances, via CAN line.
.
Depending on the type of exam, integration allows for:
• Checks that the grid has been inserted correctly.
• Checks that the focal distance has been set correctly (if the X-ray system is capable of sending the
value via CAN protocol).
Please contact ATS for further info concerning the Can communication protocol.
7.8.2 INTEGRATION FUNCTIONS
• The exam setup cards let you choose between two grids: Grid 1, Grid 2 and No Grid.
If, when the exam is opened, the grid actually used isn't the one set in the exam setup card, the
system will generate an alarm and prevent exposure.
Possible alarms:
- Remove grid
- Add grid (for systems with only one grid)
- Add grid 1 (for systems with two grids)
- Add grid 2 (for systems with two grids).
• You can set up the system from the General Setup / Main Controller RAD Setup frame by defining
the working range for each grid.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
e.g. - Grid 1 DFFmin: 120 DFFmax: 140

- Grid 2 DFFmin: 170 DFFmax: 185
- No Grid DFFmin: 100 DFFmax: 130
The min and max limits define the range of variation in the focal distance; exposure is inhibited if the
value of the focal distance falls outside these limits.
Possible alarms:
- Increase focal distance
- Decrease focal distance.
7.9 INTEGRATION WITH DOSE AREA METER (DAM)
The DAM may be connected to either the X-ray generator or the system.
If to the generator, the system asks the X-ray generator for details of the accumulated dose via serial
messages (RS232 or CAN).
In either case, the system receives the dose value at the end of each exposure (one-shot or series
radiography; continuous or pulsed fluoroscopy).
- One-shot radiography:
- the system calculates the overall value of the “Total Exam Dose”,
- this is then associated to the image in real time,
- Run radiography:
- this is then divided by the number of exposures in the run and the resulting mean figure is
then associated to each image in real time,
- Continuous and pulsed fluoroscopy:

- no dose value is associated to any of the images (even if saved).
The “Total Exam Dose” is saved by the system as part of the exam parameters and sent via DICOM
using the relevant functions (MPPS).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.10 STITCHING. INTEGRATION AND SETTINGS.
7.10.1 INTRODUCTION
The stitching function lets you reconstruct an X-ray image starting from a set of images acquired in
Radiography Mode (min 2 - max 4) by moving the detector with regular steps.
This is normally used for spine and leg exams.
For example, you can obtain the following image sizes with detector steps of 30cm:
43 x 60 cm (2 acquired images)
43 x 90 cm (3 acquired images)
43 x 120 cm (4 acquired images).
The “stitched” image can be shown on the monitor, processed, printed or sent via network using the
normal system functions.
Stitching takes about 15-20 seconds and depends on the number of images involved.
This function is only possible with a stand capable of scanning the patient as required (i.e. moveable).
7.10.2 SCANNING MODE
The approach described here involves moving the detector along the patient, while the X-ray tube is
turned keeping the focus in the same position, as shown in the figures below.
2 image
stitching
3 image
stitching
The angle of rotation and the shutter aperture must be set to ensure consecutive images overlap. The
overlap must be large enough for the stitching algorithm to reconstruct them correctly (normally 3 - 5
cm).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Note: You can reverse the patient scanning direction (bottom up) by selecting the VFlip parameter in
the Option->Setup->Stitching Setup menu.
2 image
stitching
3 image
stitching

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.10.3 ACQUISITION PROCEDURE
● Stand
The stand receives the exam stitching setting from the system and prepares for the procedure. The
information is supplied by a CAN BUS message.
Radiography images are obtained by using the normal PREP and RAD commands.
After the first exposure, the stand starts moving the detector and rotating the X-ray tube: once in the
next position, all movement stops and X-ray exposure is enabled.
This sequence can be repeated for up to 4 acquisitions.
The stand or the system can enable the next acquisitions once the system has checked the movement
via CAN BUS messages.
- Scanning always starts from top to bottom.
● X-ray generator
The procedure involves the same interface signals, PREP_RAD and REQ_RAD, as normal image
acquisition in radiography mode.
The procedure involves emission:

- at a fixed kV value for all exposures,
- at a fixed mA value for all exposures,
- with mAs values that are fixed or controlled by the ionising chamber to suit the parameter set
in the exam card.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Operator interface
Single images are acquired as a single run and the stitched image is placed at the start of the run.
Full images are automatically stitched.
Markers are added to show the stitching lines:

o A triangular marker if the system judges the stitching to be good,
o A square marker if the set quality of the stitching (Reliability) has not been met (see
paragraph 7.10.5)
Stitching with Reliability Stitching with Reliability

below set threshold above set threshold
The full image indicates the X-ray dose as the sum of the individual images.
Note: The full image may, in theory, be formed of all the pixels in the various single images. If 3
images are stitched together, the result would be a single stitched image of roughly
2880x2880x3 = 24,883,200 pixels. This would mean images weighing 50MB or so are stored on
the HD and sent via DICOM. To avoid such heavy files, the image pixels are automatically
reduced using a factor (min 1.5 - max 3 ).
This parameter is set in menu Option->Setup->Stitching Setup.
and set the reduction

factor 

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.10.4 EXAM CARD SETTINGS
● Exam setup
The exam cards that can be set as Stitching cards are those with ID = 41-45, i.e. cards 41-00 to 45-99.
To select Stitching, use the Post Processing Setup option for the card.
The Exam Setup card shows the Stitching exam settings.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
● Post Processing Setup
The stitching function and its parameters are set in the Post Processing Setup card
Once enabled, the function is valid for all sizes.
● Set:
- Enable Stitching: Select to set this exam card as a Stitching Exam.
- Stitching Component Images [2-4]: Use to define the number of images to be acquired (min 2 –
max 4).
- Stitching Custom Code: This code is sent to the stand on opening the exam (not used directly by
the system). Can be used to preset the stand:
example: 1 Stitching for rachis
2 Stitching for lower limbs
N.B.: Code “0” disables the sending of the STITCHING mode signal to
the accessory.
- Stitching ROI Type: This defines the post processing calculation (ROI) for the stitched image.
Note: the post processing set in the exam card applies to both the final
stitched image and the individual ones; ROIs are differentiated with one for
the stitched image and another for individual images.
- Stitching. Set Name: the stitching setup profile for the exam.
(see paragraph 7.10.5).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.10.5 SETUP PROFILES
The “setup profile” is the combination of settings needed for correct functioning of the stitching
algorithm. These settings mainly depend on the scanning movement (stepping, overlapped area,
precision of positioning …).
Different profiles are possible for different scanning modes.
Setup profiles can be edited by right-clicking on an image to be stitched or already stitched:
- a menu appears,
- select REBUILD STITCHED IMAGE
- another menu appears: Exam Type Selection.
This image shows the first two images in the stitching sequence and the overlap used by the
STITCHING function.
• Using the Low and High parameters you can adjust the brightness of these images. To speed things
up, we recommend clicking on the blue slider bar and then dragging this right or left.
• Use Previous and Next to select other pairs (if any) of single images. For example, in a run of 3
exposures, you can check the stitching results by using the 1st and 2nd images or the 2nd and 3rd
images.
The following commands let you edit the profiles:
● Insert to create a new profile
● Delete to delete an existing profile
● Edit to edit a profile (the Exam type menu below appears).

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.10.5.1 EXAM TYPE MENU
This is split into 3 main areas:
- stitching parameters:
o Description: profile name

o Image format: total image size (fixed: 2880x2880px)
o Image valid region: area valid for stitching
o Projection center: the offset of the centre of the image projection (fixed: 0,0)
o Used overlap region: overlap areas for stitching
o Display window: lets you adjust the W and L of images for better display
o Travel Unit Motion: nominal step by the stand between two exposures, longitudinal
positioning error (scanning movement) and max orthogonal angles.
o Reliability: lets you set the min reliability threshold for the stitched image (normally
set as 0.5)
- chessboard:
o Show chessboard: to view overlapped images.

o Square size: to change the size of the “squares” for better display.
o Zoom Factor: to change the zoom used to see the overlap area. We recommend
clicking on Zoom to Fit.
- images: shows the position and size of the Valid region and Overlap region

TECHNICAL MANUAL
The table below shows the parameters for a typical profile:
Parameter Typ. Value Conditions / Notes
Image valid region Width 2700 Set a value just below the basic detector matrix
(2880 x 2880 pixels)
(pixel) (*) Height 2700
Used overlap region Width 2600 Set a value just below: Image valid region -
Width
Height 270 Set a value just below the actual overlap area
(pixel) between two images: 270 ≅ 4 cm
Y Offset 0÷200 This lets you shift the overlap region down to
move it away from the edge of the shutter (if
present).
Travel unit Motion Nominal step Step/0,148 This sets the scanning step (pixels). e.g. 30 cm
= 2027 pixels
(pixel) Max step error 50 Set a value to suit the expected stepping error
by the stand (**).
50 pixels ≅ 7.4 mm
Max orthogonal error 50 Set a value to suit the expected transverse
positioning error by the stand (**). 50 pixels ≅
7.4 mm
Projection center X Offset 0 To define the offset the centre of the acquired
(pixel) Y Offset 0 image and the centre of the detector
Reliability (0..1) 0 = 0% 0.5 To define the minimum valid stitching value. If
1 = 100% the stitched image exceeds this threshold, the
lateral markers for the stitching areas are
shown as triangles (reliable stitching); otherwise
they are rectangles (non reliable stitching)
Note:
(*) The detector size in pixels is 0.148mm.
(**) The error parameters are sent to the stitching algorithm to define the area in which to find the
stitching line. For instance, if Max step error =50, the algorithm looks for the stitching line in the
area defined by the nominal step ±50 pixel.
We recommend setting the smallest possible error values to reduce the search area (and thus the
time needed for stitching) and to avoid the risk of false reconstructions.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.10.5.2 CHECKING A PROFILE
Profile test:
Press Test to check the stitching function: the image below indicates how the results are shown:
Validation of results:
Click on View result to open the Stitching result page with various diagrams that let you assess the
stitching results.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Reliability indicates the optimised value for each

stitching line.
The system checks that each value is above the
Min reliability threshold. If not, you can either
lower the Min reliability threshold or adjust the
profile parameters.
• Motion step shows the step between each

stitching line with optimised Reliability.
See whether you need to adjust the Nominal
step parameter in the profile.
Check that the Max step error is correct by
making sure that the values are all within the set
range. If not, increase the Max step error.
• Orthogonal error
Check the Max orthogonal error by making sure
that all the errors shown in the graph are within
the set range. If not, increase the Max
orthogonal error.
To change the profile parameters:

- exit the Stitching result page (press OK),
- press Edit and enter the changes in the Exam type page.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Finding the correct values for the profile parameters
You need to check the profile using a few dedicated functions and a stitched image.
Press More >> in the Exam type page:
The full Exam type has 2 new windows:
• Images showing 2 consecutive images (1st and 2nd in the run by default) and highlighting
both the Image valid region and the Used overlap region.
You can increase/decrease the size of these (Zoom factor 11:1 - 1:11).
• Chessboard showing the part of the 2 images used to create the Used overlap region, plus
chessboard option.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Show chessboard click to get a chessboard view: the image consists of small squares
containing elements taken from the 2 images shown in the Images
window (alternating order).
The size of the squares is set using Square size (accepted range: 5 -
100 pixels).
Start with upper frame / Start with lower frame:

this lets you decide from which image you want the elements in each of
the squares in chessboard mode.
Zoom to fit check to view the Used overlap region image at the max zoom factor
that fits the frame; if not checked, you can use the Zoom factor at will
(accepted range: 11:1 - 1:11).
Ortho move to move the image at right-angles to the scanning movement, i.e. RH/LH
on the screen (accepted range: -100 - 100 pixels).
Change the values to find the best profile parameter settings. Bear in mind that:
- All changes to the parameters are automatically shown in the images
- When using Show chessboard:

- the best Nominal step is that which creates the smallest gaps between adjacent squares,
- the best way to assess these gaps is to move the cursor over Square size (to check the gaps
for squares of different sizes) and alternating Start with upper frame and Start with lower
frame
- If the area to be stitched is full of detail, we recommend using the most appropriate Zoom factor.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
7.11 INTEGRATION WITH AUTOMATIC INJECTOR
The system supplies a signal for synchronising the start of the injector with the X-ray emission
sequence. The injector can be started up to 30 seconds before (advance) or after (delay) the start of
image acquisition.
The injector start must, in any case, be activated via a device outside the system, using the
commands and safety devices on the injector itself: the injector must stop regardless of the signal
provided by the system as soon as you release the external manual command or the safety devices
trip (or fail).
This function is only enabled in exam cards with the ANGIO function enabled. You must have the
injector key in order to enable an exam card for the ANGIO function.
If the injector is programmed for the selected exam:

- output SEL_INJ is used, letting the X-ray generator manage the X-ray consensus signals.
- following an acquisition request, outputs SYNC_INJ are generated (see note); these may call for the
injector to be started up to 30 s before (advance) or after (delay) the start of image acquisition
(READY_ACQ_RAD/HCF signal active), depending on the programming.
The SYNC_INJ outputs continue to be active until you release the image acquisition command.
Note: Alternatively you can use:

- output SYNC_INJ on CM6-21,
- or free contacts SYCN_INJ-1 on CM11-1 and 2.
CM6 Name Description

-Pin
Inputs
22 STEP N.U.
3 SEL_INJ Injector setting signal
21 SYNC_INJ Timing signal for injector start
CM11 Name Description

-Pin
Inputs
1 SINC_INJ_1 (contact NOa) Timing signal for injector start (normally open relay contact)
2 SINC_INJ_1 (contact NOb) Timing signal for injector start (normally open relay contact)

TECHNICAL MANUAL
FLUORO/HCF CM6 HIRIS RF43

FOOT SWITCH +24V
REQ_FL/HCF 11
PREP_RAD 30
PREP_RAD REQ_RAD 12
COM_REQ 31
RAD
ZOOM
ZOOM 1 (30x30) 34
ZOOM 2 (20x20) 16
SEL_FLAT_PANEL 1 17
SEL_FLAT_PANEL 2 13
0V1 ACC. 15
0V ACC. 10
+V ACC. 29
+24V
SEL_INJ. 3
SEL_INJ.
SYNC_INJ. 21
SYNC_INJ.
23
CM11
SYNC_INJ_1 1
SYNC_INJ_1
SYNC_INJ_1 2
SYNC_INJ_1
INTERFACE

TECHNICAL MANUAL
Part 3 : ACCEPTANCE TESTS
LIST OF CONTENTS
page rev. date
CONTENTS C-1 B 30/08/13
1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS 1.1 to 1.5 B 30/08/13

1.1 Introduction
1.2 Test sheet
revision B PART 3 page C - 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S3 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 ACCEPTANCE TEST
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The acceptance test is basically a series of controls/checks listed in the TEST SHEET that let you
assess the status of the system.
The test must be carried out during acceptance of the system, after its installation. It's also used as a
checklist during routine maintenance and after extraordinary maintenance.
The system integrator is responsible for filling in the acceptance test sheet after installation.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.2 TEST SHEET
The individual controls/checks are identified by an alphanumeric code.
Code Operation Result
Cable and connectors check:

Check each cable and connector for any signs of crushing or damage
Cables outside the cabinet:

TS1 System power cable
TS2 Detector power cable
TS3 PID/Detector connection cables and connectors (optic fibre /data interface)
TS4 Ion chamber/Main Controller connection cables and connectors
TS5 Dose Area Meter connection cable and connectors
TS6 Monitor power cables and connectors
TS7 Monitor screen cables and connectors
TS8 Cabinet/keyboard/ mouse connection cables and connectors
TS9 X-ray generator connection cable and connectors
TS10 Accessory connection cable and connectors
TS11 DICOM network connection cable and connectors
TS12 CD rewriter or extractable disk (optional) cable and connectors
Cables inside the cabinet:

TS13 Video processor PID power cable and connector
TS14 Detector PU power cable and connector
TS15 Main Controller power cable and connector
TS16 PID/Main Controller connection cable and connector
TS18 PID/ PU RF4343 connection cable and connector
Additional cables for system with two detectors

TS19 Access Point WI FI cable and connector
TS20 Switch Ethernet POE cable and connector
TS21 Tether box cable and connector (optional – only for wireless DRX1 detector)
TS22 Battery charge power supply cable and connector
Mechanical checks:
- Fixing of the main components: look for loose screws (cabinet, detector unit).
- Safety of the protection devices for the main components: look for signs of damage or dents that
may affect the efficiency and safety of the equipment.
TS21 Cabinet safety

TS22 Monitor safety
TS23 Fixing of the detector unit to its support
TS24 Fixing of the Dose Area Meter

code 87 80 014C - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Basic electrical checks:
Switch the equipment off using the 2 on/off switches on the panel in the control room: acquisition
system power ON/OFF and detector power ON/OFF (see para. 3.3.4 in Part 2 above).
Open the cabinet.
TS31 Check the general state of the boards and cabinet components (look for dirt and corrosion).
TS32 Check the impedence value between the earth terminal protecting power unit GP1 (inside
the cabinet) and the earth screw on the detector (we recommend checking this by first
detaching detector power supply connector).
- Impedence must be less than 0.1 ohm -
Close the cabinet.
TS33 Check the mains rating.

Switch the equipment on.
TS34 Check that the video processor fan is working properly and that the ventilation holes are not
blocked.
TS35 Check that the PU module fan is working properly and that the ventilation holes are not
blocked.
TS36 Check that the monitors are working properly.
Wait for the HIRIS RF43 application to open and then open a new exam.
Select an exam card, insert a suitable phantom and give an exposure command.
TS37 Check that the image is shown correctly

TS38 Use at least one “Processing” command and check that this works correctly.
System quality checks:

Below are the various operations needed to assess the state of the system.
See the "Installation" and "Maintenance" parts of this manual for details of what to do in the
event of an anomaly.
TS41 Detector calibration
Procedure: - for PIXIUM RF4343 see chapter 5 in Part 2 of this manual

- for Wireless DRX1 detector see chapter 3 in Part 6 of this manual
- for Wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ detector see chapter 3 in Part 7 of this
manual
Checks for radiography mode:
TS42 X-ray dose in the air intensity (automatic exposure meter control)
Reference values: There are no set reference values.

ATS adopts values within 0.5 - 5 µGy/image.
Procedure: Carry out this check at both 0.5 and 5 µGy using the ion chamber
calibration procedure explained in para. 5.2 of Part 5 of this
manual.
The measurement is taken at the leading edge of the detector.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TS43 Automatic exposure control precision and constancy
Reference values: ATS has adopted CEI EN 60601-2-7, para. 50.102.1-b, using the
video levels of the image (with phantoms of different thicknesses)
to measure the results in 3 different situations:
1. changes in the thickness of the phantoms
2. changes in the Kv.
3. repeating exposure at the same conditions of exposure.
Procedure 1: - Set 70 kV and 100 mA.

- Position the first phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 10 mm thick)
and give the X-ray command; use the Image Statistic menu (see
Annex 5.1 in Part 5 of this manual) to find the grey level at the
centre of the image.
- Position the second phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 21 mm
thick) and give the X-ray command again; find the grey level at
the centre of the image.
- Make sure that changes in the mean grey level of the images do
not exceed 20%.
Procedure 2: - Position the phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 21 mm thick).

- Set 60 kV, give the X-ray command and then use the Image
Statistic menu to find the grey level in the centre of the image.
- Repeat, setting 80 kV.
- Repeat, setting 120 kV.
- Make sure that changes in the mean grey level of the images do
not exceed 15%.
Procedure 3: - Position the phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 21 mm thick).

- Set 70 kV and 100 mA, give the X-ray command and then use
the Image Statistic menu to find the grey level in the centre of
the image.
- Repeat 3 more times under the same conditions.
- Make sure that changes in the mean grey level of the images
do not exceed 10%.
TS44 Spatial resolution
Reference values: ATS adopts the "FUNK 18" resolution test phantom: make sure
that the test results are close to those in the Test Report attached
to the system.
Procedure: - Phantom at 45° to the centre of the detector field

- Give the radiography command and set the kV to get the best
image.
- Find and set the max image resolution on the monitor.
- Repeat, placing the phantom near each of the 4 corners of the
detector field and check the readings against the values shown
in the Test Report.
Checks for continuous fluoroscopy mode:
TS45 X-ray dose in the air intensity

ATS adopts 35 µR/s (306 nGy/s) for field 43x43 cm, 50 µR/s
(437 nGy/s) for field 30x30 cm, 75 µR/s (655 nGy/s) for field
20x20 cm, 100 µR/s (874 nGy/s) for field 15x15 cm at 70 kV .
Procedure: Measure the working dose as explained in the procedure in para.

5.4 of Part 5.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Reference values: ATS adopts the "FUNK 18" resolution test phantom: make sure
to the system.
Procedure: - Phantom at 45° to the centre of the detector field, field 43x43
cm
- Give the continuous fluoroscopy command and set the kV to get
the best image.
- Find the max image resolution on the monitor and then compare
this value with that shown on the system Test Report.
- Repeat for fields 30x30 cm, 20x20 cm and 15x15 cm.
Checks for pulsed HCF fluoroscopy mode (only for PIXIUM RF43 detector):
TS47 X-ray dose in the air intensity

ATS adopts 4 µR/frame (35 nGy/frame) for field 43x43 cm and 6
µR/frame (52.4 nGy/frame) for fields 30x30 cm, 20x20 cm and
15x15 cm cm at 70 kV
Procedure: Measure the working dose as explained in the procedure in para.

5.4 of Part 5.
Reference values: ATS adopts the "FUNK 18" resolution test) phantom: make sure
to the system.
Procedure: - Phantom at 45° on the centre of the detector field, field 43x43
cm
- Give the pulsed fluoroscopy command and set the kV to get the
best image.
- Find the max image resolution on the monitor and then compare
this value with that shown on the system Test Report.
- Repeat for fields 30x30 cm, 20x20 cm and 15x15 cm
Saving the setup:

(to be done after changing the calibration and system setup parameters)
TS51 Update the recovery hard disk

(Procedure: see para. 5.7 in Part 5)
TS52 Create the back-up CD/DVD
(Procedure: see para. 5.8 in Part 5)
Make a few blank copies of the test sheet attached to this manual (“loose pages”).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S3 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Part 4 : ADJUSTMENTS
LIST OF CONTENTS
page rev. date
CONTENTS C-1 0 03/05/11
1 ADJUSTMENTS 1.1 0 03/05/11

1.1 Warnings
revision 0 PART 4 page C - 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S4 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 ADJUSTMENTS
1.1 WARNINGS
All the envisaged adjustments have been described in Part 2 of this manual, as these are absolutely
necessary during installation.
See Part 2, “INSTALLATION” for details.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S4 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Part 5 : MAINTENANCE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Page rev. date
CONTENTS C-1 to C-2 I 03/12/14
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 1.1 to 1.2 0 03/05/11

1.1 General checks and inspections
1.2 Cleaning and disinfecting
2. EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE 2.1 to 2.46 E 03/12/14

2.1 Replacing the system hard disk with the back-up hard
disk
2.2 Restoring the video processor system hard disk
2.3 BIOS restore of the video processor CPU
2.3.1 PID version: up to series 5XX
2.3.2 PID version: series 3XX
2.4 Replacing the detector fans
2.4.1 Replacing the PID and PU module fans
2.5 Software and hardware upgrading
2.5.1 Updating the PU RF4343 software
2.5.2 Upgrading the PID RF43 processor video
software
2.5.3 Upgrading the main controller software
2.5.4 Upgrading the video processor hic board
firmware
2.6 Manual updates
2.7 Replacing the PU rf4343 processor
2.7.1 Replacing rack pu rf4343
2.7.2 Preliminary pu setup
2.7.3 PID video processor operations
2.8 Restoring the PIXIUM RF4343 detector calibration
2.9 Reference monitor setup
2.10 Ripristino dati di configurazione del main controller
3. SPARE-PARTS 3.1 to 3.3 F 03/12/14

3.1 Spare-parts list
4. SCRAPPING 4.1 0 03/05/11

4.1 Procedures and precautions
5. ANNEXES 5.1 to 5.48 F 30/08/13

5.1 Image statistics
revision I PART 5 page I - 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.1.1 Profiles
5.1.2 Histograms
5.1.3 Statistics
5.1.4 Save to file
5.2 Calibrating the AEC measuring chamber
5.2.1 AEC chamber calibration with RF detector
5.2.1.1 KV compensation
5.2.2 AEC chamber calibration with WIRELESS detector
5.2.2.1 KV compensation
5.2.3 Preliminary Claymount AEC settings
5.2.3.1 Claymount 5 area AEC
5.2.3.2 Claymount 3 area AEC
5.3 Activating DAM and Dose Area Meter efficiency test
5.3.1 Activating DAM reading from Main Controller
5.3.2 DAM indication test from Main Controller
5.3.3 Dose Area Meter calibration
5.4 Adjusting the working dose of the system in
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy
5.4.1 Adjusting the working dose in continuous
fluoroscopy mode
5.4.1.1 Setting the dose clipping factor
parameter
5.4.2 Adjusting the working dose in pulsed hcf
mode
5.4.2.1 Setting the dose clipping factor
parameter
5.5 Leds on the detector
5.5.1 PIXIUM RF4343 detector unit
5.5.2 PU RF4343 image correction module
5.5.2.1 DYNAMIX board leds
5.5.2.2 ADD ON board leds
5.6 Saving images in raw format to cd
5.7 updating the back-up hard disk
5.7.1 Updating with Acronis True Image
5.8 Image archiving to CD
5.8.1 Creating a ghost disk using acronis true
image
5.9 Video processor dump information
5.10 Study recovery function
revision I PART 5 page I - 2

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1.1 GENERAL CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS
The system must be serviced at least once a year and, in any case, in accordance with local laws and
regulations: this mainly involves carrying out the Acceptance Test described in Part 3 of this manual.
This procedure includes the performance constancy check, via the checks on the precision and
constancy of the automatic exposure control.
The results must be noted in the TEST SHEET (see paragraph 1.2 of Part 3 of this manual) together
with any action taken.
In addition, the detector must also be re-calibrated on a regular basis (Gain and Detective
Map).
The detector manufacturer recommends that Gain and Defective Map calibration should be
performed every 3 – 6 months.
The calibration procedure is explained:

- in chapter 5 of Part 2 for the PIXIUM RF 4343 detector,
- in chapter 3 of Part 6 for the Wireless DRX1 detector.
- in chapter 3 of Part 7 for the Wireless PIXIUM 3543EZ detector.
WARNING
BEFORE OPENING CABINET COVER, POWER OFF THE SYSTEM USING BOTH THE ROOM
SWITCH (SYSTEM POWER LINE AND DETECTOR POWER LINE) TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCKS.
revision A PART 5 page 1.1 - 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.2 CLEANING AND DISINFECTING
Do not use cleaning products that have a high alcohol content. Do not use corrosive detergents,
abrasive products or solvents.
Use only disinfectants and sterilising products, if required, that fully comply with existing disinfection
and explosion prevention procedures.
To clean and disinfect:

- Switch the equipment off using the two ON/OFF switches in the control room: the acquisition system
power supply and the detector power supply (see paragraph 3.3.4 in Part 2).
- Make sure that no liquids infiltrate the equipment to prevent short circuits and corrosion of the
electrical and electromechanical components.
- Clean the covers with a soft slightly damp cloth (use only soap and water).
- Wait for the covers to dry completely before using the equipment again.
To clean the monitor screen:

- Always add the soapy water to the cloth first and then wipe the screen. Never apply directly to the
monitor as the water could penetrate this and damage the equipment.
- Be careful not to scratch the screen.
The equipment must not be used in presence of anaesthetics and/or inflammable disinfectants and
cleaning products .
If the use of the system needs the sterilisation of the device, this must be done by the user.
Note: - See paragraph 4.1 in Part 6 of this manual for details on how to clean the Wireless DRX1
detector (for the system fitted with two detectors)
- See paragraph 4.1 in Part 7 of this manual for details on how to clean the Wireless PIXIUM
3543EZ detector (for the system fitted with two detectors)
revision A PART 5 page 1.1 - 2

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2 EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE
Note: - See paragraph 4.2 of Part 6 of this manual for details on how to replace the components in the
Wireless DRX1 detector unit (for the system fitted with two detectors).
- See paragraph 4.2 of Part 7 of this manual for details on how to replace the components in the
Wireless PIXIUM3543EZ detector unit (for the system fitted with two detectors).
2.1 REPLACING THE SYSTEM HARD DISK WITH THE BACK-UP HARD DISK
The system is supplied with a back-up hard disk. This is an exact copy of the system hard disk.
You can thus replace the original hard disk with the back-up HD if necessary.
To replace the HD:

- Switch the equipment off and open the cabinet:
- Using an Allen wrench, undo the 4 screws A (see figure),
- Remove the side panel.
- Using wrench B, open the front panel on the processor.
- Using wrench C (fixed partly to the spare disk), release the system HD and extract this.
- Again, using wrench C, remove the back-up HD from its container and place it in the
processor. Secure with the wrench.
- Start the system and check that it works correctly.
- Close the processor panel and then fix the cabinet panel.
Note: To ensure that the back-up HD is always ready for use in an emergency, we recommend that it
is always updated to guarantee that it contains an exact copy of the system HD. Therefore, you
must copy to the back-up HD any changes to an application or the system setup after installing
the processor: see the procedure explained in paragraph 5.7.
A A A A B
revision E PART 5 page 2. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
To release the back-up hard

disk
To release the system hard

disk

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2 RESTORING THE VIDEO PROCESSOR SYSTEM HARD DISK
If you need to restore the video processor hard disk, use the backup disk (i.e. the “ghost disk”)
provided with the system.
This disk is created:
- by ATS after factory testing,
- by the installer after system setup (see paragraph 5.8 in Part 5).
The procedure for restoring the video processor system hard disk is:
1) Insert the “ghost disk” in the DVD driver on the processor (at the front of the processor rack).
2) Reboot the equipment.
3) Press Del when the video processor comes back on.
4) Use the Up / Dn keys on the keyboard to

select Advanced BIOS Features and press
Enter.
5) Use the Up / Dn key to select First Boot

Device and then press Enter.
6) Use the Up / Dn to select CD ROM and then

press Enter (First boot device: CD ROM).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7) Press F10 (Save and Exit), confirm with

Y and then press Enter.
8) The video processor reboots with the new setup and automatically loads the software needed to
restore the system hard disk (Norton Ghost or Acronis True Image)
9) Click on Acronis True Image.
10) Click on Recovery in the page that

appears.
11) Click on Next.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
12) Select the file with extension .tib saved

on the CD/DVD and then click on Next.
13) Select the hard disk system C: (Disk 1)

and then click on Next.
14) Select “No, I do not want to resize

partitions” and then click on Next.

and then click on Next.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
16) Select “Yes, I want to delete all the

partitions ...” and then click on Next.
17) Select: “No, I do not” and then click on

Next.
18) Click on Next.
19) Check that the settings shown in the

summary page are correct.
Click on Proceed to start the restore

procedure.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
20) System disk restore
The Current operation progress bar

shows you the progress of the system disk
restore.
21) The system disk restore procedure is now

complete.
22) Extract the CD/DVD and click on OK. Quit

the application.
The video processor automatically reboots with the restored system hard disk.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3 BIOS RESTORE OF THE VIDEO PROCESSOR CPU
The video processor’s CPU board BIOS can be lost if its buffer battery fails or if there are problems
with the mains supply or the system hardware.
The restore procedure is explained below.
2.3.1 PID VERSION: UP TO SERIES 5XX
1) Switch on the system and press Del to enter BIOS.
2) Use the Up / Dn keys on the keyboard

to select Load Optimized Defaults.
3) Press Y and confirm with Enter.
4) Select Standard CMOS Features and

press Enter.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5) Check that the parameters match those

shown in the figure and then press Esc.
6) Select Advanced BIOS Features and

then press Enter.


code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
8) Select Advanced Chipset Features and

then press Enter.

10) Select Integrated Peripherals and then

press Enter.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11) Select OnChip IDE Device and then press

Enter.

13) Select SuperIO Device. Check that the

parameters match those shown in the
figure and then press Esc.
14) Check that the Onboard LAN1 PXE ROM,

LAN2 PXE ROM and Watch Dog Timer
Select parameters match those shown in
the figure and then press Esc.,

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
15) Select USB Settings. Check that the

parameters match those shown in the
16) Select Power Management Setup. Check

that the parameters match those shown in
the figure and then press Esc.
17) Select PnP/PCI Configurations. Check that

the parameters match those shown in the

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
18) Select Save & Exit Setup, press Y and

confirm with Enter.
2.3.2 PID VERSION: SERIES 3XXX
1) Start the video processor and switch the system

on, keeping key Del pressed in order to enter
the BIOS SETUP UTILITY.
2) Use the Up / Dn keys on the keyboard to select

the Exit menu.
Select Load Optimal Defaults.

Then select OK in the confirmation window,
followed by Enter.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Select the Advanced menu.
4) Select IDE Configuration in the Advanced

menu and check that the parameters match
those indicated in the figure here. Then press
Esc.
5) Select Floppy Configuration in the Advanced

Esc.
6) Select SuperIO Configuration in the

Advanced menu and check that the
parameters match those indicated in the figure
here. Then press Esc.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7) Select Hardware Health Configuration in the

8) Select Power Configuration in the Advanced

menu.
9) Select ACPI Configuration and check that the

10) Select APM Configuration and check that

the parameters match those indicated in the
figure here. Then press Esc twice.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11) Select Remote Access Configuration in the

parameters match those indicated in the
figure here. Then press Esc.
12) Select USB Configuration in the Advanced

Esc.
13) Select the PCIPnP menu and check that the

parameters match those indicated in the two
figures here. Then press Esc.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
14) Select the Boot menu.
15) Select Boot Settings Configuration in the

Boot menu and check that the parameters
match those indicated in the figure here.
Then press Esc.
16) Select Boot Device Priority in the Boot

Esc.
17) Select Hard Disk Drives in the Boot menu

and check that the parameters match those
indicated in the figure here. Then press Esc.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
18) Select CD/DVD Drives in the Boot menu and

check that the parameters match those
19) Select the Chipset menu.
20) Select North Bridge Configuration in the

Chipset menu and check that the parameters
match those indicated in the figure here. Then
select Video Function Configuration.


code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
22) Select South Bridge Configuration in the

Chipset menu and check that the parameters
match those indicated in the figure here. Then
press Esc.
23) Select the Exit menu.
Select Save Changes and Exit.

Select OK in the confirmation window and
then press Enter.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.4 REPLACING THE PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR FANS
The detector contains fans that are maintenance-free.

Follow the instructions below should they malfunction and so need to be replaced:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.4.1 REPLACING THE PID AND PU MODULE FANS
The PID and PU processors contain fans that are maintenance-free, but which should be replaced
every 3-4 years as a precaution.
The detector processor module (PU RF4343) also contains a maintenance-free fan. To ensure against
the risk of a malfunction (less than 1% over 10 years), we recommend changing this every 2-5 years.
To replace this:
- Switch the equipment off and then open the cabinet:
o undo the 4 screws A using an Allen wrench (see figure)
o remove the side panel
- The PID can now be accessed directly, while to access the PU you also need to:
o extract the PU module rack
o remove the detector power unit
- Open the doors fixing the fans (each has 2 screws)
- Replace the fans
- Remount all the above components in the reverse order

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
A A A A

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.5 SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE UPGRADING
This chapter describes how to upgrade the following components:

- Process unit of detector PU RF4343,
- Video processor PID RF43,
- PU RF4343,
- Main Controller
- HIC-03 board.
2.5.1 UPGRADING THE PU RF4343 SOFTWARE
The upgrade software is provided on a CD by ATS.
To upgrade the PU SW:
1) Switch on the system.
2) Access the PID as Administrator: username Admin2, password ats_PED.24 (see paragraph 7.3
in Part 2).
3) Insert the CD in the PID driver.
4) Create the folder “C:\Install” on the disk of the PID RF43
5) Copy the PU SW upgrade directory (“THALES TEST TOOL VERSIONE X.X.X.X”) on the CD on
the PID HD “C:\Install”.
6) Run the Thales Test Tools application already on the PID.
7) Enter the PU IP address: “192.168.0.2” in the box shown in the figure below and click on Open.
Note: If the system is fitted with two detectors and THALES SW with release less than 2.3.4.0 , you
will need to set the PU host name: 10.0.1.2 (see paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 6).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
8) Connect to the PU by clicking on “Mode Operation”.
9) Unload any active Logical Mode: to do this, access the Logical Mode list in the “Logical mode in
the Dynamix board” window and select the active mode (with (A) next to it) and then click on
Unset Active.
10) Click on “Setup” and then Download Item.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11) Select Upgrade software in the “Type of file to transfer” list.
12) Click on Select Folder and select the following directory:
“C:\Install \THALES TEST TOOL VERSIONE X.X.X.X\ software\ upgrade PU“
Then click on OK.
13) The PU is now automatically upgraded (this may last 10-15 minutes).
The system will not respond during this process.
Note: Do not switch off or reset the PID or the PU until the upgrade has been completed.
14) If the upgrade has been completed successfully, the File Transfer window closes.
Now click on Close to close the application.
The PU is now fully upgraded.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.5.2 UPGRADING THE PIDRF43 SOFTWARE
The PID RF43 has the following software:

- Thales Test Tool Customer Software
- HIRIS RF43 and Dicom Kit
- SD4343
- DGViewer.
To upgrade the SW, copy the upgrade SW from the CD to the installation directory:
- CD_HirisRF43_X.X.X
- SD4343 ver X.X.X.X
- DGVIEWER
in directory “C:\ Install \UPGRADE PID“. Then follow the steps below:
• THALES TEST TOOL CUSTOMER SOFTWARE:
1) Access the PID directory C:\ Install\ THALES TEST TOOL VERSIONE X.X.X.X\ software”
and run RF4343 Customer Software Setup.
2) Click on Next (2 times) and make sure that the installation path is:
“C:\ Program Files\ THALES ELECTRON DEVICES\ RF4343”,
Confirm by clicking on Next, then click on Install and finally on Finish.
The THALES TEST TOOL Customer software is now fully upgraded.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• HIRIS RF43 AND DICOM KIT:
To upgrade the software you first need to remove the previous version on the PID. To do this:
1) Access the WINDOWS Control Panel, select Add/Remove Programs and remove the HIRIS
Rf43 and DICOM Kit software.
2) Access the following directory:

“C:\ Install\ UPGRADE PID\ CD_ X.X.X\ HirisRF43\
and launch the X.X.X_Setup.exe application.

“C:\ Install\ UPGRADE PID\ CD_ X.X.X\ DicomKitST\”
and launch the DicomKit_Setup.exe application.
4) Launch the application and then open the Option  General Setup menu (only when the archive
is closed) and set the PU Service Data parameters as shown in the figure below:
See paragraph 2.4.2. above for details on how to set the general setup parameters correctly
Note: - if the system has two detectors (with a DRX1 wireless detector), see also paragraph 2.3.2 in
Part 6 of this manual for details of the correct setup for the General Setup parameters.
- if the system has two detectors (with a PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector), see also
paragraph 2.3.2 in Part 7 of this manual for details of the correct setup for the General Setup
parameters.
The HIRIS RF43 and DICOM KIT SW are now updated.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
INSTALLING THE USB HARDWARE KEY DRIVER:
You need to follow the procedure below to install a USB hardware key on a PIDRF43 with a parallel
hardware key:
● Switch the system on and log in as the system Administrator.
● Copy the \Smartkey2003 folder on the CDROM or USB provided or downloaded via FTP into
this folder:
C:\INSTALL
● Access the folder C:\Install\SmartKey2003\Install\ and run the SDI.exe application.
● Click on the “Install” button in the USB panel.
You are now asked to insert the USB hardware key. Insert and then select “OK".

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• SD4343:
To upgrade the SD4343 software, you first need to remove the previous version on the PID. To do
this:
1) Access the WINDOWS Control Panel, select Add/Remove Programs and remove the SD4343
software.

“C:\ Install\ UPGRADE PID\ SD4343 ver X.X.X.X”
and launch the Setup-SD4343-Rel X.X.X.X.exe application.
3) Copy file ATS_PU4343_0X.pcf from directory:

“C:\ Install\ UPGRADE PID\ SD4343 ver X.X.X.X“
to directory: “C:\ Program Files\ SD4343\”.
4) Launch the SD4343 application and use

the Options menu to check that the
application setup is as shown in the figure
here:
If necessary, change and confirm.
Note: If the system is fitted with two

detectors and THALES SW with
release less than 2.3.4.0, you will
need to set the PU host name:
10.0.1.2 parameter
(see paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 6).
5) Click on FILE  NEW and select Online using an existing file as template.

release less than 2.3.4., you will need
to set the PU host name: 10.0.1.2
parameter (see paragraph 2.3.1 in
Part 6).
You must specify the name of the new file: ATS_PU4343_0X.pcf.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The PU setup is now updated with the new ATS settings.

6) Access Service  Maintenance  Reset and turn off and click on Hardware Reset.
The SD4343 software is now fully upgraded and the PU setup updated.
• DGVIEWER:
To upgrade the DGViewer SW (review software attached to every CD/DVD you burn):
1) Copy file DGViewer.exe from directory:

“C:\ Install\ UPGRADE PID\ DGViewer”
to directory: “C:\ DicomViewer”.
2.5.3 UPGRADING THE MAIN CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
To upgrade the Main Controller SW simply replace the EPROM on the Main Controller CPU with the
new one:
CPU board
EPROM

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.5.4 UPGRADING THE VIDEO PROCESSOR HIC BOARD FIRMWARE
To upgrade the HIC-04 board firmware, simply replace integrated chip IC24 (CHANGES EPC1441):
Board HIC-04
IC24

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.6 MANUAL UPDATES
If the manuals are updated after installation of the system, any obsolete parts need to be replaced.
The manuals to be installed are supplied on CD.
To install them:
- Insert the CD in the PID driver.
- Find the obsolete manuals in directory: C:\Program files\Digitec\HirisRf43\Manuals
- Rename the obsolete manuals (e.g. by adding “old” to their name) if you wish to keep them.
Copy the new manuals to the same directory and save them with the same names as before:
operatormanual.pdf user manual,

technicalmanual.pdf technical manual.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.7 REPLACING THE PU RF4343 PROCESSOR
This chapter explains how to replace the PU RF4343 processor and provides instructions for its setup.
2.7.1 REPLACING RACK PU RF4343
CAUTION: LIVE PARTS! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCKS. BEFORE OPENING THE

CABINET PANELS, SWITCH THE EQUIPMENT OFF USING THE TWO POWER
SWITCHES ON THE ELECTRICAL CABINET IN THE RADIOLOGY ROOM (ACQUISITION
POWER UNIT AND DETECTOR POWER UNIT).
To replace rack PU4343:
- Remove the 2 side panels on the electrical cabinet after undoing the screws.
- Undo the 4 screws fixing the plate supporting the PU rack and the detector power unit to the
shelf.
- Disconnect all the cables on the PU rack and detector power unit, slide the plate supporting these
out and extract from the cabinet.
- Remove the PU rack from the plate and replace with the new one.
- Return the plate to the cabinet and secure with the 4 screws removed previously.
- Reconnect the cables on the PU rack and detector (see paragraph 3.2 in Part 2 of this manual for
details).
- Turn the PU ON/OFF switch to ON (“I”).
- Connect a monitor with VGA input, a PS2 mouse and a PS2 keyboard to the PU in order to carry
out the setup (if not available, you can “borrow” those connected to the PID video processor for
this purpose).
2.7.2 PRELIMINARY PU SETUP
1) To set the PU processor up correctly, you need to create a new user:
- Switch the cabinet on and make sure that the PU is on (if it does not start automatically, press
the Power ON button above the rack fan).
- Keep the Del key on the keyboard pressed during the PU startup to enter the Bios Setup
(if asked, enter: KAvftwba).
- Select the Advanced Chipset Control option in the Advanced tab and set Legacy USB
support: Enabled.
- Select the Exit saving changes in the Exit tab and confirm with Yes.
- Wait for the processor to restart automatically and then log in (a Login window appears on the
monitor) as follows:
user: Admin password: P77P8CqAam
- Select Start / Settings / Control Panel / User Accounts in the Windows XP task-bar.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Select Create a new account in the page that now appears:
- Enter the account name (Admin2) and type (Computer Administrator) and then press
Create Account.
- Add the password by selecting Create a password:
- Enter the password twice (ats_PED.24) and then press Create Password:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2) You can now log in using this new user and perform the following operations:
- Select Start / Shut Down in the Windows task-bar and then Log Off Admin.
- Enter User name: Admin2 and Password: ats_PED.24. Then press OK.
- Open Windows Explorer, take the mouse pointer to disk D and then right-click to select the
Sharing and Security option.
- Select the New Share command in

the window that now appears:
- Enter a share name for the disk (e.g.: Disk

D) and then click on Permissions...
- Select Allow / Full Control as the share

disk control type. Press Apply and then OK.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- From panel Data (D:) Properties :

Select the share name created earlier in the
table Share this folder. Press
Apply and then OK.
3) Open the folder: “D:\Program Files\Thales Electron Device\RF4343\Configuration Files\” and

follow these steps:
- access the file modedefinition.ini,

- check that the following parameters are set in line 147 (or thereabouts):
[ModeACPP17]
Windowing = No
DRZ = 0
BinVert = 1
BinHor = 1
Binning2x3to3x3 = No
BackLight = No
ResetLight = Yes
ResetLightDiv = 9
Mode = 1
Gain = 7
PolyGain = No
BigMode = Yes
Refresh = 0.125
- if not, edit the parameters as shown above and then save the file,
- close the file.
4) Select Start / Settings / Network Connections in the Windows task-bar and check that the set
IP ADDRESS for the network connection is 192.168.0.2 .
Note: If the system is fitted with two detectors and THALES SW with release less than 2.3.4.0 ,
you will need to set the PU host name: 10.0.1.2 parameter (see paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 6).
5) Select Start / Shut Down in the Windows task-bar and then select Restart to reboot the PU
processor.
6) Once the PU processor is running, disconnect the mouse, keyboard and VGA monitor cable (and
return to the PID if “borrowed” from this).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.7.3 PID VIDEO PROCESSOR OPERATIONS
1) Close the application and reboot the system as Administrator (see paragraph 7.3 in Part 2 of this
manual) by entering: User name: Admin2 Password: ats_PED.24
2) Run the Thales Test Tools program and then:
- Enter the PU’s IP address: “192.168.0.2” in the box shown in the figure below and then click
on Open.
Note: If the system is fitted with two detectors and THALES SW with release less than 2.3.4.0 ,
you will need to set the PU host name: 10.0.1.2 parameter (see paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 6).
- Once connection is made with

the PU, click on AcppBox
Settings and set the
parameters as shown here:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Open the Diagnostic TAB (wait

a few seconds) and check that
the PU software releases are
those shown here.
If not, you need to upgrade the

PU software (see paragraph
2.5.1 above).
Diagnostic Panel with PU & DETECTOR version F3

The Part Number and the Date Code are the same for
both the PixBoard and the Detector.
- Return to the main Setup TAB and click on Apply and then Close to break the PID/PU
connection.
- Close the application.
3) Run the SD4343 program and then:
- Open the Options menu.
- Check that the settings are as

shown in the figure here and then
click on OK.
If not, set the parameters
indicated.

release less than 2.3.4.0, you
will need to set the PU host
name: 10.0.1.2 parameter (see
paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 6).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Open the File menu and select New.
- Check that the PU’s IP Address in the

page that now appears is 192.168.0.2
(enter manually if necessary).
Note: If the system is fitted with two detectors

and THALES SW with release less than
2.3.4.0, you will need to set the IP
address: 10.0.1.2 parameter (see
paragraph 2.3.1 in Part 6).
- Select Online using an existing file as

template
- Select as the setup Template file:

C:\ProgramFiles\SD4343\ATS_PU4343_
02.pcf and confirm with “OK”.
- Connection is now made between the PU and the PID video processor. A new page appears:
select the Configuration tab in the right-hand list and make sure that the settings match those
shown below:
4) The PU is correctly setup. You can now:
- restore the previous detector calibration (see paragraph 2.8 below);
- or recalibrate the detector (see chapter 5 in Part 2 of this manual).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.8 RESTORING THE PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR CALIBRATION
To restore the correct detector setup and the parameters of all calibrations previously saved in the
system memory, use the following function in the SD4343 software:
- DOWNLOAD to transfer to the detector the calibration saved on the PID
1) Launch the SD4343 application.
2) Establish connection with the PU and deactivate any active logical mode (see paragraphs 5.2 and
5.5 in Part 2)
3) Open the Service  Maintenance  Download menu
4) Find the directory of the files you want to transfer in the Source Folder; the directory was defined
during the previous Upload, normally:
C:\Backup PU4343\Upload 4343
5) Click on Whole Configuration to transfer the full detector calibration.
6) Transfer will take about 30s; a message appears in the Status area once transfer has been
completed successfully.
7) Carry out the PU Hardware Reset procedure (see paragraph 5.9.2 in Part 2) and then close the
application.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.9 REFERENCE MONITOR SETUP
The procedure described here should be followed when installing an optional Reference Monitor or if
the system setup data is lost in the case of multiple display (working monitor and reference monitor).
If a reference monitor is used, the video processor must have the following monitor setup:
Multiple Displays > Extended Desktop
Follow the procedure described below to activate this setup:
- Close the image acquisition application and switch off the device.
- Switch the device back on.
Important: both monitors must be connected to the video processor when you reboot
the system.
- Access the system as Administrator (WINDOWS LOGIN):
User: Admin2
Password: ats_PED.24
- Press START in the Windows tool bar and select:

Settings >Control Panel > Intel(R) GMA Driver.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Check that the 2 monitors are correctly set up using the Multiple Displays menu, as shown in
the figure below:
Note: “Primary Display” identifies the WORKING MONITOR connected to the VGA port, while
“Second Display” identifies the REFERENCE MONITOR connected to the DVI port via a
DVI/VGA video adapter.
- Press Apply.
- Select the General Settings menu and check that both the monitors (Monitor and Digital
Display) are correctly set up, as shown in the figure below:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Press Apply again and then OK.

- Open the application and check that the Dual Screen setting in the General Setup menu is
active. (see par. 4.2 - Part 2).
- Then check that the second monitor works properly.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.10 RECOVERING THE MAIN CONTROLLER SETUP DATA
There may be 3 different types of faults with the Main Controller:
1) A fault in the Main Controller CPU board.
2) A fault in the Main Controller board, but its CPU is working correctly and you can still access
the Main Controller setup data via the HIRIS RF43 application.
3) A general fault with the Main Controller making it impossible to access the setup data.
FAULT N°1
The Main Controller CPU needs to be replaced. No setup operations are required.
FAULT N°2
Before replacing the Main Controller, you need to find and make a note of its setup data; these must
then be re-entered for the new Main Controller.
Follow the steps below to find the setup data (with reference to paragraphs 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 in the
Annexes to this Part of the manual):
• With the patient archive closed, select:

OPTION  SETUP  GENERAL SETUP  MAIN CONTROLLER RAD SETUP
and make a note of the parameters and selected options:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Create a new study, select exam “99 TEST- 11 Dose Adj. Exam” and then select the M.C. RAD
SETUP menu and load the Logical Mode using the Start Calibration key. Make a note of the
parameters and selected options:
• Select the M.C. FLUORO SETUP menu and make a note of the parameters and selected options
for all the Logical Modes in fluoroscopy mode: 43x43, 30x30, 20x20 and 15x15.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Select the M.C. PULSE SETUP menu and make a note of the parameters and selected options for
all the Logical Modes in pulsed fluoroscopy mode: 43x43, 30x30, 20x20 and 15x15.
You can now replace the Main Controller board and re-set the parameters and options in the same
menus above.
FAULT N°3
Follow the steps below if there is a general fault in the Main Controller making it impossible to recover
the setup data via the HIRIS RF43 application:
• Remove component IC1 containing the setup parameters from the faulty Main Controller board
(EEPROM 93cX6 positioned under board CPU, as shown in the figure below):
• Fit component IC1 on the new Main Controller board (replacing the existing one). It is important
that the HIRIS RF43 MC software for the new Main Controller has the same SW release as the
previous one.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3 SPARE-PARTS
3.1 SPARE-PART LIST
N° DESCRIPTION CODE NOTES
1 PIXIUM RF4343 Detector :

1a PIXIUM RF4343 F2 detector unit DT 87 101
1b PU RF4343 F2 processor unit DT 87 201
2a PIXIUM RF4343 F3 detector unit DT 87 106
2b PU RF4343 F3 processor unit DT 87 202
- optical fiber cable 20m DT 87 301
- connection cable PU/detector 20m DT 87 302
2 Detector supply unit : 87 01 200
- transformer 87 01 110
- RFPS board 87 01 100
- stabilizer 87 01 250
3 Ion Chamber MEDYS 2252611-20 CAMERA002
Ion Chamber CLAYMOUNT SSMC601 CM 30 000 preamplifier
included
4 General power unit: 87 01 300
- Insulating Transformer 17 10 120
- ASPS board 17 10 110A
- 21V AC board 70 01 070
- rele’ mod.HE2ANS/24 RELJH2AS-NIL
- thermostat 339-308 TERMOSTATO01
5 PIDRF43 Video processor: SD 87 002
- CPU Quad Core COMMEL FS97D board (sn 400 and 500) SD 87 121
- CPU Quad Core IEI WSB G41A Rev10 board (sn 2000) SD 87 125
- CPU Quad Core IEI WSB G41A Rev11 board (sn 3000) SD 87 128
- power supply ACE 4840APM-RS SD 87 102
- HIC-04 board SD 87 120
- MATRIX GAMMA board SD 87 105
- 250 GB SATA2 archive Hard disk SD 87 127
- 320 GB SATA2 archive Hard disk SD 87 111
- 500GB SATA2 archive Hard disk SD 87 123
- 1TB SATA2 archive Hard disk SD 85 101
- 2TB SATA2 archive Hard disk SD 87 126
- DVI VGA + CAVO DVI-DVI converter SD 49 101
6 Main Controller module: 87 01 400
- Main Controller board 87 01 410A
- RS-232 board 34 04 100
- Transformer 70 01 050B
- 5x20 630mAT 213 Litle fuse FUS213/630mAT
Options:
- 3 AREAS ICI board 70 01 110
- 5 AREAS ICI board 87 01 270
- RDAM board 70 01 320
- IRRuC board 70 01 080
7 RGBC 01 board 70 01 410
8 Screen-printer switch 16 30 027
9 19” LCD colour monitor: Tecnint mod.EM19TFTI/MCIIL-C1 MO 19 006
19” monochrome monitor: Invicta IVL-GEV955IMI FPM1152 MO 19 004
19” LCD colour monitor: Invicta IVL-GEV955IMI Part.No: FPM1183 MO 19 007
table support monitor MO 19 201
10 Dose Area Meter mod.120-121C DAMW03
Dose Area Meter mod. 120-131OEM HS DS 87 001
revision F PART 5 page 3. 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11 thermo magnetic 10A mod. SIEMENS 5SY4210-8 INT. MULTI 3

12 connection cable cabinet / Ion Chamber 550 87 110
13 Alphanumeric Keyboard :
- French version mod.BT527A/ABF SD 87 113
- English version mod. BT527A/ABB SD 87 114
- Dutch version mod. BT527A/ABH SD 87 115
- German version mod. BT527A/ABD SD 87 116
- Spanish version mod. BT527A/ABE SD 87 117
- Italian version mod. BT527A/ABZ SD 87 118
- Russian version mod. BT527A/ACB SD 87 119
14 Remote control IR Kit (transmitter + receiver) 87 01 600
- Transmitter IR 87 01 610
- Receiver IR + cable 09 10 240
Note 1: When ordering spare-parts, always quote the system serial number as well as the item code.
Note 2: Contact ATS for details of those parts not included in the list.
Note3: See paragraph 4.3 in Part 6 of this manual for details about spare part list of the Wireless
DRX1 detector (for the system fitted with two detectors).
Note4: See paragraph 4.3 in Part 7 of this manual for details about spare part list of the Wireless
PIXIUM 3543EZ detector (for the system fitted with two detectors).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
9
X-ray tube
View from B 8
10
13
X-ray
7 3
Scheda RGBC 01 1a
Camera LINK board

CPU board
HIC board
5
5
6
SD 87 002
1b
View from A
FUS213/630mAT
2
RDAM board
4
6
11
A
87 01 400
ICI board 14
Transf. 7001050B
Main Controller board
RS 232 board
IRuC board Remote control Kit
RELJH2AS-NIL 21VAC board

TERMOSTATO01
6
8701110 transformer
8701250 stabilizer
RFPS board
ASPS board
trasf.17 10 120A
2 4
87 01 200 87 01 300
code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4 SCRAPPING
4.1 PROCEDURES AND PRECAUTIONS
When scrapping the device, special care must be taken when handling the following components as
these can be hazardous:
- The Flat-Panel Detector contains sparking material (Thallium-doped Caesium Iodide); it

also contains lead which must be considered as a toxic material.
- The LCD monitor contains a vacuum input screen which, should it break, can send shards
of glass flying and disperse powder and gas that may be toxic.
- The equipment contains printed circuit boards which contain a certain amount of lead: this
is a toxic material and must be treated as such.
- The batteries used must be disposed of in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC
(disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment - WEEE).
Other parts of the equipment are:

- ferrous material (frames etc.),
- plastic (guards etc.),
- wiring.
These parts are not considered to be a potential source of hazards when scrapping the device.
All parts should be disposed of in accordance with the prevailing regulations in each country
at the moment of scrapping.
This symbol is placed on the equipment to remind you that the equipment meets
the European Environmental Directives (2002/95/EC, 2002/96/EC, 2003/108/EC)
and so must be scrapped in accordance with the relevant laws for separated waste
disposal.
This equipment must not be disposed of as normal urban solid waste: it must
be taken to an expert waste disposal centre or returned to the dealer, should
you wish to replace it with a new model.
Note: The device contains recyclable elements:

- Wood (packing platform, cabinet rest surface)
- Cardboard (packing boxes)
- Metals (cabinet, rack)
- Lead (inside the detector)
- Electrical cables.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5 ANNEXES
5.1 IMAGE STATISTICS
The system allows for statistical measurement of the image.

This function is accessed from the graphic functions menu (“OVERLAY MANAGER”), in the operating
frame command area, Processing / Adv Proc.
The statistics menu has the following fields:
• Selection:
to choose the field in which you want to read the values.
You can read the values in a:
- 9x9 pixel square
- horizontal segment
- vertical segment
rectangle.
• Position on real image:

to find the x and y co-ordinates of the segment of the
selected rectangle:
- square 9x9 is the centre
- the segment is identified by the start point and the
length (see figure)
- the rectangle is identified by its opposite vertices.
These co-ordinates are shown on the monitor (screen
cursor) and on the surface of the detector (image cursor).
• Statistics:
- to measure the raw image (raw = detector acquired
levels) or the processed monitor image (equalized):
- value in centre (square 9x9 only)
- min value
- max value
- mean value
- standard deviation,
- to select the images to be shown (segments only):
- profile
- moving mean
- moving standard deviation,
- to select the reading window for the moving mean and
moving standard deviation (segments only).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.1.1 PROFILES
The profiles are displayed when you click on Profiles.

The following profile types are possible:
- Raw Profile raw image

- Filtered Profile image after application of the LUT input logarithm.
- Harm Profile image after application of ATH harmonisation
- Eql Profile image after application of LUT display on the monitor.
The figure here shows an example of the profiles for a horizontal segment.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.1.2 HISTOGRAMS
The histograms are displayed when you click on Histograms.

Like the profiles, various histograms are possible:
- Raw Profile raw image

- Filtered Profile image after application of the LUT input logarithm.
- Harm Profile image after application of ATH harmonisation
- Eql Profile image after application of LUT display on the monitor.
The figure here shows an example of the histograms for a horizontal segment.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.1.3 STATISTICS
Click on Statistics and the graphs selected in field Statistics are displayed.
The figure here shows an example for a horizontal segment.
Moving mean of “n” pixel:

the graphs are calculated
using the mean

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.1.4 SAVE TO FILE
Press Save to file to open the Save pixel values window and so save the selected statistics.
The figure here shows an example files for a rectangular segment.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.2 CALIBRATING THE AEC MEASURING CHAMBER
The system can manage up to 2 ion chambers: one for the dynamic RF43 detector and the other for a
second WIRELESS detector (optional). Below are the ion chamber calibration procedures for these
two different detectors.
5.2.1 AEC CHAMBER CALIBRATION WITH RF DETECTOR
The AEC measuring chamber is calibrated by adjusting the two dose values at the leading edge of the
detector:
- min dose 0.5 µGy

- max dose 5 µGy.
Typical measuring conditions for calibration:
- Select the workstation with the RF43 detector.

- 70 kV and 25 mA for Ref.Dose 0.5 uGy
- 70 kV and 100 mA for Ref.Dose 5 uGy
- 21 mm Al filter (equivalent to 1 mm Cu) on X-ray beam.
- Focal distance: approx. 100-130 cm.
- Dosimeter placed on leading edge of ion chamber (see figure 1 below), but without covering the
measuring areas of the chamber *.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
* Note: If the dosimeter cannot be placed on the ion chamber:
- place the dosimeter on the patient bed or detector cover (see figure 2),
- remove the grid,
- calculate the dose value on the leading edge of the detector bearing in mind the distance
between the surface of the detector and the dosimeter and the absorption factors of the
components in-between these.
Before calibration, you must check which type of measuring chamber is installed: MEDYS or
CLAYMOUNT. If a CLAYMOUNT, you need to set a few preliminary settings before calibrating this, as
described in paragraph 5.2.2. below.
• Open a new study from the main frame.

• Select “99 TEST - 11 Dose Adj. Exam”
(to be used only for calibration purposes and NOT for normal use).
• If not already entered, enter the Technical Password: “TechService” (or “985312”)
and wait for the system to complete the Offset calibration procedure for each Logical Mode.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Select normal size.
• Click on key on the toolbar and then option M.C. RAD. SETUP to open the calibration page
for the Main Controller RAD Setup:
• Select Id Log Mode 10 (RAD 3i/s) in the “Available Logical Modes” table and load by clicking on
Start Calibration. The “Dose Settings” calibration table is now enabled.
• Check min dose Ref Dose 0.5uGy.

• Give the X-ray emission command and then, at the end of emission, check the reading on the
dosimeter.
• If the reading on the dosimeter (corrected as described above) is not 0.5 µGy (±10%), change the
value of the Ref Dose 0.5µGy parameter accordingly.
• Repeat X-ray emission and adjust the parameter again until you get the best possible result.
• Now check max dose Ref Dose 5µGy.

dosimeter.
• If the reading on the dosimeter (corrected as described above) is not 5 µGy (±10%), change the
value of the Ref Dose 5µGy parameter accordingly.
• Unload the active Logical Mode by clicking on End Calibration.

• Quit the menu (Exit) to save the new parameters and close the study.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.2.1.1 KV COMPENSATION
Note: This function can only be used with an integrated X-ray generator (also via serial RS232 or CAN
protocol), i.e. capable of providing the System with details of the kV values set on the console.
Typical calibration measuring conditions:

- 21 mm Al filter (or 1 mm Cu) on X-ray tube,
- Focal distance: 100-130 cm.
1) Open a new study from the main frame.

2) Select “99 TEST - 02 TEST 70 kV Linear/2” – medium size (5uGy/image).
3) Make sure the generator is set with the following parameters: 70 kV-50 mA.
4) Give the single radiography exposure command and then use the Image Statistic menu (see
paragraph 5.1 above) to check the mean level (LSB) in a central part of the image measuring
200x200 pixels (this will then be the reference value for future calibration).
5) Set the generator at 60kV-125mA and command another exposure and then check the mean level
(LSB), again in a central part of the image measuring 200x200 pixels.
6) If the measured value differs by more than ±10% from the reference value (at 70 kV):
- Select “99 TEST - 11 Dose Adj. Exam”

- If not already entered, enter the Technical Password: “TechService” (or “ 985312”) and wait for
the system to complete the Offset calibration procedure for each Logical Mode.
- Select normal size.
- Click on key on the toolbar and then option M.C. RAD. SETUP to open the calibration page
- Select Id Log Mode 10 (RAD 3i/s) in the “Available Logical Modes” table and load by clicking on
Start Calibration. The “Ion Chamber KV Compensation” calibration table is now enabled.
- Adjust parameter kV Compensation at 60 kV to suit the deviation noted.
- Unload the active Logical Mode by clicking on End Calibration.
- Quit the menu (Exit) to save the new parameter settings.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- Re-select exam “99 TEST - 02 TEST 70 kV Linear/2” – medium size (5uGy/image).
- Set the generator at 60kV-125mA and command another exposure and then check the mean
level (LSB), again in the centre of the image.
7) If necessary, repeat the above procedure until you get the measured mean level at 70 kV (±10%).
8) Select exam “99 TEST - 02 TEST 70 kV Linear/2” – medium size (5uGy/image).
(LSB), again in the centre of the image.
10) If the measured value differs by more than ±10% from the reference value (at 70 kV), adjust
parameter kV Compensation at 120 kV following the procedure explained above.
11) Repeat the above procedure until you get the measured mean level at 70 kV (±10%).
12) Close the study.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.2.2 AEC CHAMBER CALIBRATION WITH WIRELESS DETECTOR
The AEC measuring chamber is calibrated by adjusting the two dose values at the leading edge of the
detector:
- min dose 0.5 µGy
- max dose 5 µGy.
Typical measuring conditions for calibration:
- 70 kV and 25 mA for Ref.Dose 0.5 uGy

- 70 kV and 100 mA for Ref.Dose 5 uGy
- 21 mm Al filter (equivalent to 1 mm Cu) on X-ray beam.
- Focal distance: approx. 100-130 cm.
- Dosimeter placed on leading edge of ion chamber (see figure 1 below), but without covering the
measuring areas of the chamber.*
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
* Note: If the dosimeter cannot be placed on the ion chamber:

- place the dosimeter on the patient bed or detector cover (see figure 2),
- remove the grid,
- calculate the dose value on the leading edge of the detector bearing in mind the distance
between the surface of the detector and the dosimeter and the absorption factors of the
components in-between these.
Before calibration, you must check which type of measuring chamber is installed: MEDYS or
CLAYMOUNT. If a CLAYMOUNT, you need to set a few preliminary settings before calibrating this, as
described in paragraph 5.2.3. below.
• Select the workstation with the WIRELESS detector.

• Select “199 TEST - 11 Dose Adj. Exam”
• If not already entered, enter the Technical Password: “TechService” (or “985312”).
• Click on key on the toolbar to open the calibration window for Main Controller RAD Setup:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Check min dose Ref Dose 0.5uGy.

dosimeter.
• If the reading on the dosimeter (corrected as described above) is not 0.5 µGy (±10%), change the
value of the Ref Dose 0.5µGy parameter accordingly.
• Now check max dose Ref Dose 5µGy.

dosimeter.
• If the reading on the dosimeter (corrected as described above) is not 5 µGy (±10%), change the
value of the Ref Dose 5µGy parameter accordingly.

• Quit the menu (Exit) to save the new parameters and close the study.
5.2.2.1 KV COMPENSATION
Note: This function can only be used with an integrated X-ray generator (also via serial RS232 or CAN
protocol), i.e. capable of providing the System with details of the kV values set on the console.
Typical calibration measuring conditions:

- 21 mm Al filter (or 1 mm Cu) on X-ray tube,
1) Open a new study from the main frame.

2) Select “199 TEST - 02 TEST 70 kV Linear/2” – medium size (5uGy/image).
3) Make sure the generator is set with the following parameters: 70 kV-50 mA.
4) Give the single radiography exposure command and then use the Image Statistic menu (see
paragraph 5.1 above) to check the mean level (LSB) in a central part of the image measuring
200x200 pixels (this will then be the reference value for future calibration).
(LSB), again in a central part of the image measuring 200x200 pixels.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
6) If the measured value differs by more than ±10% from the reference value (at 70 kV):
- Select “199 TEST - 11 Dose Adj. Exam”

- If not already entered, enter the Technical Password: “TechService” (or “ 985312”).
- Select normal size.
- Click on key on the toolbar to open the Main Controller RAD Setup calibration window:
- Adjust parameter kV Compensation at 60 kV to suit the deviation noted.
- Quit the menu (Exit) to save the new parameter settings.
- Re-select exam “199 TEST - 02 TEST 70 kV Linear/2” – medium size (5uGy/image).
- Set the generator at 60kV-125mA and command another exposure and then check the mean
level (LSB), again in the centre of the image.
7) If necessary, repeat the above procedure until you get the measured mean level at 70 kV (±10%).
8) Select exam “199 TEST - 02 TEST 70 kV Linear/2” – medium size (5uGy/image).
(LSB), again in the centre of the image.
10) If the measured value differs by more than ±10% from the reference value (at 70 kV), adjust
parameter kV Compensation at 120 kV following the procedure explained above.
11) Repeat the above procedure until you get the measured mean level at 70 kV (±10%).
12) Close the study.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.2.3 PRELIMINARY SETTINGS FOR CLAYMOUNT AEC CAMERA
The equipment can be supplied with two types of Claymount AEC cameras:
- Camera with 5 areas,
- Camera with 3 areas.
See paragraph 2.3.3.2 in Part 1 of this manual for details of the size of the components.
5.2.3.1 5-AREA AEC CLAYMOUNT CAMERA
The 5-area AEC consists of:

- Camera type SSMC508 - P/N: 14095
- Preamplifier type SSMC PREAMPLIFIER 1007-P/N: 14181
Access the preamplifier board by undoing the 4 screws on the cover and then set the dip-switches as
shown in the table below:
Preamp. 1007
DIP SWITCH “S1”
1 ON
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
DIP SWITCH “S2”
1 ON
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
DIP SWITCH “S3”
1 OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.2.3.2 3-AREA CLAYMOUNT AEC CAMERA
The 3-area AEC consists of:

- Camera type SSMC613 - P/N: 14062 or Camera type SSMC601 - P/N: 12835
- Preamplifier type SSMC PREAMPLIFIER 1001 (PA101)-P/N: 12860
Access the preamplifier board by undoing the 4 screws on the cover and then set the dip-switches as
shown in the table below:
Preamp. 1001
DIP SWITCH “S1”
1 OFF
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
DIP SWITCH “S2”
1 ON
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
DIP SWITCH “S3”
1 ON
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 ON
5 ON
6 ON
7 OFF
8 OFF

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.3 ACTIVATING THE DAM AND DOSE AREA METER EFFICIENCY TEST
5.3.1 ACTIVATING DAM READING FROM MAIN CONTROLLER
The activation procedure described here only applies to a Dose Area Meter connected directly to the
system.
To enable DAM reading:

• Select the “99 TEST- 11 Dose Adj. Exam” exam.
(to be used exclusively for the following calibration purposes and not for normal use).
• The system asks you to enter the technical password, if you have not already entered this:
“TechService” (or “ 985312”).
• Wait while the system completes the Offset calibration procedure for the various Logical Modes.
• Click on the button in the toolbar and then select the M.C. RAD. SETUP option to open the
calibration window for the Main Controller RAD Setup:
• Select Id Log Mode 10 (RAD 3i/s) in the “Available Logical Modes” table and load this by clicking
on Start Calibration: the “D.A.M. Settings” calibration table is enabled.
• Now click on the “Dose Area Meter Present” check box and check that the correction
percentage is 100%.
• Download the active Logical Mode by clicking on End Calibration.

• Quit the calibration window (Exit) to save the set parameter.
• Close the study.
The Main Controller can be connected to 2 types of DAM:

2
low sensitivity = 1 mGy*cm
high sensitivity = 0.1 mGy*cm2
You therefore need to check the connected DAM type selected, using dip switch on the DAM board
inside the Main Controller. There are two kinds of DAM card reading.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
- with RDAM board, as shown in the figure and photos below:
Low sensitivity DAM
High sensitivity DAM
LS HS
Position of switch SWx on board RDAM Switch set for high sensitivity DAM (HS)
- with RDAMSP board, as shown in the photo below:
Jp1 (1-2): DAM HS

Jp1 (2-3): DAM LS

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.3.2 DAM INDICATION TEST FROM MAIN CONTROLLER
Use a reference dosimeter to check the DAM efficiency and indication (mGy*cm2) on the monitor.
Measuring conditions:
- Reference dosimeter placed on the patient bed (or surface of the detector cover) and set to read
µGy values,
- Collimators open to get a radiated area of approximately 1000cm2 (33cm x33 cm) on the rest
surface of the dosimeter,
- The dosimeter must be completely within the radiated area.
Follow these steps:

• Select the “99 TEST- 02 TEST 70 kV Linear/2” exam.
• Disable all the AEC areas and set the following parameters on the X-ray generator: 70 kV - 5 mAs.
• Command a single radiography exposure and check the correspondence between the following:
2 2
- the dosimeter reading (µGy) multiplied by the value (in cm ) of the radiated area (1000 cm )
- and the “dose*area” value provided by the DAM.
Example: - radiated area: 33 x 33 ≈ 1000 cm2

- dosimeter reading: 100 µGy
- dose*area calculation: 100 µGy * 1000 cm2 = 100 mGy*cm2
- reading on the monitor: 96 mGy*cm2
• The difference between these 2 values should not be more than 20%.
If this is not the case, you need to calibrate the DAM as explained below.
5.3.3 DOSE AREA METER CALIBRATION
The calibration procedure described here is only valid for a Dose Area Meter connected directly to the
system.
• Open a new study in the main frame.
• Select “99 TEST- 11 Dose Adj. Exam”


code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• If not already entered, enter the Technical Password : “TechService” (or “ 985312”) and wait for
the system to complete the Offset calibration procedure for each Logical Mode.
• Click on key on the toolbar and then option M.C. RAD. SETUP to open the calibration page
• Select Id Log Mode 10 (RAD 3i/s) in the “Available Logical Modes” table and load by clicking on
Start Calibration. The “D.A.M. Settings” calibration table is now enabled.
• Depending on the results of the efficiency test (see previous page), adjust the Dose Area Meter
(50-150%) value to suit the deviation that needs to be corrected.
Example: - Dose Area Meter (50-150%) value = 100.
- Enter a new value x = 100 * (required value) / (value shown on monitor)
• Check the correction by giving a new single X-ray command.
• Quit the menu (Exit) to save the new parameter settings.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.4 ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM WORKING DOSE IN FLUOROSCOPY AND PULSED HCF MODES
Measuring conditions for calibration:

- 21 mm Al filter (or 1 mm Cu) on the X-ray tube,
- Dosimeter on the leading edge of the ionising chamber (see figure 1).
Note: If you cannot place the dosimeter on the camera:

- place the dosimeter on the patient bed or the cover of the detector (see figure 2),
- remove the grid,
- calculate the dose entering the detector (taking into account the distance between the
dosimeter and the surface of the detector and the absorption factor of any components
between them.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
- DC voltmeter connected to board M.CON between Tp7 and Tp6 (0V) (see figure 3) to measure the
ABC_ERROR signal sent to the X-ray generator, reflecting the levels acquired by the detector (this
should be = 0 if the X-ray dose is correct).
Tp7 Tp6
M.CON board Fig .3

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Open a new study in the main frame.

• If not already entered, enter the Technical Password : “TechService” (or 985312) and wait for the
system to complete the Offset calibration procedure for each Logical Mode.
• Click on key on the toolbar and then option M.C. FLUORO. SETUP to open the calibration
page for the Main Controller Fluoroscopy Setup:
• Select Id Log Mode 1 (continuous fluoroscopy on field 43x43) in the “Available Logical Modes”
table and load by clicking on Start Calibration.
• Without X-ray exposure, set the Offset parameter (in the “Logical Modes General Settings” table),
so that the ABC_ERROR signal (between Tp7 and Tp6) is = 0 V (the typical Offset value is about
315).
• Set the Polarity parameter (polarity of the kV correction signal) to suit the type of input foreseen by
the X-ray generator:
Polarity - (0): Polarity + (1):

ABC_ERROR
ABC_ERROR
Dose OK
Detector levels
Detector levels
Dose OK

• Quit the menu (Exit) to save the changed parameters.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.4.1 ADJUSTING THE WORKING DOSE IN CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY MODE

• If not already entered, enter the Technical Password: “TechService” (or 985312)
• Click on key on the toolbar and then option M.C. FLUORO. SETUP to open the calibration
page for the Main Controller Fluoroscopy Setup:
• Select Id Log Mode 1 (continuous fluoroscopy on field 43x43) in the “Available Logical Modes”
table and load by clicking on Start Calibration.
• Set manual continuous fluoroscopy on the X-ray generator, give the X-ray emission command and
then adjust the kV to get a dose of 35 µR/s on the dosimeter.
• Acquire an image and measure the mean level (LSB): move your pointer to the centre of the image
and read the value in the Mean field in the Pixel Statistics window:
• Enter this mean value in field Medium Dose LSB.
This setting established the working dose (Medium Dose) for the selected acquisition mode.
The mean level supplied by the detector depends on the sensitivity of the detector.
Typical value: roughly 270 LSB.
• The Low Dose working value is normally defined by a value half that of the Medium Dose.
To set this value, simply enter a value in field Low Dose LSB:
Low Dose LSB = ½ Medium Dose LSB.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• The High Dose working value is normally defined by a value twice that of the Medium Dose.
To set this value, simply enter a value in field High Dose LSB:
High Dose LSB = 2 x Medium Dose LSB.
• Set automatic continuous fluoroscopy on the generator, give the X-ray command and check that
the X-ray generator quickly reaches the dose level (kV /ma) you have set manually and stabilises
at this level.
If not, change the two Gain and Hysteresis parameters, bearing in mind that:
- Signal ABC_ERROR = 0 V as long as the actual dose stays within the values: set value ±
Hysteresis.
- The Hysteresis value is about 0.6% the set dose.

i.e., if Hysteresis = 15, signal ABC_ERROR stays as 0 until the actual dose varies by more
than 10% the set value.
- The Gain is a multiplying factor for signal ABC_ERROR.

i.e. if Gain = 2, signal ABC_ERROR will be twice the value of Gain =1, regardless of any
differences in dose.
• If correctly adjusted, close the calibration page for this acquisition mode by clicking on End
Calibration.
• Repeat the same procedure for the other two Logical Modes in continuous fluoroscopy mode:
- Id Log Mode 2 continuous fluoroscopy, field 30x30, (mean dose = 50 µR/s).

- Id Log Mode 3 continuous fluoroscopy, field 20x20, (mean dose = 75 µR/s).
- Id Log Mode 4 (if available) continuous fluoroscopy, field 15x15, (mean dose = 150 µR/s).
The table below shows the default dose settings and the typical levels to be measured:
CONTINUOUS FLUOROSCOPY
Field Working X-ray dose µR/s Detector levels

(typ.)
Low Dose 17,5 135
43x43 Medium Dose 35 270
High Dose 70 540
Low Dose 25 155

High Dose 100 620
Low Dose 37.5 130

High Dose 150 520
Low Dose 75 225

High Dose 300 900
• Once you have adjusted the working dose, set the Dose Clipping Factor parameter, as explained
in point 5.4.1.1 below.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.4.1.1 SETTING THE DOSE CLIPPING FACTOR PARAMETER
The Dose Clipping Factor parameter is used to set the max image
level needed for calculating the Vabc voltage supplied by the detector
for the automatic kV adjustment function.
If, for example, you set Dose Clipping Factor = 8, when calculating voltage Vabc, the level value will
be limited to a maximum of: dose level x 8.
e.g. If the Medium dose = 250 LSB, any levels higher than 250x8= 2000 LSB will be
considered as equal to 2000 LSB for the purposes of calculating voltage Vabc.
This setting is needed to limit the influence of over-exposed areas within an image when using the
automatic X-ray dose adjustment system.
5.4.2 ADJUSTING THE WORKING DOSE IN PULSED MODE

• If not already entered, enter the Technical Password: “TechService” (or 985312)
• Click on key on the toolbar and then option M.C. PULSE SETUP to open the calibration page
for the Main Controller Fluoroscopy Setup:
• Select Id Log Mode 5 (pulsed fluoroscopy on field 43x43) in the “Available Logical Modes” table
and load by clicking on Start Calibration.
• Select pulsed fluoroscopy in the toolbar at a rate of 15 frames/second.
• Set manual pulsed fluoroscopy on the X-ray generator, give the X-ray emission command and then
adjust the kV to get a dose of 4 µR/frame on the dosimeter.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Acquire an image and measure the mean level (LSB): move your pointer to the centre of the image
and read the value in the Mean field in the Pixel Statistics window:
• Enter this mean value in field Medium Dose LSB.
This setting established the working dose (Medium Dose) for the selected acquisition mode.
The mean level supplied by the detector depends on the sensitivity of the detector.
Typical value: roughly 560 LSB.
• The Low Dose working value is normally defined by a value half that of the Medium Dose.
To set this value, simply enter a value in field Low Dose LSB:
Low Dose LSB = ½ Medium Dose LSB.
• The High Dose working value is normally defined by a value twice that of the Medium Dose.
To set this value, simply enter a value in field High Dose LSB:
High Dose LSB = 2 x Medium Dose LSB.
• Set automatic pulsed fluoroscopy on the generator, give the X-ray command and check that the X-
ray generator quickly reaches the dose level (kV /ma) you have set manually and stabilises at this
level.
If not, change the two Gain and Hysteresis parameters, bearing in mind that:
- Signal ABC_ERROR = 0 V as long as the actual dose stays within the values: set value ±
Hysteresis.
- The Hysteresis value is about 0.6% the set dose.

i.e., if Hysteresis = 15, signal ABC_ERROR stays as 0 until the actual dose varies by more
than 10% the set value.
- The Gain is a multiplying factor for signal ABC_ERROR.

i.e. if Gain = 2, signal ABC_ERROR will be twice the value of Gain =1, regardless of any
differences in dose.
• If correctly adjusted, close the calibration page for this acquisition mode by clicking on End
Calibration.
• Repeat the same procedure for the other two Logical Modes in pulsed fluoroscopy mode:
- Id Log Mode 6 continuous fluoroscopy, field 30x30, (mean dose = 6 µR/frame).

- Id Log Mode 7 continuous fluoroscopy, field 20x20, (mean dose = 6 µR/frame).
- Id Log Mode 8 (if available) continuous fluoroscopy, field 15x15, (mean dose = 12 µR/frame).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
The table below shows the default dose settings and the typical levels to be measured:
PULSED FLUOROSCOPY
Field Working X-ray dose µR/frame Detector levels

(typ.)
Low Dose 2 300
High Dose 8 1200
Low Dose 3 300
High Dose 12 1200
Low Dose 3 300
High Dose 12 1200
Low Dose 6 300
High Dose 25 1200
• Once you have adjusted the working dose, set the Dose Clipping Factor parameter, as explained
in point 5.4.2.1 below.
5.4.2.1 SETTING THE DOSE CLIPPING FACTOR PARAMETER
The Dose Clipping Factor parameter is used to set the max

image level needed for calculating the Vabc voltage supplied by
the detector for the automatic kV adjustment function.
If, for example, you set Dose Clipping Factor = 8, when calculating voltage Vabc, the level value will
be limited to a maximum of: dose level x 8.
e.g. If the Medium dose = 250 LSB, any levels higher than 250x8= 2000 LSB will be
considered as equal to 2000 LSB for the purposes of calculating voltage Vabc.
This setting is needed to limit the influence of over-exposed areas within an image when using the
automatic X-ray dose adjustment system.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.5 LEDS ON THE DETECTOR
Note: - see paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5 in Part 6 of this manual for a description of the LEDs on the
Wireless DRX1 detector and on the WI FI Access Point (for the system fitted with two detectors)
- see paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5 in Part 7 of this manual for a description of the LEDs on the
Wireless DRX1 detector and on the WI FI Access Point (for the system fitted with two detectors)
5.5.1 PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR UNIT
The right-hand side of the detector has some 5 LEDs that indicate the power-up and efficiency of the
detector:
LED meaning
POWER This LED is connected to the power unit inside the detector and
supplies information on the detector power supply.
COM This LED comes on when the optical fibre is connected and
communication with the control rack is detected.
RDY This LED comes on when initialisation after switching-on has
been completed successfully.
FREQ This LED comes on to indicate the activation status of the
received “Acquisition request”.
XRAY This LED is switched off during activation of the “X-ray window”
that lets you enable exposure.
The LED is switched on between each “X-ray window”.
FREQ
COM POWER
XRAY
RDY

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.5.2 PU RF4343 IMAGE CORRECTION MODULE
There are two 7-segment displays on the PU module, used to provide status and acquisition
information.
• When the PU is switched, a series of bips indicated that connection has (or has not) been made with
the detector:
- if connection has failed, you hear 20 bips and then a high bip followed by a low bip,
- if connection is successful, you hear less than 10 bips and then a low bip followed by a
high bip,
- an error message appears on the 7-segment displays in any case if there is a
malfunction.
• During normal operation:

- the Frame request bar lights up when the acquisition request is active,
- the X-Ray enable bar lights up only when the “X-ray window” on the detector is active.
- an error code appears on the 7-segment display if there is a malfunction.
Table of alarms:
7 segment display Description Detector version

code
Η7
Detector not available F3
 Detector setup error F3

 Detector return POST-FAIL F3
ΧΦ(turned at
Optical fiber Fault F2 and F3
180°)
Ε7(turned at 180°)
Optical fiber Fault F2 and F3

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.5.2.1 DYNAMIX BOARD LEDS
LED status meaning

red ON Board not active
orange ON System in EMERGENCY
mode
green ON Board active
blinking Images being received
The sequence of these LEDs on switching-on
are: red - green - orange - green
5.5.2.2 ADD ON BOARD LEDS
LED status meaning

red ON Board not active
orange ON Video alarm output active
green ON Board on
blinking Image transfer in progress

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.6 SAVING IMAGES IN RAW FORMAT TO CD
If the system is fitted with the CD Writer (optional), this lets you save the images in a study in “raw”
format to CD; these images can then be used for various purposes, such as display on another HIRIS
RF43 system.
1) Place a new CD in the drive.
2) Select the study(ies) you want to save in the patient

list frame, but do not open them. Then click on Copy
Study(ies) to CD.
To select more than one study in the list:

- Shift to select several studies in order in the window,
- Ctrl to select several studies not in order in the
window.
3) The CD-Writer menu now opens with the new directory containing the selected study(ies) ready for
transfer to CD:
4) If necessary, click on Options to open the CD Writer options menu (see note 1) and set the options
as required.
5) Click on Start Write to start saving the study(ies) to CD.
Note 1: The CD-Writer menu lets you set a few options (using the Options menu):

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Device Select the type/model of the archive device.

Volume ID Archive ID (e.g.: date archive created or dept. name).
On Write Termination Operations required after saving to CD

Settings notes
Beep To get an acoustic warning
Eject To open the CD drive Always selected
CD-R Format formato del CD

Settings notes
Multisession T add other studies to the CD
Write hardware settings for saving to CD

Settings notes
Speed To set the saving speed Set: MAX.
(typically MAX)
Additional contents Options for adding extra contents to CD

Settings notes
Add utility To copy utility programs (in the folder Always selected
folder specified below).
Utility Set:
folder path C:\Dicomviewer
To choose whether to save the exams in a

Folders separate folder for each patient or directly
on a single level
Settings notes
Move to CD To save all exams in the root directory
rootfolder

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.7 UPDATING THE BACK-UP HARD DISK
Note: Before starting this procedure, we recommend that you:

- delete all the CD images still in the folder C:\CDImages that are no longer necessary.
- make sure that the archive hard disk has at least 3 GB free space (free up extra space if
necessary by deleting a few saved exams).
We strongly advise that you update the spare hard disk after every change to the application SW or
the system setup data. This means making a complete backup of the system hard disk on the spare
HD.
To do this:
Close the application and reboot the system as Administrator (see para. 7.3 in Part 2). Enter:
- User name: Admin2

5.7.1 UPDATING WITH ACRONIS TRUE IMAGE
1) Launch the Acronis True

Image application.
2) Click on Backup and Restore in the page that

now appears.
3) Click on Backup.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4) Click on Next.
5) Select My Computer and click on Next.
6) Select Disk and partitions and click on Next.
7) Select Disk 1 [System (C:)] and click on Next.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
8) Select the location and the name of the back-up file.
The location should normally be disk D (archive hard

disk); the figure shows an example of the ghost image
file: PIDRF43_XXX.
Confirm the data and then click on Next.
9) Click on Tools -> Options.
10) Select Compression level and set the

parameter shown in the figure.
11) Select Media components and set the

parameters shown in the figure.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
12) Select Additional settings and then set the

parameters shown in the figure.
Confirm the data and then continue by clicking

on OK.
13) In the Archive Comments page you can add

notes on the back-up file (e.g. the system
serial number and SW release).
Confirm the data and continue by clicking on

Next.
14) Make sure that the settings shown in the summary

page are correct.
Click on Proceed to start creating the back-up file.
15) Creation of the back-up file.

indicates the progress of the creation of this
file.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
16) Verify the back-up file once this has been

created.
The Current operation progress bar shows

the progress of the file verification process.
17) The back-up process is complete once the

back-up file has been verified.
The archive hard disk now contains a back-up copy of the system hard disk. You now need to
move this to the back-up hard disk.
To do this:
1) Switch the system off and replace the system hard disk (see procedure explained in paragraph 2.1
of Part 5).
2) Reboot the system with the back-up disk inserted, log in as administrator and then launch the
Acronis True Image application.
3) Click Backup and Restore in the page that

now appears.
4) Click on Restore.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5) Click on Next.
6) Select the back-up file (extension .tib) you have

just created on the archive hard disk and then click
on Next.
7) Select Disk 1 and click on Next.
8) Select Disk 1 and then click on Next.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
9) Select Yes… (see figure) and then click on Next.
10) Select No, I do not and then click on Next.
11) Select Use default options and then click on

Next.
12) Check that the settings shown in the summary

page are correct.
Click on Proceed to start the back-up HD restore

procedure.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
13) You will now be asked to restart the system to

continue the restore procedure.
Click on Reboot.
14) The system restarts and the following page

appears.

the progress of the back-up HD restore
procedure.
At the end of this procedure, the back-up hard disk will be updated with the same settings as the
system and so can be used when necessary.
Switch the video processor off, extract the back-up HD and return the system HD. Log in as User.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.8 CREATING THE BACK-UP CD/DVD (GHOST DISK)
You need to use the DVD burner in the video processor to create the ghost disk for the video
processor system (back-up CD/DVD).
You therefore need an empty DVD (or a few CDs) on which to save the ghost image of the system
hard disk.
Note: The ghost disk must be created after installing the equipment (system fully configured) and
must be constantly updated (after any changes to the SW or system setup). Keep this ghost
disk in a safe place, ensuring it is always available to the technical service.
Only the “Administrator” can carry out the following operations. Close the application and reboot the
system as Administrator (see Part 2, paragraph 7.3 ). Enter:
- User name: Admin2
Note: There are two alternative applications for the back-up CD/DVD procedure (Norton Ghost or
Acronis True Image). Check which of these applications is loaded in the PID and then follow the
relevant instructions in the following paragraphs:
- 5.8.1 Creating a ghost disk using Norton Ghost
- 5.8.2 Creating a ghost disk using Acronis True Image
5.8.1 CREATING A GHOST DISK USING ACRONIS TRUE IMAGE
1) Launch Acronis True Image.
2) Click on Backup and Restore in the page that

now appears.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Click on Backup.
4) Click on Next.
5) Select My Computer and click on Next.
6) Select Disk and partitions and click on Next.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

and click on Next.
8) Select the location and name of the back-up file.
The DVD burner should normally be selected as the

location. The figure here shows an example of the
name given to the ghost file: PIDRF43_XXX
(where XXX is the serial number of the PIDRF43
video processor).
Confirm the data and continue by clicking on Next.
9) Click on Tools -> Options.
10) Select Compression level and set the

parameter as shown in the figure.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11) Select Media components and set the

parameters as shown in the figure.
12) Select Additional settings and set the

parameters as shown in the figure.

OK.
13) In the Archive Comments page you can add

notes on the back-up file (e.g. system serial
number and SW release).

Next.
14) Make sure that the settings shown in the summary

page are correct.
Click on Proceed to start creating the back-up file.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
15) Enter the CD or DVD to be used as the back-up.
Wait a few seconds and then click on OK.
16) Creation of the back-up file.

indicates the progress of the creation of this
file.
17) Once the ghost file has been created, enter

the CD/DVD in the same drive again.
Click on Retry.
18) The burnt ghost CD/DVD is now checked.

the progress of the file verification process.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
19) The back-up process is complete once the

back-up file has been verified.
20) Extract the DVD/CD, close the application and reboot the system as User.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.9 VIDEO PROCESSOR DUMP INFORMATION
The Dump function lets you analysis problems that have caused the video processor application to
crash.
After a crash, this function automatically generates a system status report, concentrating especially
on the stored data.
The following page appears on the monitor after a crash, showing the stages in data collection.
This operation lasts about 30 seconds on average (though it may take up to a minute in some cases).
The application then closes.
If you need to restart the system immediately, use the “Cancel” button to abort the operation; the data
will not be collected in this case.
The Dump data are kept in the folder: C:\Program Files\Digitec\HirisRf43\Bin\Dump
Each Dump operation produces a directory and a .md5 file, stored within a single compressed .zip file.
The directory and the two files have the same date/time as the corresponding crash.
The Dump data may be as much as 1 Gbyte in size.

The system stores a maximum 10 Dump directories at any one time (max total storage space: 10
Gbyte). The oldest Dump directory is then automatically deleted if a new one is created.
The video processor LOG files are automatically added to the Dump directories (apart from the
DICOM function LOG file). This makes it easier for the Technical Service to understand what
happened to cause a crash.
Note: Please provide the following data if you require analysis of a DUMP file:
- the .zip file corresponding to the date and time of the CRASH,
- the Settings folder,
- if necessary, the DICOM LOG folder (see specific paragraph).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
5.10 STUDY RECOVERY FUNCTION
The STUDY RECOVERY function lets you reconstruct a study that has become corrupted for some
reason. This function is useful in the following situations:
- Corruption or loss of an acquired image: typically, when the “Error loading exam local file”
message appears in the study frame.
- Corruption of the study data. The system indicates this defect by identifying the study as
“UNNAMED”.
This function can also be used to construct an archive, starting from just one folder for a single study.
To select the STUDY RECOVERY function:
• Right-click on the corrupted study in the Patient List and then select the Recover Study option:
• The Study Recovery window opens:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
 Study folder: path containing the chosen corrupted study.
 Work folder: path containing the folder when the recovered study is to be saved. The default path
is “D:\Recovery”, though you can change this using the button. The work folder is always
created automatically, even if not specified.
 In the Analysis box:
o Keep corrupted files: if selected, this option lets you use partial decoding results for files with
the “.dcm” extension. This allows some of the parameters to be reused.
Use the following commands to start the Recovery procedure:
• Analyze: this command lets you analyse the files in the corrupted study.
Press this command to perform the following operations:
- creation of the recovery folders;
- copy and analysis of each file in the study.
More specifically, each time you press the Analyze command, a folder called
“yyyymmddhhmmss_Recovery” (where the suffix contains the date and time of creation) is
created in the Work folder together with a series of subfolders, like those of an archive.
• Recover: use this command for the actual recovery procedure. This is only enabled once the
files have been analysed.
The recovery procedura uses the information in the study files.
The Recovery box contains a series of options that let you set certain data that cannot be found
directly from the corrupted study:
• Single fr. modality (CR/DX): to select the DICOM mode to be assigned to a series of single
frames.
• Single fr. equalizer: to select the equalization type to be associated to a series of single
frames. (*)
• Single fr. harm: to select the harmonization type to be associated to a series of single frames.
(*)
• Multi fr. modality (RF/XA): to select the DICOM mode to be assigned to a series of multiple
frames.
• Multi fr. equalizer: to select the equalization type to be associated to a series of multiple
frames. (*)
• Multi fr. harm: to select the harmonization type to be associated to a series of multiple
frames. (*)
• Multi fr. sub equalizer: to select the pre-equalization type to be associated to a series of
multiple frames acquired in SUB mode. (*)
(*) Note: You can select one of the set options in the system; the first available option in
alphabetical order is automatically shown.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• The Show report command lets you view the procedure reports, indicating both the analysis
results and the actual recovery results.
After using the Recovery procedure, open the recovered study as follows:
• Close the Study Recovery page,
• Close the current archive,
• Open the recovered archive by using the Browse command in the “Archive List Manager” panel;
Find the recovered study within the “Work folder” (e.g.: “D:\Recovery”) and the subfolder, whose
name indicated the date and time it was created using the recovery procedure.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S5 05.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Part 6 : SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS

CONTENTS
pages rev. date
CONTENTS I-1 - I-2 E 25/07/14
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT FITTED WITH TWO 1.1 - 1.7 C 25/07/14

DETECTORS (PIXIUM RF4343 + WIRELESS DRX1)
1.1 Composition of the system fitted with two detectors
1.2 Safety - Wireless DRX1 detector
1.3 Technical characteristics - Wireless DRX1 detector
1.4 Cables for the Wireless DRX1 detector unit
1.5 Dimensions of the Wireless DRX1 detector unit
1.5.1 Detector and battery
1.5.2 WI FI Access Point
1.5.3 Battery charger
1.5.4 Tether Box (optional)
1.6 Packaging of the system fitted with two detectors
2. INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO 2.1 - 2.19 E 25/07/14

DETECTORS (PIXIUM RF4343 + WIRELESS DRX1)
2.1 Installing the Wireless DRX1 detector unit
2.1.1 Installing the WI FI Access Point
2.1.1.1 Description of the Access Point
2.1.1.2 Wall mounting
2.2 Electrical connections for the Wireless DRX1 detector
unit
2.2.1 Optional second ionising chamber
2.3 Video processor setup - Wireless DRX1 detector
2.3.1 Network connections
2.3.2 General Setup
2.3.3 Detector parameters setup
2.3.4 Exam setup - Wireless DRX1 detector
2.3.4.1 Changing the free parameters
2.3.4.3 Viewing parameters
3. CALIBRATION AND CONTROL OF THE WIRELESS DRX1 3.1 - 3.21 A 30/08/13

DETECTOR
3.1 Introduction
3.1.1 CareCal calibration program
revision E PART 6 page I - 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.2 Detector connections

3.3 Detector status indications
3.4 Detector configuration
3.4.1 Checking the calibration files
3.5 Calibrating the detector
3.5.1 1st stage: Daily Dark calibration
3.5.2 Finding the exposure values for Gain and Flat
Field calibration
3.5.3 2nd stage: Gain calibration
3.5.4 3rd stage: Flat Field calibration
3.5.5 4th stage: Defect Map Analysis
3.6 Viewing the defect pixel map
3.7 Viewing the mechanical shocks received by the detector
4. MAINTENANCE 4.1 - 4.14 C 25/07/14

4.1 Cleaning the Wireless DRX1 detector
4.2 Replacing components in the Wireless DRX1 detector
unit
4.2.1 Replacing the Wireless DRX1 detector
4.2.2 Replacing the Ethernet POE Switch
4.2.3 Replacing the WI FI Access Point
4.3 Spare-parts list - Wireless F.P. detector unit
4.4 LED on the Wireless DRX1 detector
4.5 LEDs on the WI FI Access Point
4.6 LEDs on the battery charger
revision E PART 6 page I - 2

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS

1.1 COMPOSITION OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS
The system can be configured with 2 detectors:

- a dynamic detector: PIXIUM RF4343
- a static wireless detector: DRX1

1. PIXIUM RF4343 solid state detector, comprising:
a) PIXIUM FE4343F detector,
b) PU RF4343 image correction unit,
c) detector power unit.
2. Ionising chamber for PIXIUM RF4343 detector
3. Wireless DRX1 detector unit, comprising:
a) Wireless DRX1. detector,
b) WI FI Access Point,
c) Ethernet POE Switch,
d) Battery (n°2).
4. PIDRF43 video processor.
5. Control and interface module (Main Controller)
6. Power unit.
7. Alphanumerical keyboard and mouse.
8. LCD working monitor.
Optional devices:
9. Ionising chamber for wireless DRX1 detector

10. Dose Area Meter.
11. CD/DVD Re-writer.
12. Cabinet top.
13. Auxiliary monitors.
14. Monitor trolley (for 1 monitor).
15. Monitor trolley (for 2 monitors).
16. CE 93/42 certified Monitor trolley (for 1 monitor).
17. CE 93/42 certified Monitor trolley (for 2 monitors).
18. Infrared remote control.
19. Tether Box.
revision C PART 6 page 1.1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
X-ray tube 8 13 13 13
3b
10 11
7 12
X-ray
2 18
9 14 15
1a
5
19
3a 13 13 13
3d
3c
4
16 17
3e
1b
1c

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.2 SAFETY - WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
When using the Wireless DRX1 detector, you must bear in mind that:
The detector battery charger is not a medical device and must not be placed in the
vicinity of the patient.
The Wireless Access Point is not a medical device and must not be placed in the vicinity
of the patient.
The figure shows the correct distances

in the vicinity of the patient.
Keep all electronic devices (wireless or connected with cables) at least 1 metre from the
detector when in use.
The detector must not be used to support the patient: it must be placed on a suitable
surface, such as a table or the floor, before resting the patient on it. The label below
indicates the max limits to avoid damaging the detector:
Observe the following weight limits to prolong the life of the detector and reduce the risk of internal
damage:
- The max weight concentrated on a small area on the surface of the detector (50 mm in
diameter) must not exceed 23 kg.
- The max weight distributed evenly across the surface of the detector must not exceed 125 kg.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
See the instructions and warnings in paragraph 2.4 of this part of the manual for details on
how to clean the detector.
Place the detector inside a protective plastic bag if there is any risk of liquids coming into
contact with this. In this case, remove the protection immediately after use to avoid the risk
of the detector overheating.
When using the detector “off-grid” (Potter-Bucky grid), adjust the X-ray collimator to limit
the X-ray beam so that it remains within the sensitive surface of the detector.
Never allow the detector to come into direct contact with the patient when connected via
cable (i.e. via the tether box).
1.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERS – WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
Wireless DRX1 detector temperature 10 - 30°C

(Carestream) humidity 20 - 75%
atmospheric pressure 700 - 106 kPa
acquisition time (typ.) 20 seconds
working dose (typ.) 2.5 µGy/image
pixel size 139 x 139 µm
resolution (max) 3.6 lp/mm
Conversion screen Gadolinium Cesium
active area size 35.4 x 42.5 cm 35 x 42,3 cm
matrix 2544 x 3056 pixels 2520 x 3032 pixels
1.4 CABLES FOR THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR UNIT
description code diameter length

[mm] [m]
Ethernet POE Switch / WI FI Access Point CAVORJ45-03 5 standard: 15
Ethernet POE Switch / Tether Box CAVORJ45-03 5 standard: 15

(Ethernet - optional)
Power unit / Tether Box 550 85 100 5 standard: 15
(Power supply - optional)
Earth 550 05 170 5 standard: 15
Cabinet / ionising chamber 70 01 140 7 standard: 15

(optional) optional: 25

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.5 DIMENSIONS OF THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR UNIT
1.5.1 DETECTOR AND BATTERY
BATTERY
Thickness : 6.7 mm
Weight: 0.3 kg
DETECTOR
Thickness : 15.5 mm
Weight: 3.5 kg
1.5.2 WI FI ACCESS POINT
Dlink model DAP-2553
Weight: 0.386 Kg

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
CISCO model AIR-SAP2602I-E-K9
Weight: 1.04 Kg
1.5.3 BATTERY CHARGER
Weight: 2 kg
1.5.4 TETHER BOX (OPTIONAL)
Weight: 2.5 kg

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.6 PACKAGING OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS
The system is packed in 6 boxes:
Box Contents
1 PIXIUM RF4343 detector
2 Cabinet (Image processor / Main Controller module / PU 4343 module / Detector power
unit / Power unit)
3 - Ionising chamber
- WI FI Access Point
- Cables
- Alphanumerical keyboard and Mouse
- Manuals
- CD/DVD recorder (optional)
- IR remote control (optional)
- Tether Box (optional)
4 Monitor
5 Cabinet top
6 - WIRELESS DRX1 detector
- Battery charger
- Battery (n.2)
box 4 box 3 box 5
box 6
box 2
box 1
System with
1 x PIXIUM RF4343 detector and
1 x Wireless DRX1 detector

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2 INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS

2.1 INSTALLING THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR UNIT
The mobile Wireless DRX1 detector unit does not require installation.
Bear in mind, however, that:
- it can be fed via a power cable, i.e. via the tether box (optional).
Given the max length of the cable between the detector and the tether box (max 7.6m), the box
must be placed outside the cabinet.
X-Ray tube
Detector
2.1.1 INSTALLING THE WI FI ACCESS POINT
The Access Point used for the detector’s wireless connection must be placed inside the area where
the detector is used. The distance between the Access Point and the detector is not critical, provided
there are no obstacles between them.
Weight: 0.386 kg
revision E PART 6 page 2.1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Weight: 1.04 kg
2.1.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE ACCESS POINT
Dlink Model DAP-2553
Ethernet port
Reset button
Power socket
Wall mounting slots
LED
LEDs The LEDs indicate the status of the power supply and the activity of the Access Point.
(see paragraph 4.5 for details of these LEDs).
Ethernet port Port used for connection to the connector belonging to the Ethernet POE Switch
(Power Over Ethernet) providing power.
Reset button Use to reset the default settings in the event of a malfunction. Press for at least 5
seconds.
Power socket Power supply socket (NOT USED)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Console port
Ethernet port
Power socket
LED (on top)
LED The LEDs indicate the status of the power supply and the activity of the Access Point.
Power socket NOT USED
Console port NOT USED
2.1.1.2 WALL MOUNTING
We recommend connecting the Ethernet cable and then checking the efficiency of the Access Point
status LEDs before fixing the Access Point in a position that is not easily accessible.
Use the 2 screws and 2 wall plugs provided to fix the A.P.
Hang the A.P. on the screws using the appropriate bracket (see fig.1 in paragraph 2.1.1.1).
Connect the Ethernet cable supplied with the system (code CAVORJ45-03) to the Ethernet port on the
AP.

P
To fix the CISCO AP to the wall:
Fix plate “A” to the wall using suitable wall plugs (not provided).
Slot the AP onto this plate (the 4 feet “P” in slots “B”).
Connect the Ethernet cable provided with the system B
(code CAVORJ45-03) to the Ethernet port on the AP.
B P

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR UNIT
1 Wireless DRX1 detector CM1 Tether Box cable connection
2 WI FI Access Point LAN Mains cable / Ethernet POE switch connection: LAN1
3 Ethernet POE Switch LAN1 Mains cable / WI FI Access Point connection

LAN3 Mains cable / PID connection: B8-C1
LAN4 Mains cable / Tether box connection
Power supply 230 V AC – PIXIUM detector power unit: TB1
(always powered up)
4 Tether box CM1 Detector connection cable
(optional) CM2 Mains cable / Ethernet POE switch connection: LAN4
Power supply 230 V AC – Power unit: TB3
Earth Earth cable connection – Power unit: GP1
Fig.1
Wireless DRX1
detector
CM1: Tether Box connection cable (optional)
LAN: Mains cable / Ethernet POE

switch connection: LAN1
Fig. 2a Fig. 2b
DLINK WI FI Access Point CISCO WI FI Access Point

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
LAN1: Mains cable / WI FI Access Point connection
LAN3: Mains cable / PID connection: B8-C1
LAN4: Mains cable / Tether Box connection (optional)
Power supply: 230V AC / 48V DC power unit connection

Fig. 3
Ethernet POE Switch
Earth: Earth cable / power unit connection: GP1
CM1: Detector cable connection
Fig. 4
Tether Box
(optional)
CM2: Mains cable / Ethernet POE switch connection: LAN4
Power supply: 230V AC from power unit: TB3

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
COLOR
WORKING MONITOR
VIDEO SIGNAL
DVD-
RECORDER
(*)
230Vac
21Vac
RGBC 01 BOARD CM2 CM1
CM2 CM1
EXTENDER
RECEIVER
DVI/VGA CONVERTER
KEYBOARD
B12-C1 B11-C1 B10-C1
B11-C4 REFERENCE MONITOR
MOUSE B9-C1
B9-C2 Video Processor

PID RF43
B14-C1 (sn4xx) 230Vac
DICOM B11-C3
NETWORK CM5
B8-C1
B11-C2 B14-C2 B2-C1
INFRARED
REMOTE I/O RS-232 DAM
RECEIVER (*)
LAN3 FLAT PANEL Group 1

SWITCH POE CM23 CM15 CM20 CM22
LAN1 LAN4 IONIZATION CHAMBER
CM21
ACCESS
POINT CM10
CM15
PIXIUM FE4343F
CM6 DETECTOR
CM8 MAIN CONTROLLER

CM24
230Vac
CM4/5
LAN POWER
CM11
SUPPLY
NET.1
230Vac
B1-C1
DATA LINK
PU4343
+24V OUT
B6-C2
+24V IN
FLAT PANEL Group 2
FT1 TR1 CM2

CM1
RFPS 00 WIRELESS F.P.
TO ACCESSORY BOARD CM3 DETECTOR
TO X-RAY GENERATOR
RS-232
CP9
CAN BUS
CP10 LAN TETHER
INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY BOX (*)
CP12
TB3 ON/OFF CP13
TB3
TB1 TB3
PS
BATTERY
CHARGER
MAIN 230Vac
always present
MAIN 230Vac
MAIN 230Vac
always present

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2.1 OPTIONAL SECOND IONISING CHAMBER
If the optional “second ionising chamber” is fitted, the following electrical connections are foreseen in
the factory:
Electrical connections inside the Main Controller:
From To
1 MCON01 - CM14 ICI 00-CM2 Connection to board ICI 00 for the first ionising
(parallel connection on first chamber chamber (PIXIUM RF43 detector).
both boards ICI00) Board ICI 00-CM2 Connection to board ICI 00 for the second
second chamber ionising chamber (Wireless DRX1 detector).
2 ICI 00 – CM1 first ICI 00-CM1 second Power to board ICI 00 for the second ionising
ionising chamber ionising chamber chamber.
Electrical connections inside the RF43 cabinet:
From To
1 ICI 00 –CM3 second Preamplifier for the Connection to the preamplifier for the second
ionising chamber second ionising ionising chamber.
chamber
Connection to the preamplifier for

the second ionising chamber
Board ICI for the Board ICI 00 for

first ionising the second
chamber. ionising chamber.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
nd
2 ionising chamber
Preamplifier for the second

ionising chamber

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3 VIDEO PROCESSOR SETUP - WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
2.3.1 NETWORK CONNECTIONS
There are three network connections in a system fitted with two detectors:
- DICOM Network to connect to the local hospital network
- PU Network to connect to the PIXIUM RF4343 detector unit
- WIRELESS Network to connect to the Wireless DRX1 detector unit
PU NETWORK
WIRELESS NETWORK DICOM NETWORK
The following setup procedure is normally only required after upgrading the system (single or
double detector) or after replacing the video processor.
If the SW version for the THALES detector is 2.3.4.0 or higher, the 2 network ports (PU and
WIRELESS) may be configured each with a separate IP ADDRESS:
PU NETWORK  IP ADDRESS: 192.168.0.3

WIRELESS NETWORK  IP ADDRESS: 10.0.1.251
Otherwise, you must give them the same IP ADDRESS = 10.0.1.251, in order to guarantee that the 2
network connections (PU Network and WIRELESS Network) work correctly.
In the latter case, follow the steps below to configure the network connections:
Before attempting to change the IP address of the video processor above, you must
check that IP Address for the PU RF4343 is IP 10.0.1.2.
(If this is not the case, change it as described in paragraph 2.7 in Part 5 of this manual).
• With the cabinet switched off, disconnect the cables attached to the network ports shown
in the figure below.
• Switch the system on and access the video processor, logging on as Administrator:
username Admin2, password ats_PED.24 (see paragraph 7.3 in Part 2).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Select the following tools from the

Windows task-bar:
- Start / Settings / Network Connections:
- The following window appears:
• Select the 2 networks (PU

NETWORK and WIRELESS
NETWORK), right-click on the
mouse and then click on the
Bridge Connections command:
• Wait a few seconds for the

Network Bridge dialog box to
close:
• The network connections are

now as shown:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Select the Network Bridge

option, right-click on the mouse
and then click on Properties:
• Select the Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP) option in the Network
Bridge window:
• Set the IP address and Subnet

mask fields as shown in the
figure and then press OK.
The two network connections (PU NETWORK and WIRELESS NETWORK) are now set up
with the same IP ADDRESS = 10.0.1.251.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Close the Network Connection window.
• Select Start / Shut Down / Shut Down in the Windows task-bar and then switch off the
cabinet.
• Reconnect the network connections you removed at the beginning of the procedure to
their respective ports.
In any case, the components of the DRX1 Wireless detector unit will have the same address
type:
- DRX1 Wireless detector = 10.0.1.150
- WI FI Access Point = 10.0.1.249
• Switch the cabinet back on.
2.3.2 GENERAL SETUP
The figure and tables below show the different options in the General Setup menu for using the
Wireless F.P. detector:
Hardware Settings
Settings
IP AccpBox To set the IP Address of the PU4343 module.
With THALES SW version prior to 2.3.4.0, set the IP address as
10.0.1.2 (see para..2.3.1 above for further details)
Otherwise, with THALES SW version 2.3.4.0 or higher, set the IP
address as given by the manufacturer: 192.168.0.2
Detectors
Settings
Enable Detector 2 Select to enable the 2nd detector and then select the type:
WIRELESS FP
Enable Detector Warnings Select to enable the detector alarm warnings.
Detectors 2 Params Setup Open this menu to set the working parameters for the Wireless DRX1
detector (see paragraph 2.3.3 below).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.3 DETECTOR PARAMETERS SETUP
This lets you define the parameters used by the image acquisition system with the Wireless DRX1
detector.
These parameters are already set in the factory with the following values.
• Serial Number Serial n° identifying the detector. Do not change.
• Host IP IP Address of the PID video processor. Do not change.
• Detector IP IP Address of the detector. Do not change.
• SSID Name of the Wireless network. Do not change.
• WAP2 Password for the Wireless network. Do not change.
• Battery Low Threshold Battery charge min threshold. The detector status window in the
working frame reads “Low” when the charge level drops below this
value. Typical value: 30
• Sensibility Detector sensitivity: this value must coincide with that shown on the
relevant document in the detector technical bundle.
Do not change.
• Use Preview To use the Preview Image option during acquisition of an image by the
detector. Typically: enabled
• Enable Notify To enable the display of the Gain Calibration request when this has
Rq. Gain Calib expired and the detector needs to be re-calibrated.
Typically: enabled
• Enable Notify To enable the display of the mechanical shock warnings in the
Drop Det. detector status area. Typically: enabled

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Drop Info To open the Drop Information page with a list of the shocks to the
detector:
The system logs each mechanical shock (e.g. a drop or impact), classing them by the force
(magnitude) of the shock (G).
Each type of shock is saved with a number and the date of the event (year : month : day :: hour :
minutes).
Major Shock Count Number of shocks: > 150G.
Minor Shock Count Number of shocks: 101G - 150G.
Low Shock Count Number of shocks: 50G - 101G.
Date Max Shock Magnitude Date of the greatest shock.
Last Shock Magnitude Last logged shock greater than 50G.
Date Last Shock Magnitude Date of last shock.
Resettable Shock Magnitude Last logged shock. This is reset with each gain calibration.
Date Resettable Shock Magnitude Date of last Resettable Shock Magnitude.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.4 EXAM SETUP – WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
Access the management function for exam cards linked to the Wireless DRX1 detector by selecting
Option / Setup / WD Exam Setup and then entering the technical Password. The WD Exam Setup
Manager menu opens:
The Exam Setup cards for exposure using the Wireless DRX1 detector are numbered with:
- the anatomical part, with an ID from 100 to 199,
- the projection type, with an ID from 00 to 99.
The “Go to card” function lets you select the card and open the relevant Exam Setup menu. This has
four groups of parameters, as shown below:
Exam ID parameters DICOM ID parameters
Miscellaneous
parameters
Exposure and display parameters
These parameters can be changed, as explained in the paragraphs that follow.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.4.1 CHANGING THE FREE PARAMETERS
You need to check which parameters are free for each exam and change these as required in the
exam card.
Settings Notes
To enable the patient Select at least one size. When a size is not
Size valid types for the exam. enabled (i.e. not
checked), the entire
column is disabled.
Miscellaneous
Properties
Settings Notes
To set the position of the You can set an integrated

Accessory Code workstation 0-8 stand (if foreseen) with
programmable positions.
See also paragraph 4.3.1 in
Part 2.
X / Y inversion of the Select if the X/Y display
XY Shutter Inversion display of the electronic of the electronic
collimators on the collimators is inverted
image. with respect to the
actual position.
Digital orientation of the This normally depends on
Flip Rotation Code image. Set to get the the orientation of the
correct orientation of the 0-7* detector on the patient.
image on the monitor. The table below shows what
the code means.
*Image orientation:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Dicom exam type identifying parameters used by the DICOM
Properties standard. These parameters are applied to the image
and the patient data every time the exam is saved or
printed in DICOM format.
Settings Notes
Use to set the default Select one of the given This parameter is only
Modality DICOM mode. fields: used when the mode used
CR to create the exam is not
DX already defined upon
receipt of the Worklist.
Protocol Procedure ID code To be agreed with the
network administrator.
Description Description of the To be agreed with the
exam. network administrator.
Body part to which the Select one of the given
Body Part exam refers. fields:
UNDEFINED
SKULL
CSPINE
TSPINE
LSPINE
SSPINE
COCCYX
CHEST
CLAVICLE
BREAST
ABDOMEN
PELVIS
HIP
SHOULDER
ELBOW
KNEE
ANKLE
HAND
FOOT
EXTREMITY
LEG
HEAD
HEART
JAW
ARM
NECK
Projection side Select one of the given
Laterality fields:
Undefined
Right
Left
Unpaired
Both L&R
Projection type Select one of the given
View fields:
Undefined
AP
PA
LL
RL
RLD
LLD
RLO
LLO

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Set the parameters for each programmed patient type (Size

Item valid).
Settings Notes
To set the X-ray dose for Typical working value:
Dose uGy exposure in radiography 0.5 - 10 µGy 2.5 µGy.
mode.
Optimal kV value for This value will be sent to
kV exposure 40 - 150 kV the X-ray generator when
the exam is opened.
Optimal mA values for The value is sent to the
mA exposure 1-1000 mA generator on opening the
AEC exam.
Optimal mAs value for Il The value is sent to the
mAs exposure. 1-1000 mAs generator on opening the
NO AEC exam.
To enable automatic Left

AEC Left control during AEC
AEC Center exposure by selecting at Center
AEC Right least one area of the
ionising chamber Right
Focus of the X-ray tube 0 = small focus This value will be sent to
Focal Spot used for exposure. the X-ray generator when
1 = large focus the exam is opened.
Envisaged focal distance The value will be sent to
Focal distance for exposure. 80 - 250 cm the remote control.
To set the image This factor will be used by

Calibration Factor enlargement factor the system for TRUE SIZE
(depending on the focal 1.0 - 1.5 printing and default
distance and the distance calibration of the
between the object and measurements on the
the detector). image.
This value will be sent to
0 = no grid the stand when the exam
Grid Anti-scatter grid to be 1 = grid 1 is opened .
used. 2 = grid 2 the value is then
compared with the actual
grid to enable exposure.
To select the X-ray beam 0 = no filter This value will be sent to
Rx Filter hardening filter in the 1 = filter 1 the collimator when the
collimator. 2 = filter 2 exam is opened.
3 = filter 3
Screen selector X Horizontal aperture of the This value will be sent to
X-ray collimator. 1 - 43 cm the collimator when the
exam is opened.
Screen selector Y Vertical aperture of the X- This value will be sent to
ray collimator. 1 - 43 cm the collimator when the
exam is opened.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Note: In the case of an integrated X-ray generator, the kV, mAs and Focal Spot parameters are
automatically sent to the X-ray generator.
The values of the mAs parameter set here must match that envisaged by the X-ray generator
scales.
Even if the generator is not integrated, it is important that these parameters are set
correctly, as they are a guide for the operator, who can view them by pressing a symbol
in the working frame:
2.3.4.3 DISPLAY PARAMETERS
This section of the Exam Setup menu contains the

will be displayed.
Settings Notes
View negative To select Select to suit exam A radiography image is

positive/negative display normally shown as a
of the image. negative.
of the collimated images
Fill Size to fit the max size Select to suit exam
permitted by the
monitor.
1.0 = full screen (entire
detector area).
Default image zoom 3.0 = an area of about

Geometric mag. factor on monitor. 1.0 - 3.0 14x14 cm on the detector
(1 pixel on the monitor = 1
pixel on the detector).
Nom. Field + Fill Size Parameter not usable.
Do not select.
Nom. Field + Geom Mag. Parameter not usable.
Do not select.
Field View Ext. Parameter not usable.
Do not select.
To identify the This parameter appears in
Post Processing envisaged radiography P.P. Name the list of processes
image processing preset in the factory.
parameters for the
exam.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S6 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3 CALIBRATION AND CONTROL OF THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The Wireless DRX1 detector must be calibrated during installation and at regular intervals (at least
once every 6 months).
This basically consists in updating the gain parameters associated to each pixel of the detector and in
identifying any defective pixels.
There are 4 stages to the calibration procedure, to be carried out in order:
1. Detector OFFSET acquisition which lets you:

- acquire the value of each pixel in darkness (no X-rays), needed to establish the useful signal of
each pixel,
- identify any defective pixels responding with out-of-range values.
2. GAIN calibration which lets you:

- establish the gain to be associated to each pixel under nominal working conditions,
Calibration involves acquiring 16 images at the default dose value for the detector (26 μGy),
following a guided procedure.
3. FLAT FIELD calibration that lets you:

- equalize the detector response along its entire dynamics,
- find any defective pixels with non linear response.
This calibration is done using 4 X-ray exposures at different default doses set by the manufacturer
of the detector following a guided procedure.
4. DEFECT MAP analysis that lets you:

- check that the Gain and Flat Field calibrations have produced a correct defective pixel map.
Calibration and the detector checks are done using the CareCal.exe software provided with the
system.
revision A PART 6 page 3.1

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.1.1 THE CARECAL CALIBRATION PROGRAM
The detector is normally calibrated in the factory to ensure its efficiency.

However, you need to update this calibration during installation to suit the specific configuration of the
X-ray beam in the radiological plant.
Calibration is done using the CareCal program, which acts as detector/user interface. This involves
sending calibration commands and displaying the resulting images.
The Carecal program can only be accessed at

Administrator level (see Annex 7.3 in Part 2) by
clicking on the icon on the desktop.
The main working frame opens: the centre section shows the images (calibration and acquisition),
while the side and bottom sections contain 5 tabs to view the detector status and setup parameters.
The top section of the main frame also contains a menu bar and toolbar.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.2 DETECTOR CONNECTIONS
In order to calibrate the detector, the video processor and the detector must be connected. To do this:
1) Select Tools / Options in the menu bar to open the window that lets you set the serial connection
parameters with the system.
2) In the OptionsForm window:
- Check that the Console “Enable” parameter

is set as “ True ”.
If necessary, enter manually.
- Check that the Console “Serial port”

parameter is set as “ 1 ”.
- Check that the I/O Board “Model” parameter

is set as “” ISADigitec “.
- Confirm by clicking on Ok.
3) Select Connection / Connect in the menu bar to open the window that lets you set the connection
parameters for the Wireless DRX1 detector.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4) In the Connection window:
- Check that the IP address of the PID (Host

selection) is set as “ 10.0.1.251 ”.
Enter manually if necessary.
- Check that the IP address of the detector is

set as “ 10.0.1.150 ”.
- Check that the detector serial number is

correct.
- Select Use detector configuration.
- Confirm by clicking on Ok.
5) Wait about 15 seconds until the video processor connects to the detector. Connection is successful
when the following data appear in the bottom left-hand bar:

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.3 DETECTOR STATUS INDICATIONS
Once connected, the detector status parameters are shown.
1) Select the “ Detector Status ” tab and check the status of the detector:

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2) Then select the “ Power ” tab and check the detector power supply in the 2 cards (Battery and
Voltages):

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.4 DETECTOR CONFIGURATION
Once connected, the detector setup parameters are shown.
1) Select the “ Frame ” tab in the Configuration frame to view some basic info on the acquired
images:
2) Then select the “ Misc ” tab in the same window to view the main wireless connection parameters:

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Then select (always from the same window) the “ General ” tab and check that the settings are the
same as those shown below:
3.4.1 CHECKING THE CALIBRATION FILES
Use the Calibration / Verify function to check for the existence of any calibration files in the folder on
the system hard disk (C:\IMAGERs).
1) Select Calibration / Verify in the

menu bar.
2) The Verify calibration page appears, showing whether

the detector has already been calibrated or that certain
calibration files are missing.
Note: This function only checks for the existence of calibration files; it does not validate their content.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.5 CALIBRATING THE DETECTOR
Calibration of the detector is split into 4 stages:

- Offset acquisition (Daily dark calibration)
- Gain calibration
- Flat Field calibration
- Defect Map analysis
These stages must be done in order, as each stage requires that the previous one has already been
completed.
st
3.5.1 1 STAGE: DAILY DARK CALIBRATION
OFFSET calibration requires the acquisition of an image without any X-ray emission.
1) Select Calibration / Daily dark in the

menu bar.
2) The Daily dark calibration frame opens:
- click on Start and wait for calibration to be completed.
- progress is shown in the Operation progress bar.
3) The following message appears in the Result box if

calibration is successfully completed:
Calibration completed successfully.
- Click on Exit.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.5.2 FINDING THE EXPOSURE VALUES FOR GAIN AND FLAT FIELD CONFIGURATION
For GAIN and FLAT FIELD calibration you need to know beforehand the useful radiological
parameters for exposing the detector to the required doses during this calibration.
To find these parameters (X-ray filter and X-ray generator exposure values), use the CareCal function
that lets you measure the levels of the acquired image (and thus the exposure dose). To do this:
1) Go to the Last image (full size) window:
2) Select Acquisition / Acquire image in the menu

bar.
The AcquireFrameForm frame opens:
3) Give the X-ray command to acquire an image.

The Detector status bar will then show (in order):
- progress of X-ray generator preparation
- progress of image acquisition

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4) The image is shown a few seconds later in preview format and then in full size format (scale 1:1).
See image below:
5) Move the Zoom slider left to view the full image (scale 1:6).

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
6) Use the commands in the Display control area to get the best view of the acquired image:
- enter the max value of the window to be displayed in the Max box. For example, a value (LSB)
twice the foreseen acquisition levels.
- the Display enh slider lets you fine adjust the display using your mouse.
7) Move the mouse pointer onto the image and move this within the image to check the pixel levels.
These are shown in the bottom bar, with the corresponding x-y position in the detector matrix:

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
8) If necessary, you can change the exposure parameters to get the required image levels. These are
listed in the tables below:
GAIN Image Level Range Default X-ray Parameters

CALIBRATION (LSB) filter 21mm Al - SID 120cm
2700 - 3300
Exposure 70kV, 25 mAs
(typ. 3000)
FLAT FIELD Image Level Range Default X-ray Parameters

CALIBRATION (LSB) filter 21mm Al - SID 120cm
2700 - 3300
Exposure 1 70kV, 25 mAs
(typ. 3000)
900 - 1100
(typ. 1000)
145 - 165
Exposure 3 70kV, 1.3 mAs
(typ. 150)
5400 - 6600
(typ. 6000)
9) Make a note of the radiological parameters used (X-ray filter and generator exposure values).
You will be asked to set these during the guided calibration procedure.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
nd
3.5.3 2 STAGE: GAIN CALIBRATION
GAIN calibration involves 16 X-ray exposures at a fixed dose, set by the system. Conditions:
- collimator open enough to radiate the entire detector.
These two conditions are indispensable for both correct GAIN calibration and correct detection of
defective pixels.
The X-ray dose must also be that required, i.e. sufficient to generate detector image levels within the
set range. Otherwise calibration may not be effective.
For this reason, you must find the correct dose before starting the calibration procedure by acquiring
several images and then reading their level (LSB), as described in paragraph 6.5.2 above.
The GAIN calibration procedure is as follows:
1) Select Calibration / Gain in the menu

bar.
2) The Gain calibration frame opens:
- Click on Start.
- The Operation progress bar shows you what stage the

process has reached.
- The Number of exposures remaining field indicates the

number of images to be acquired. This number decreases
by one image as each image is acquired.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) When the system is ready for image acquisition, the Exposure setup window appears showing the
dose level needed for X-ray exposure and the status of the detector.
4) Press the PREP + RAD commands on the X-ray generator to start exposure:
- The PREP stage is shown by the indication Status: Armed.
- The Exposure setup page automatically closes upon completion of image acquisition.
- The Detector status: Acquiring image message in the GAIN calibration frame informs you that
the detector is transferring the image to the video processor.
5) Release the PREP + RAD commands after acquisition.
6) Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 for the other exposures, at the same X-ray dose.
7) Once the last image has been acquired, the

following message appears in the Result window if
calibration has been successful:
- Click on Exit.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
rd
3.5.4 3 STAGE: FLAT FIELD CALIBRATION
FLAT FIELD calibration involves 4 X-ray exposures, each at a different fixed dose set by the system.
Conditions:
- collimator open enough to radiate the entire detector.
As for GAIN calibration, these two conditions are indispensable for correct completion of the FLAT
FIELD calibration procedure.
The X-ray doses must also be those required, i.e. sufficient to generate detector image levels within
the set range.
For this reason, you must find the correct dose before starting the calibration procedure by acquiring
several images and then reading their level (LSB), as described in paragraph 6.5.2 above.
The FLAT FIELD calibration procedure is as follows:
1) Select Calibration / Flat Field in the

menu bar.
2) The Flat Field gain calibration frame appears:
- Click on Start.

- The Number of exposures remaining field indicates

the number of images to be acquired. This number
decreases by one image as each image is acquired.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) When the system is ready for image acquisition, the Exposure setup window appears showing the
dose level needed for the first X-ray exposure and the status of the detector.
4) Press the PREP + RAD commands on the X-ray generator to start exposure:
- The PREP stage is shown by the indication Status: Armed.
- The Exposure setup page automatically closes upon completion of image acquisition.
- The Detector status: Acquiring image message in the FLAT FIELD calibration frame informs
you that the detector is transferring the image to the video processor.
5) Release the PREP + RAD commands after acquisition.
6) Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 for the next three exposures each at a different X-ray dose value.
7) Once the last image has been acquired, the

following message appears in the Result window if
- Click on Exit.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
th
3.5.5 4 STAGE: DEFECT MAP ANALYSIS
After completing GAIN and FLAT FIELD calibration, you can check the new defective pixel map:
1) Select Calibration / Defect map

analysis in the menu bar.
2) The Defect map analysis calibration frame appears:
- Click on Start and wait for calibration to be completed.

3) The following message appears in the Result window if

- Click on Exit.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.6 VIEWING THE DEFECTIVE PIXEL MAP
After detector calibration the defect pixel map image shows the position of the defective pixels on the
surface of the detector.
You can view this map by using the Retrieve combined defect pixel map function in the CareCal
application, as follows:
1) Select Acquisition / Retrieve image / Retrieve combined defect pixel map in the menu bar:
2) The map is sent from the detector and shows the combined defect map in the centre of the
frame:

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3) Move the Zoom slider in the Display control section to the left to view the entire image. Set 0 in
the Max field to view all defective pixels on the map.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.7 VIEWING THE MECHANICAL SHOCKS RECEIVED BY THE DETECTOR
This function lets you view the status of the detector in terms of any mechanical shocks it has
received.
Whenever the detector receives a mechanical shock (impact/knocks), this is logged with an indication
of the force (G) and the correct date (year : month : day :: hour : minutes).
1) Select Maintenance / Shock data in the menu bar:
2) The Detector shock information frame appears showing the number of shocks received (on the
basis of their force) and the date on which these were logged:

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 03.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 CLEANING THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
The Wireless DRX1 detector may be used in direct contact with the patient and so needs to be
cleaned properly.
To clean the detector:
- Disconnect the detector from its power supply:

- Remove the Tether Box power cable (if used),
- Remove the battery.
- Use a solution of neutral soap and water to clean.

First apply the soapy solution to a clean cloth and then clean the detector. Do not apply the soapy
solution directly to the detector: it might penetrate and damage the device.
To clean the battery compartment:
- Remove dust and dirt from the battery compartment using a soft cloth,
- Use a toothbrush or vacuum cleaner to clean the contacts on the side of the battery compartment
(alternatively, contact the Technical Service).
Never place in the detector in water or other liquids.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2 REPLACING COMPONENTS IN THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR UNIT
4.2.1 REPLACING THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
Each Wireless DRX1 detector is supplied with a DVD (Registration Disk) containing:
- the default calibration files,
- the detector firmware,
- file Registration.xml.
File Registration.xml contains the Serial Number and IP Address of the detector as set in the factory,
which are needed for its connection to the system.
The Wireless DRX1 detector’s IP Address is always 10.0.1.150 (all detectors), while its Serial Number
is unique and specific for each detector.
Directory: <DVD>:\Calibration\000000030054
(where the number 000000030054 is the serial number of the
detector) contains the default calibration files prepared in the
factory and needed to correct the images acquired by the
detector.
These calibration files must be copied into a directory on the

system hard disk (C:\IMAGERs\000000030054), as explained
below.
If you need to replace the detector:
1) Do not insert the battery in the new detector until you have completed the configuration procedure
below.
2) Log in as the Administrator on the video processor (see Annex 7.3 in Part 2 of this manual).
3) Copy the contents of directory: <DVD>:\Calibration\000000030054

to the video processor system HD in directory: C:\IMAGERs\
thus creating a new directory: C:\IMAGERs\000000030054
4) Copy the new Registration.xml file from the DVD to the same directory: C:\IMAGERs\
thus overwriting the old file.
5) Open the HIRIS RF43 application and then:
- select Option / Setup / General Setup and click on Detectors 2 Params Setup
- change the Serial Number and Sensibility parameters (see paragraph 2.3.2 in this part of the
manual) to suit those of the new detector (see its accompanying documents.
6) Close the HIRIS RF43, application and insert the charged battery in the detector. Wait for the
correct sequence of warning LEDs (see paragraph 4.4 below).
7) Open the CARECAL application and effect connection by inserting the new detector Serial
Number. Then perform the complete calibration procedure, as described in chapter 3 above.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2.2 REPLACING THE ETHERNET POE SWITCH
Setup: the equipment may use 2 different models:

- 3CNJ1000
- 3CNJ2000
4.2.2.1 ETHERNET SWITCH 3CNJ1000
Ethernet Switch model 3CNJ1000 requires no setup.
Ethernet Switch model 3CNJ2000, on the other hand, requires the following setup operations:
- Temporarily change the IP Address for the Video Processor (PID) used for the
WIRELESS NETWORK, using an address compatible with that of the switch so that the
two devices can communicate.
- Then change the IP Address for the switch.
- End the procedure by restoring the original IP Address for the PID.
To do this:
1) Find the IP Address of the switch indicated in its installation guide (e.g.: 169.254.1.251).
2) With the system switched off, replace the old switch with the new one and then connect this as
explained in paragraph 2.2 in this part of the manual.
3) Temporarily disconnect the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK cables.
4) Switch the system on and log in as Administrator, keeping the Shift key on the alphanumerical
keyboard down when the system boots up (see paragraph 7.3 in Part 2 of this manual).
5) Change the IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS NETWORK, by selecting
in the Windows task-bar:
Start / Settings / Network Connections / Wireless Connection
(see procedure in paragraph 2.3.1 in this part of the manual).
PID working IP Address: 10.0.1.251  temporary IP Address: 169.254.1.200
6) Run Windows Explorer by selecting: Start / Programs / Accessories / Windows Explorer.
7) Enter the new IP Address for the Switch

(169.254.1.251) in the Address bar and
then press Enter.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
8) Enter the password “password” in the

page that now appears and then click on
Login.
9) Select SYSTEM / LAN Settings in the next page to change the Switch’s network settings:
10) Change the parameters in the Change IP Address table as shown below and then click on
Apply.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11) Click on OK in the confirmation window

and then close the settings window.
12) The IP Address of the Ethernet POE Switch is now correctly set: 10.0.1.250
13) Restore the original working IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS
NETWORK (changed earlier at point 5 above): 10.0.1.251
14) Reconnect the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK cables.
Run the HIRIS RF43 application and check that the DRX1 detector connects correctly with the system
(wireless connection).
4.2.3 REPLACING THE WI FI ACCESS POINT
To set the Wireless network parameters for the Access Point (AP):
- Change the IP Address of the Video Processor (PID) temporarily, using an address that
is compatible with that of the AP so that the two elements can communicate with each
other.
- Using the PID, change the IP Address of the AP.
- Then restore the initial IP Address of the PID.
To do this:
1) Find the IP Address of the AP indicated in its installation guide (e.g.: 192.168.0.50).
2) With the system switched off, replace the old AP with the new one and then connect this as
3) Temporarily disconnect the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK cables.
keyboard down when the system boots up (see Annex 7.3 in Part 2 of this manual).
5) Change the working IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS NETWORK, by
selecting in the Windows task-bar:
PID working IP Address: 10.0.1.251  temporary IP Address: 192.168.0.251

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7) Enter the new IP Address for the AP

then press Enter.
8) The web browser opens automatically at the AP access page. Enter admin as the User Name,
leave the Password field blank and then click on Login:
9) The main page shows the general Access Point information.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
10) Select MAINTENANCE / CONFIGURATION FILE to load the wireless network settings via a
configuration file saved on the video processor system disk:
11) You need to specify the path for the AP configuration file in order to load it. Click on Browse:

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
12) The Choose file window opens so you can find the file:
13) Select the path: My Computer / System (C:) / Program Files / AP Restore DAP2553
and then the file: config.dcf . Then click on Open.
The file path now appears in the main page:
14) After loading the configuration file, click on Upload and confirm with OK when requested:
15) The AP configuration Restore procedure starts. Do not switch the device off and wait for this
operation to finish (about 1 minute).
16) The following page appears once the Restore procedure is completed. You can now close the
configuration window.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
17) To see if the network settings have been loaded correctly, access the AP with the new IP
Address. Then:
- Restore the original working IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS
NETWORK (changed earlier at point 5 above): 10.0.1.251
- Start Windows Explorer selecting Start / Programs / Accessories / Windows Explorer than
enter the IP Address for the AP (10.0.1.249) in the Address bar again. Press Enter.
18) If the web browser automatically opens at the AP access page, it means that the wireless network
settings have been loaded correctly.
Enter admin as the User Name, leave the Password field blank and click on Login.
19) Select the BASIC SETTINGS / WIRELESS menu in the main page and check that the current
network is CSH_DRX1_FACTORY:
20) Click on Logout to disconnect the AP and then close the setup window.
21) Reconnect the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK cables.
22) Run the HIRIS RF43 application and check the WI-FI connection of the DRX1 Wireless detector
with the system.
We advise against trying to reconfigure the Cisco AP in situ.

If the AP needs to be replaced, you should buy the AP indicated above from the manufacturer
(configured correctly for the HIRIS RF43 system).
The new AP is ready to use (no further settings required.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.3 SPARE-PARTS LIST – WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR UNIT
N. DESCRIZIONE CODICE NOTE
1 Wireless DRX1 detector DT 85 101

2 Battery DT 85 401
3 Battery charger DT 85 402
4 Tether box DT 85 403
5a CISCO WI FI Access Point HW 86 902
5b D-Link WI FI Access Point HW 86 901
6 Ethernet POE Switch HW 85 902
5a 5b
1 4

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.4 LED ON THE WIRELESS DRX1 DETECTOR
There is a green/blue flashing warning LED on the side of the detector.

Green flashes indicate the detector status; blue flashes the detector/system connections. The table
below explains the colour codes:
LED flash
Description Action required
sequence
1 green Detector in Standby mode. No action needed.
Detector can be used.
2 green Detector Ready . No action needed.
3 green Detector in Debug mode. No action needed.

Condition not usually visible when using the
detector normally.
4 green Detector awaiting image acquisition No action needed.
command. This status may be seen when the system is
preparing for X-ray exposure.
5 green Detector has power supply problems: Remove the detector battery and re-insert.
one or more power supplies are This fault may persist re-inserting the battery,
incorrect. indicating a possible problem with the
Detector cannot be used. detector itself.
No green Detector may not be powered up. Insert a fully charged battery or connect the
This may happen when the battery is power cable.
flat or during image acquisition.
1 blue Detector connected to system. No action needed.
2 blue Detector was connected to system, but No action needed.

is no longer connected.
3 blue Detector has been rebooted and is not No action needed.

connected to system yet.
4 blue Detector upgrading its firmware. Condition not usually visible when using the
detector normally.
Do not use the detector until it has finished

loading the firmware.
5 blue Detector attempting to connect with the No action needed.
wireless access point. System
connection in progress.
No blue Dedicated detector connection software The dedicated software for system
not working properly. connection is not running when the detector
is switched on. Call the Technical Service if
the green LED starts flashes in this mode.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Below is a summary of the typical conditions of the LED when the detector is working normally:
LED flash sequence Description Action required

1 green Detector has just been switched on, Wait about 1 minute for the detector to
after inserting the battery. connect with the wireless access point.
5 blue
Detector attempting to connect with
the wireless access point.
1 green Detector connected to the wireless Connection between the detector and the
access point, but not connected to system can only be made in this condition.
3 blue system yet.
If the system is switched off: use the main
switch in the electrical cabinet to switch it on.
1 green Detector is connected to system and

ready for image acquisition.
1 blue
4.5 LEDS ON THE WI FI ACCESS POINT
POWER 5GHz 2.4GHz LAN
LED Colour Status Description
POWER Green On On and ready for work
Off Transmitter disabled

5GHz Green
Flashing Transmitter enabled
2.4GHz Green
On Connection made
LAN Green
Flashing Link activity
In a normal working condition:

- POWER : on
- 5GHz : flashing
- 2.4GHz : off
- LAN : flashing

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
STATUS LED
Green light, flashing The AP is switching on

Green light, steady The AP is ready, but no clients are connected
Blue light, steady The AP is ready and clients are connected
Other combinations Attention: There is a problem with the AP
4.6 LEDS ON THE BATTERY CHARGER
th
5 LED on = Battery fully charged
th
5 LED flashing = 80% charged
th
rd
3 ° LED flashing = 40% charged
nd
st
1 LED flashing = <20% charged
Yellow LED on = Faulty battery
Yellow LED flashing = Abnormal battery temperature.

Accepted range: 0 - 45°C
It takes less than 3 hours to fully charge a completely flat battery if the temperature of the
room where the charger sits is between +10 and +35°C.
Make sure that the battery temperature remains within the accepted range: 0 - 45°C. The
yellow LED will start flashing if the temperature is outside this range when you insert the
battery.
Place the battery charger in a well-ventilated area.

code 87 80 014 C - Mti S6 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Part 7 : SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS

CONTENTS
page rev. date
CONTENTS I-1 to I-2 A 25/07/14
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT FITTED WITH TWO 1.1 to 1.7 A 25/07/14

DETECTORS (PIXIUM RF4343 + WIRELESS PIXIUM 3543EZ)
1.1 Composition of the system fitted with two detectors.
1.2 Safety devices for the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector
1.3 Technical characteristics of the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless
detector
1.4 Cables for the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector unit
1.5 Dimensions of the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector unit
1.5.1 Detector and battery
1.5.2 WI FI Access Point
1.5.3 Battery charger
1.6 Packaging of the system fitted with two detectors
2. INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO 2.1 to 2.18 A 25/07/14

DETECTORS (PIXIUM RF4343 + WIRELESS PIXIUM 3543EZ)
2.1 Installing the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector unit
2.1.1 Installing the WI FI Access Point
2.1.1.1 Description of the Access Point
2.1.1.2 Wall mounting
2.2 Electrical connections for the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless
detector unit
2.2.1 Optional second ionising chamber
2.3 Video processor setup – PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless
detector
2.3.1 Network connections
2.3.2 General Setup
2.3.3 Detector parameters setup
2.3.4 Exam setup – PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector
2.3.4.1 Changing the free parameters
2.3.4.3 Display parameters
3. PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR CALIBRATION AND 3.1 to 3.20 0 30/08/13

CHECKS
3.1 Introduction
3.1.1 ThalesCal calibration program
3.2 Connecting to the detector
3.3 Detector status indications
3.4 Detector setup
revision A PART 7 page I - 1

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
3.5 Loading and activating a logical mode

3.6 Calibrating the detector
3.6.1 Find exposure values
3.6.2 X-ray calibration
3.7 Defect map analysis
4. MAINTENANCE 4.1 to 4.20 A 25/07/14

4.1 Cleaning the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector
4.2 Replacing components in the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless
detector unit
4.2.1 Replacing the detector
4.2.2 Replacing Ethernet POE Switch
4.2.2.1 Ethernet Switch 3CNJ1000
4.2.2.2 Ethernet Switch 3CNJ2000
4.2.3 Replacing the WI FI Access Point
4.3 Spare-parts list for the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector
unit
4.4 LEDs on the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector
4.5 LEDs on the WI FI Access Point
4.6 LEDs on the battery charger
revision A PART 7 page I - 2

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 00.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS

1.1 COMPOSITION OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS
The system can be fitted with 2 detectors:

- a dynamic detector: PIXIUM RF4343
- a static wireless detector: PIXIUM 3543EZ

1. PIXIUM RF4343 solid state detector unit, comprising:
a) PIXIUM FE4343F detector.
b) PU RF4343 image correction unit.
c) Detector power unit.
2. Ionising chamber for the PIXIUM RF4343 detector.
3. PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector unit, comprising:
a) PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector.
b) WI FI Access Point.
c) Battery charger.
d) Detector battery (2).
e) Ethernet POE Switch.
4. Video Processor, model PIDRF43.
5. Control and interface module (Main Controller).
6. Power unit.
7. Alphanumerical keyboard and Mouse.
8. Work Monitor.
System optional devices include:

9. Ionising chamber for the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector.
10. Dose Area Meter.
11. DVD recorder.
12. Cabinet top.
13. Extra monitors.
14. Monitor trolley (1 monitor).
15. Monitor trolley (2 monitors).
16. CE 93/42 certified monitor trolley (1 monitor).
17. CE 93/42 certified monitor trolley (2 monitors).
18. Infrared remote control.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
X-ray tube 13 13 13
8
3b
10 11
7 12
X-ray
2 18
9 14 15
1a
5
3d
3a
13 13 13
3c
4
16 17
3e
1b
1c

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.2 SAFETY DEVICES FOR THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR
When using the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector, you need to bear in mind that:
The battery charger is not a medical device and so must not be placed in the vicinity of
the patient.
The Wireless Access Point is not a medical device and so must not be placed in the
vicinity of the patient.
The figures here show the distances

considered to be in the vicinity of the
patient.
Keep all electronic devices (wireless or connected via cable) at least 1 metre from the
detector when in use.
The detector must not be used to support the patient: the detector must be placed on a
suitable surface, such as a table, bed or the floor, before applying the weight of the patient.
The label shown here shows the max weight limits to avoid damaging the detector:
100 kg 150 kg
Respect the following weight limits to prolong the life of the detector and reduce any
potential risk of damaging its parts:
- Max weight concentrated in a small area of the surface of the detector (80 mm in
diameter): not more than 100 kg.
- Max weight evenly distrubted across the entire surface of the detector: not more than
150 kg.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
See paragraph 4.1 in this part of the manual for details on how to clean the detector.
Place the detector in a protective bag if there is any risk of fluids coming into contact with
the detector. In this case, remember to remove the protective covering immediately after
use to prevent the detector from overheating.
Adjust the X-ray collimator carefully to limit the X-ray beam so that this falls only on the
sensitive surface of the detector when using the detector without a potter-bucky.
1.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR
PIXIUM 3543EZ Model PIXIUM 3543EZ

wireless detector Dimensions 383.5 x 459.5 x 15.5 mm
Weight 2.8 kg (including battery)
Receiver type Amorphous silicon
Conversion screen CsI
Acquisition time (typ.) 12 seconds
Working dose 0.5 - 5 µGy/frame
Pixel size 148 x 148 µm
Active area size 337 x 414 mm
Matrix 2400 x 2880 pixels
Resolution (max) 3.6 lp/mm
A/D conversion 16 bits
1.4 CABLES FOR THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR UNIT
diameter length
description code
[mm] [m]
Ethernet Switch POE / WI FI Access Point CAVORJ45-03 5 standard: 15

cabinet / ionising chamber standard: 15
70 01 140 7
(optional) optional: 25

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.5 DIMENSIONS OF THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR UNIT
1.5.1 DETECTOR AND BATTERY
BATTERY
Thickness: 7 mm
Weight: 0.2 kg
DETECTOR
Thickness: 16 mm
Weight: 2.6 kg
1.5.2 WI FI ACCESS POINT
Dlink ,model DAP-2553
Weight: 0.386 kg

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Weight: 1.04 Kg
1.5.3 BATTERY CHARGER
The battery charger is not a medical device and so must not be placed in the vicinity of the patient.
Simply place it on a workbench near a 100-240V AC, 50/60Hz mains socket (max consumption: 1A).
BATTERY CHARGER
Weight: 0.5 Kg

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
1.6 PACKAGING OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS
The system comes in 6 boxes:
Box Contents
1 PIXIUM RF4343 detector

Cabinet (Video Processor / Main Controller / PU 4343 / Detector power unit / General
2
power unit)
- Ionising chamber
- WI FI Access Point
- Cables
- Alphanumerical keyboard and Mouse
3
- Manuals
- DVD recorded (optional)
- IR remote control (optional)
4 Monitor
5 Cabinet top
- PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector
6 - Battery charger
- 2 detector batteries
4 3 5
6
2
1
System fitted with
1 PIXIUM RF4343 detector and
1 PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 01.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2 INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM FITTED WITH TWO DETECTORS

(PIXIUM RF4343 + WIRELESS 3543EZ)
2.1 INSTALLING THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR UNIT
The mobile PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector unit does not require installation.
Its overall dimensions and weight are shown in the figure below:
BATTERY
Thickness : 7 mm
Weight: 0.2 kg
DETECTOR
Thickness : 16 mm
Weight: 2.6 kg
The figure below shows the active area of the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.1.1 INSTALLING THE WI FI ACCESS POINT
The Access Point used for the detector’s wireless connection must be placed inside the area where
the detector is used. The distance between the Access Point and the detector is not critical, provided
there are no obstacles between them.
Weight: 0.386 kg
Weight: 1.04 Kg

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.1.1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE ACCESS POINT
Ethernet port
Reset
Power socket
Wall mounting slots
LED (on front)

Fig.1
LEDs The LEDs indicate the status of the power supply and the activity of the Access Point.
(see paragraph 4.5 in this part of the manual for details of these LEDs).
(Power Over Ethernet) providing power
Reset Use to reset the default settings in the event of a malfunction. Press for at least 5
seconds.
Power socket Power supply socket (NOT USED)
Console port
Ethernet port
Power socket
LED (on top)
LED The LEDs indicate the status of the power supply and the activity of the Access Point.
Power socket NOT USED
Console port NOT USED

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.1.1.2 WALL MOUNTING
We recommend connecting the Ethernet cable and then checking the efficiency of the Access Point
status LEDs before fixing the Access Point in a position that is not easily accessible.
Use the 2 screws and 2 wall plugs provided to fix the A.P.
Hang the A.P. on the screws using the appropriate bracket (see fig.1 in paragraph 2.4.1.1).
Connect the Ethernet cable supplied with the system (code CAVORJ45-03) to the Ethernet port on the
A.P.

P
To fix the CISCO AP to the wall:
Fix plate “A” to the wall using suitable
wall plugs (not provided).
Slot the AP onto this plate B
(the 4 feet “P” in slots “B”).
Connect the Ethernet cable
provided with the system
(code CAVORJ45-03) to the
Ethernet port on the AP. A
B P

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR UNIT
WI FI Access Point LAN Mains cable / Ethernet POE switch connection: LAN1
Ethernet POE Switch LAN1 Mains cable / WI FI Access Point connection

LAN3 Mains cable / PID connection:
B8-C1 (WIRELESS NETWORK)
Power supply 230 V AC - PIXIUM detector power unit: TB1
(always powered up)
LAN: Mains cable / Ethernet POE

switch connection: LAN1
Fig. 1a Fig. 1b
DLINK WI FI Access Point CISCO WI FI Access Point
LAN1: Mains cable / WI FI Access Point connection
LAN3: Mains cable / PID connection: B8-C1
Fig. 2
Power supply: 230V AC / 48V DC power unit connection
Ethernet POE Switch

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.2.1 OPTIONAL SECOND IONISING CHAMBER
If the optional “second ionising chamber” is fitted, the following electrical connections are foreseen in
the factory:
Electrical connections inside the Main Controller:
DA: A:
1 MCON01 - CM14 ICI 00-CM2 Connection to board ICI 00 for the first ionising
(parallel connection on first chamber chamber (PIXIUM RF43 detector).
both boards ICI00) Board ICI 00-CM2 Connection to board ICI 00 for the second
second chamber ionising chamber (PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless
detector).
2 ICI 00 – CM1 first ICI 00-CM1 second Power to board ICI 00 for the second ionising
ionising chamber ionising chamber chamber.
Electrical connections inside the RF43 cabinet:
DA: A:
1 ICI 00 –CM3 second Preamplifier for the Connection to the preamplifier for the second
ionising chamber second ionising ionising chamber.
chamber
Connection to the preamplifier for

the second ionising chamber
Board ICI for the Board ICI 00 for

first ionising the second
chamber. ionising chamber.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
nd
2 ionising chamber
Preamplifier for the second

ionising chamber

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3 VIDEO PROCESSOR SETUP –PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR
2.3.1 NETWORK CONNECTIONS
There are three network connections in a system fitted with two detectors:
- DICOM Network to connect to the local hospital network
- PU Network to connect to the PIXIUM RF4343 detector unit
- WIRELESS Network to connect to the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector unit
PU NETWORK
WIRELESS NETWORK DICOM NETWORK
The following setup procedure is normally only required after upgrading the system (single or
double detector) or after replacing the video processor.
If the SW version for the THALES detector is 2.3.4.0 or higher, the 2 network ports (PU and
WIRELESS) may be configured each with a separate IP ADDRESS:
PU NETWORK  IP ADDRESS: 192.168.0.3

WIRELESS NETWORK  IP ADDRESS: 10.0.1.251
Otherwise, you must give them the same IP ADDRESS = 10.0.1.251, in order to guarantee that the 2
network connections (PU Network and WIRELESS Network) work correctly.
In the latter case, follow the steps below to configure the network connections:
Before attempting to change the IP address of the video processor above, you must
check that IP Address for the PU RF4343 is IP 10.0.1.2.
(If this is not the case, change it as described in paragraph 2.7 in Part 5 of this manual).
• With the cabinet switched off, disconnect the cables attached to the network ports shown in the
figure below.
• Switch the system on and access the video processor, logging on as Administrator: username
Admin2, password ats_PED.24 (see paragraph 7.3 in Part 2).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Select the following tools from the Windows task-

bar:
- Start / Settings / Network Connections:
- The following window appears:
• Select the 2 networks (PU NETWORK

and WIRELESS NETWORK), right-click
on the mouse and then click on the
Bridge Connections command:
• Wait a few seconds for the Network

Bridge dialog box to close:
• The network connections are now as

shown:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Select the Network Bridge option,

right-click on the mouse and then click
on Properties:
• Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

option in the Network Bridge window:
• Set the IP address and Subnet mask

fields as shown in the figure and then
press OK.
The two network connections (PU NETWORK and WIRELESS NETWORK) are now set up
with the same IP ADDRESS = 10.0.1.251.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
• Close the Network Connection window.
• Select Start / Shut Down / Shut Down in the Windows task-bar and then switch off the cabinet.
• Reconnect the network connections you removed at the beginning of the procedure to their
respective ports.
In any case, the components of the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector unit will have the
same address type:
- PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector = 10.0.1.90
- WI FI Access Point = 10.0.1.249
• Switch the cabinet back on.
2.3.2 GENERAL SETUP
The figure and tables below show the different options in the General Setup menu for using the
PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector:
Hardware Settings
Settings
IP AccpBox To set the IP Address of the PU4343 module.
With THALES SW version prior to 2.3.4.0, set the IP address as
10.0.1.2 (see para..2.3.1 above for further details)
Otherwise, with THALES SW version 2.3.4.0 or higher, set the IP
address as given by the manufacturer: 192.168.0.2
Detectors
Settings
Enable Detector 2 Select to enable the 2nd detector and then select the type:
WIFI 3543EZ
Enable Detector Warnings Select to enable the detector alarm warnings
Detectors 2 Params Setup Open this menu to set the working parameters for the PIXIUM 3543EZ
wireless detector (see paragraph 2.3.3 below)

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.3 DETECTORS PARAMETERS SETUP
This lets you define the parameters used by the image acquisition system with the PIXIUM 3543EZ
wireless detector.
These parameters are already set in the factory with the following values.
• Sensibility Detector sensitivity: this value must coincide with that shown on
the relevant document in the detector technical bundle.
Do not change.
• Disable All Correction To disable all the corrections applied to the image acquired by the
detector.
Do not select.
• Disable Echo Line Correction To disable the Echo Line correction applied to the image acquired
by the detector.
Do not select.
• Enable Preview Image To enable the Preview Image option during acquisition of an image
by the detector.
Typically: enabled.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.4 EXAM SETUP – PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR
Access the management function for exam cards linked to the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector by
selecting Option / Setup / WD Exam Setup nd then entering the technical Password. The WD Exam
Setup Manager menu opens:
The Exam Setup cards for exposure using the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector are numbered with:
- the anatomical part, with an ID from 100 to 199,
- the projection type, with an ID from 00 to 99.
The “Go to card” function lets you select the card and open the relevant Exam Setup menu. This has
four groups of parameters, as shown below:
Exam ID parameters DICOM ID parameters
Miscellaneous
parameters
Exposure and display parameters
These parameters can be changed, as explained in the paragraphs that follow.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
2.3.4.1 CHANGING THE FREE PARAMETERS
You need to check which parameters are free for each exam and change these as required in the
exam card.
Settings Notes
To enable the patient Select at least one size. When a size is not
Size valid types for the exam. enabled (i.e. not
checked), the entire
column is disabled.
Miscellaneus
Properties
Settings Notes
To set the position of the You can set an integrated

Accessory Code workstation 0-8 stand (if foreseen) with
programmable positions.
See also paragraph 4.3.1 in
Part 2.
X / Y inversion of the Select if the X/Y display
XY Shutter Inversion display of the electronic of the electronic
collimators on the collimators is inverted
image. with respect to the
actual position.
Digital orientation of the This normally depends on
Flip Rotation Code image. Set to get the the orientation of the
correct orientation of the 0-7* detector on the patient.
image on the monitor. The table below shows what
the code means.
* Image orientation:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL

Dicom exam type identifying parameters used by the DICOM
Properties standard. These parameters are applied to the image
and the patient data every time the exam is saved or
printed in DICOM format.
Settings Notes
Use to set the default Select one of the given This parameter is only
Modality DICOM mode. fields: used when the mode used
CR to create the exam is not
DX already defined upon
receipt of the Worklist.
Protocol Procedure ID code To be agreed with the
network administrator.
Description Description of the To be agreed with the
exam. network administrator.
Body part to which the Select one of the given
Body Part exam refers. fields:
UNDEFINED
SKULL
CSPINE
TSPINE
LSPINE
SSPINE
COCCYX
CHEST
CLAVICLE
BREAST
ABDOMEN
PELVIS
HIP
SHOULDER
ELBOW
KNEE
ANKLE
HAND
FOOT
EXTREMITY
LEG
HEAD
HEART
JAW
ARM
NECK
Projection side Select one of the given
Laterality fields:
Undefined
Right
Left
Unpaired
Both L&R
Projection type Select one of the given
View fields:
Undefined
AP
PA
LL
RL
RLD
LLD
RLO
LLO

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Set the parameters for each programmed patient type (Size

Item valid).
Settings Notes
To set the X-ray dose for Typical working value:
Dose uGy exposure in radiography 0.5 - 10 µGy 2.5 µGy.
mode.
Optimal kV value for This value will be sent to the X-
kV exposure 40 - 150 kV ray generator when the exam is
opened.
Optimal mA values for The value is sent to the
mA exposure 1-1000 mA generator on opening the AEC
exam.
Optimal mAs value for Il The value is sent to the
mAs exposure. 1-1000 mAs generator on opening the NO
AEC exam.
To enable automatic Left

AEC Left control during AEC
AEC Center exposure by selecting at Center
AEC Right least one area of the
ionising chamber Right
Focus of the X-ray tube 0 = small focus This value will be sent to the X-
Focal Spot used for exposure. ray generator when the exam is
1 = large focus opened.
Envisaged focal distance The value will be sent to the
Focal distance for exposure. 80 - 250 cm remote control.
To set the image This factor will be used by the

Calibration Factor enlargement factor system for TRUE SIZE printing
(depending on the focal 1.0 - 1.5 and default calibration of the
distance and the distance measurements on the image.
between the object and
the detector).
This value will be sent to the
0 = no grid stand when the exam is opened
Grid Anti-scatter grid to be 1 = grid 1 .
used. 2 = grid 2 the value is then compared with
the actual grid to enable
exposure.
To select the X-ray beam 0 = no filter This value will be sent to the
Rx Filter hardening filter in the 1 = filter 1 collimator when the exam is
collimator. 2 = filter 2 opened.
3 = filter 3
Screen selector X Horizontal aperture of the This value will be sent to the
X-ray collimator. 1 - 43 cm collimator when the exam is
opened.
Screen selector Y Vertical aperture of the X- This value will be sent to the
ray collimator. 1 - 43 cm collimator when the exam is
opened.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Note: In the case of an integrated X-ray generator, the kV, mAs and Focal Spot parameters are
automatically sent to the X-ray generator.
The values of the mAs parameter set here must match that envisaged by the X-ray generator
scales.
Even if the generator is not integrated, it is important that these parameters are set
correctly, as they are a guide for the operator, who can view them by pressing a symbol
in the working frame:
2.3.4.3 DISPLAY PARAMETERS
This section of the Exam Setup menu contains the

will be displayed.
Settings Settings
View negative To select Select to suit exam A radiography image is

positive/negative display normally shown as a
of the image. negative.
of the collimated images
Fill Size to fit the max size Select to suit exam
permitted by the
monitor.
1.0 = full screen (entire
detector area).
Default image zoom 3.0 = an area of about

Geometric mag. factor on monitor. 1.0 - 3.0 14x14 cm on the detector
(1 pixel on the monitor = 1
pixel on the detector).
Nom. Field + Fill Size Parameter not usable.
Do not select.
Nom. Field + Geom Mag. Parameter not usable.
Do not select.
Field View Ext. Parameter not usable.
Do not select.
To identify the This parameter appears in
Post Processing envisaged radiography P.P. Name the list of processes
image processing preset in the factory.
parameters for the
exam.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 02.doc
MANUALE TECNICO
3 PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR CALIBRATION AND CHECKS
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector is normally calibrated in the factory to check its efficiency and
functioning.
You do, however, need to update the calibration during installation in order to adapt this to the actual
X-ray beam conditions in the radiological system.
This basically consists in updating the gain parameters associated to each pixel of the detector and in
identifying any defective pixels.
There are 2 stages to the calibration procedure, automatically carried out in this order:
1. GAIN calibration which lets you:

- establish the gain factor to be associated to each pixel,
Calibration involves acquiring 10 images at the default dose value set by the manufacturer of the
detector.
2. DEFECT MAP calibration that lets you:

- find any other defective pixels with a non linear response.
This calibration is done using 4 X-ray exposures at various default doses set by the manufacturer of
the detector.
The system-guided calibration procedure therefore involves 10 exposures at the same dose (Gain)
and 3 exposures at differing doses (Defect Map).
The ThalesCal software provided with the system is used to calibrate and check the detector.
revisione 0 SEZIONE 7 pag. 3.1

codice 87 80 014C - Mti S7 03.doc
MANUALE TECNICO
3.1.1 THALESCAL CALIBRATION PROGRAM
The PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector is calibrated using the ThalesCal program, which basically acts
as detector/user interface. This involves sending calibration commands and displaying the resulting
images.
The ThalesCal program can only be accessed

at Administrator level (see Annex 7.3 in Part 2)
by selecting the relevant icon on the desktop.
The main working frame opens, letting you:

- check the detector status and setup,
- select the calibration commands (tools),
- acquire images.

MANUALE TECNICO
3.2 CONNECTING TO THE DETECTOR
In order to calibrate the detector, the video processor must be connected to the detector. After running
the ThalesCal application, proceed as follows:
1) Select Options / Configuration in the menu bar:
2) Check that the settings are the same as those shown in the figure below and then click on OK.
3) Select File / Open… in the menu bar:
4) Select the “digitec_3543EZ.tcf” setup file:

“C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ ApplicationData\Digitec\Pixrad\Pixarad-3.50.1\config\
digitec_3543EZ/”
and click on Open.

MANUALE TECNICO
5) Wait about 15 seconds for the processor to connect with the detector. Connection is successful
when the application displays the updated detector data in the central part of the screen:

MANUALE TECNICO
3.3 DETECTOR STATUS INDICATIONS
Once connected, you can view the detector status parameters.
1) Select the “System Status” tab in the left-hand box and check the detector status:

MANUALE TECNICO
2) Select the “Acquisition Mod ” tab in the same box and check that the settings are the same as
those shown below:

MANUALE TECNICO
3.4 DETECTOR SETUP
Before actually calibrating the detector, we recommend checking its correct setup:
1) Select the “Logical mode configuration” tab in the right-hand box and check that the current
Logical Mode is only the first in the list (Logical mode 0):

MANUALE TECNICO
3.5 LOADING AND ACTIVATING THE LOGICAL MODE
You must first activate the logical mode before you can calibrate this.
To do this:
1) Select the “Logical modes manager” tab in the right-hand box: the only available Logical Mode
appears:

MANUALE TECNICO
2) To activate the logical mode:
- Select the Logical Mode with your mouse and then right-click to select this command:
Activate logical mode:
- The selected Logical Mode is now listed as “active”:
3) To deactivae the Logical Mode:
- Select the Logical Mode with your mouse and then right-click to select this command:
Deactivate logical mode:

MANUALE TECNICO
3.6 CALIBRATING THE DETECTOR
It is essential that the detector is calibrated properly, i.e.:

- at the exposure values foreseen by the detector,
- for the most even X-ray beam conditions,
- with the detector completely covered by the X-ray beam.
There is the risk of acquiring incorrect images if these conditions are not met.
The detector calibration procedure is split into 3 stages:

- finding the exposure values
- calibration
- defect map analysis
3.6.1 FINDING THE EXPOSURE VALUES
To calibrate the detector, you need to know beforehand the useful radiological parameters for
exposing the detector to the required doses during calibration.
The table below lists the X-ray parameters used in the factory. These may be used for calibration
purposes provided you keep to the same filtering and focal distance (SID) conditions.
Typical X-ray parameters

Image level
Dose used in the factory with:
Calibration (µGy)
Range
- filter: 21 mm Al
(LSB)
- SID: 120cm
GAIN 11000 - 16500 70kV, 160mA, 100ms

25 µGy
(10 Exposures) (typ. 13750) (16mAs)
DEFECT MAP 1 1045 - 1705 70kV,160mA, 10ms

2,5 µGy
(Single Exposure) (typ. 1375) (1,6mAs)
DEFECT MAP 2 2035 - 3465 70kV, 160mA, 20ms

5 µGy
(Single Exposure) (typ. 2750) (3,2mAs)
DEFECT MAP 3 20625 - 34375 70kV, 160mA, 200ms

50 µGy
(Single Exposure) (typ. 27500) (32mAs)
To find these parameters (X-ray filter and generator exposure values), you can use a function that lets
you measure the levels of an acquired image (and hence the exposure dose). To do this:
1) Select the “Logical modes manager” tab in the right-hand box and activate the Logical Mode (see
paragrapg 3.5 above):

MANUALE TECNICO
2) Select Acquisition / Acquire X-Ray image in the menu bar:
3) The Acquire frame window appears:
4) Press the X-ray command to acquire an image.

The Frame field in the Status box shows the following messages in this order:
- image reception
- end of acquisition

MANUALE TECNICO
5) The image is then shown (enlarged) after a few seconds in the central “LastFrame“ box. Turn the
central scroll wheel on the mouse to view the full image:
6) If you want a clearer view of the image: select the “Properties” tab in the left-hand box and then
use your mouse to move the slider in the High Limit (Contrast window) field:

MANUALE TECNICO
7) To check the level of the image pixels:

- select the “Statistic” tab in the left-hand box,
- take the mouse pointer to the image and move this within the image,
- the level of each single pixel is shown in the Mean value field:
8) If necessary, you can change the exposure values to get the image levels you require.
9) Make a note of the radiological parameters used (X-ray filter and generator exposure values), as
the system will ask you to set these during the calibration procedure.

MANUALE TECNICO
3.6.2 X-RAY CALIBRATION
Calibration involves making 13 X-ay exposures set by the system:

- even X-ray beam filtering Rx,
- collimator open enough to completely irradiate the detector.
These two conditions are indispensable for correct GAIN calibration and the correct detection of any
defective pixels.
The exposure dose must be that specified, i.e. enough to generate image levels within the set range.
Otherwise calibration may not be effective.
You must therefore find the dose level before starting the calibration procedure: acquire some images
and read their level (LSB), as described in paragraph 3.6.1 above.
To calibrate:
1) Select the “Logical modes manager” tab in the right-hand box and activate the Logical Mode
(see paragraoh 3.5 above):
2) Select the “Calibration” tab in the same box:

MANUALE TECNICO
3) Take your mouse pointer to the Logical Mode you want to calibrate and then right-click and select
the “X-Ray calibration” command:
4) Click on Start in the Xray calibration page that now appears to start the actual calibration
procedure:
- Progress of calibration is shown by the progress bar:

MANUALE TECNICO
5) The Exposure setup window appears when the system is ready for acquisition of the 10 GAIN
images, indicating the dose level required for X-ray exposure (25uGy/frame):
6) After setting the exposure parameters (see previous paragraph) on the X-ray generator for the 10
GAIN acquisition, press the PREP + RAD commands (exposure is not activated) to continue.
7) When this message appears:
Press the PREP + RAD commands (within 6 sec) to get X-ray exposure.
8) Repeat for the next 9 exposures at the same dose value.

MANUALE TECNICO
9) The following message appears if an acquisition is unsuccessful:
Press Yes to repeat the exposure (without cancelling the entire calibration).
10) Once you have acquired the 10 GAIN images, the “Exposure setup” page appears, showing the
parameters previously found for X-ray exposure of the DEFECT MAP 1 (2.5uGy/frame):
11) After setting the correct new parameters on the X-ray generator, press the PREP + RAD
commands (exposure is not activated) to continue.
12) The system now acquires a single image at the set dose.
13) When this message appears:
Press the PREP + RAD commands (within 6 sec) to get X-ray exposure.
14) Repeat steps 10, 11, 12 and 13 above for the other 2 DEFECT MAP exposures, at different dose
values:
- DEFECT MAP 2: 5uGy/frame
- DEFECT MAP 3: 50uGy/frame

MANUALE TECNICO
15) Once you have acquired the last image, the Calibration terminated successfully message
appears if the calibration has been successful:
16) Nel riquadro di destra Select the “Calibration” tab in the right-hand box and check that the date
and time of the new calibration appear next to the calibrated Logical Mode:

MANUALE TECNICO
3.7 DEFECT MAP ANALYSIS
After calibrating the detector, the defect pixel map image shows the position of any bad (defective)
pixels on the surface of the detector.
To view this map:
1) Select Acquisition / Retrieve defect map in the menu bar:
2) The map for the active Logical Mode is received from the detector within a few seconds and then
displayed in the central DefectMap box:

MANUALE TECNICO
3) To view all the bad pixels in the map, select the Properties tab in the left-hand box and then:
- set: “False” in the Show low saturation and Show high saturation fields
- set: “0” in the High Limit (Contrast window) field

TECHNICAL MANUAL
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 CLEANING THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR
The PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector may be used in direct contact with the patient and so needs to
be cleaned properly.
To clean the detector:
- Disconnect the detector from its power supply by removing its battery.
- Use a solution of neutral soap and water to clean.

First apply the soapy solution to a clean cloth and then clean the detector. Do not apply the soapy
solution directly to the detector: it might penetrate and damage the device.
To clean the battery compartment:
- Remove dust and dirt from the battery compartment using a soft cloth,
- Use a toothbrush or vacuum cleaner to clean the contacts on the side of the battery compartment
(alternatively, contact the Technical Service).
Never place in the detector in water or other liquids.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2 REPLACING COMPONENTS IN THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR UNIT
4.2.1 REPLACING THE DETECTOR
Each PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector is supplied with a conformity assessment document
containing the detector data (needed for its setup):
- its serial number ( e.g.: 1241B0 )
- its sensitivity ( e.g.: 0.58  580 lsb/µGy )
The IP Address for the static PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector set in the factory is always
192.168.1.3 (all detectors), which needs to be changed in the case of equipment fitted with two
detectors, using another IP Address compatible with the Wireless Network in the system to ensure
that there is no conflict with the IP Address used for the dynamic PIXIUM RF4343 detector.
If you need to replace the detector:
1) Switch the equipment on and log in on the video processor as the Administrator (see Annex 7.3 in
Part 2 of this manual).
2) Temporarily disconnect the cables from the DICOM NETWORK, PU NETWORK and WIRELESS
NETWORK sockets and check that the Access Point is off.
3) Connect the “back-up cable” (supplied with the detector) between the detector and the WIRELESS
NETWORK (leave the third circular connector free).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4) Insert a fully charged battery in the detector and wait a minute or so for this to come on properly.
5) Change the IP Address for the Video processor used for the WIRELESS NETWORK by selecting,
Working IP Address for the PID: 10.0.1.251  Temporary IP Address: 192.168.1.5

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
6) Run the “pixrad-ipconfig.exe” program from the Windows task-bar:

Start / Program Files / ThalesCal:
7) Select the detector type in the Detector box:

Px3543EZ-Px2430EZ
8) Set the IP Adresses in the Configuration

box:
- Detector: 192.168.1.3
- Host: 192.168.1.5/24
Then press “Connect”

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
9) Change the IP Addresses in the Configuration

box once connection has been made:
- Detector: 10.0.1.90
- Host: 10.0.1.251/24
Then press “Update & disconnect”
10) Close the application once the detector has

been updated with the new IP Address and
disconnected.
11) Edit the Detector3543EZ.ini file in this folder: “C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\
Application Data\Digitec\Pixrad\Pixarad-3.50.1\config\digitec_3543EZ”,
and set the correct sensitivity parameter (found in the detector documents). Save the file.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
12) Open the HIRIS RF43 application and carry out these steps:
- select Option / Setup / General Setup and then the Detectors 2 Params Setup button,
- change the Sensibility (see paragraph 2.3.3 in this part of the manual) using that of the new
detector.
- close the HIRIS RF43 application.
13) Rename the 2 files in the Video Processor folder:

“C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\ApplicationData\ Digitec\Pixrad\Pixarad3.50.1\references”
using the serial number of the new detector:
⇒ 1° file: xxx_DefectMapRef_DetMode3_0.fxd
(es: 1241B0_DefectMapRef_DetMode3_0.fxd  1325G4_DefectMapRef_DetMode3_0.fxd)
⇒ 2° file: xxx_ GainLinRef _DetMode3_0.fxd
(es: 1241B0_GainLinRef_DetMode3_0.fxd  1325G4_ GainLinRef_DetMode3_0.fxd)
NETWORK (changed at point 5 above): 10.0.1.251

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
After setting the new IP ADDRESS for the detector, you need to set up the WIRELESS NETWOK
parameters, as follows:
15) Run the “pixrad- viewer.exe” program from the Windows task-bar:
Start / Program Files / ThalesCal:
Select “Pixrad Demo”:
16) Select the “Open...” command in the System tab in the new Pixrad Demo page:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
17) Then select folder “C:\Documents and Settings\AllUsers\ApplicationData\

Digitec\Pixrad\Pixarad-3.50.1\config\digitec_3543EZ”
and press the “Choose” command:
18) Once the detector is connected (see box below), select the Wifi tab:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
19) Enter the wireless network parameters in the Wifi tab: - SSID : TH3543EZ
- Password : pixium3543
Press the “Switch” command:
20) Once the detector has been updated with the new network settings (see box below), select the
System tab, press the “Close” command and then close the application:
21) Switch the detector off by pressing (for about

5 seconds) the button next to the warning
LEDs:
Button

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
22) Disconnect the “back-up cable” from the detector and the WIRELESS NETWORK socket.
23) Reconnect the cables to the DICOM NETWORK, PU NETWORK and WIRELESS NETWORK
sockets and then switch the Access Point on.
24) Wait about 2 minutes and then switch the detector back on using its ON/OFF button and check
that the warning LEDs are as follows:
- STATUS LED starts flashing orange.
- after about 1 minute, the 3 LEDs become steady, with these colours:
- STATUS LED: orange
- BATTERY LED: green
- WIFI LED: green
Note: If the WIFI LED is green, it means connection to the wireless network is successful; if orange,
you need to repeat the entire setup procedure.
25) Perform the entire calibration procedure for the new detector as explained in chapter 3 above.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.2.2 REPLACING THE ETHERNET POE SWITCH
When setting the Wireless network parameters for the new Ethernet POE Switch, you need to foresee
the use of 2 different models:
- 3CNJ1000
- 3CNJ2000
The Ethernet switch model 3CNJ1000 does not require any setup.
To set up the Ethernet switch model 3CNJ2000 with the wireless network parameters:
- temporarily change the IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS NETWORK,
using an address compatible with that for the switch itself, so that the two devices can
communicate with each other.
- Then change the IP Address for the switch.
- End the procedure by restoring the original IP Address for the PID.
To do this:
1) Find the IP Address of the switch indicated in its installation guide (e.g.: 169.254.1.251).
2) With the system switched off, replace the old switch with the new one and then connect this as
3) Temporarily disconnect the cables in the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK sockets.
keyboard down when the system boots up (see paragraph 7.3 in Part 2 of this manual).
5) Change the IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS NETWORK by selecting
(see procedure explained in paragraph 2.3.1 in this part of the manual).
7) Enter the new IP Address for the Switch

then press Enter.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
8) Enter the password “password” in the

page that now appears and then click on
Login.
9) Select SYSTEM / LAN Settings in the next page to change the Switch’s network settings:
10) Change the parameters in the Change IP Address table as shown below and then click on
Apply.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
11) Click on OK in the confirmation window

and then close the settings window.
12) The IP Address of the Ethernet POE Switch is now correctly set: 10.0.1.250
14) Reconnect the cables in the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK sockets.
15) Run the HIRIS RF43 application and check that the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector connects
correctly with the system.
4.2.3 REPLACING THE WI FI ACCESS POINT
To set the Wireless network parameters for the Access Point (A.P.):
- Temporarily change the IP Address for the Video Processor (PID) used for the WIRELESS
NETWORK, using an address that is compatible with that of the A.P. so that the two elements
can communicate with each other.
- Then change the IP Address for the Access Point.
- End the procedure by restoring the original working IP Address for the PID.
To do this:
1) Find the IP Address of the A.P. indicated in its installation guide (e.g.: 192.168.0.50).
2) With the system switched off, replace the old A.P. with the new one and then connect this as
3) Temporarily disconnect the cables from the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK sockets.
keyboard down when the system boots up (see Annex 7.3 in Part 2 of this manual).
5) Change the working IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS NETWORK, by
selecting in the Windows task-bar:
(see procedure explained in paragraph 2.3.1 in this part of the manual).

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
7) Enter the new IP Address for the A.P.

then press Enter.
8) The web browser automatically opens with the A.P. access page. Enter admin as the User Name,
leave the Password field empty and click on Login:
9) The main section of the page shows all the general Access Point information.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
10) Select the MAINTENANCE / CONFIGURATION FILE menu to load the wireless network settings
via a setup file saved on the video processor system disk:
11) You need to specify the path for this file in order to load the A.P. settings.
Click on Browse:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
12) The Choose File to Upload window appears:
13) Select the path: My Computer / System (C:) / AP Restore DAP2553 (detettore 3543EZ)
Then select the file: config.dcf and click on Open.
The file path appears in the main page:
14) After loading the setup file, click on Upload and confirm with OK when asked to confirm this
operation:
15) The A.P. setup “Restore” procedure now starts. Do not switch the equipment off and wait for the
operation to terminate (this takes about one minute).
16) The following page appears once the “Restore” procedure is terminated. You can now close the
setup page:

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
17) To check whether the network settings have been loaded correctly, access the A.P. with the new
IP address. To do this:
- Restore the original working IP Address for the Video Processor used for the WIRELESS
- Start Windows Explorer by selecting: Start / Programs / Accessories / Windows Explorer,
then enter the new IP Address for the A.P. in the Address bar (10.0.1.249) and press Enter.
18) The Wireless connection settings are correct if the web browser automatically opens with the A.P.
access page.
Enter admin as the User Name, leave the Password field empty and click on Login.
19) Select the BASIC SETTINGS / WIRELESS menu in the main page and then check that the
network called TH3543EZ is listed:
20) Click on Logout to disconnect the A.P. and close the setup window.
21) Reconnect the cables in the DICOM NETWORK and PU NETWORK sockets.
Run the HIRIS RF43 application and check that the PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector is
connected to the system.
We advise against trying to reconfigure the Cisco AP in situ.

If the AP needs to be replaced, you should buy the AP indicated above from the manufacturer
(configured correctly for the HIRIS RF43 system).
The new AP is ready to use (no further settings required.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.3 SPARE-PARTS LIST FOR THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR UNIT
N. DESCRIPTION CODE NOTES

1 PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector DT 85 110
(complete with battery charger and 2 batteries)
2 Battery DT 85 411
3 Battery charger DT 85 410

- cable for detector DT 85 301
- battery charger power unit DT 85 412
4a CISCO WI FI Access Point HW 86 902

D-Link WI FI Access Point HW 86 901
5 Ethernet POE Switch HW 85 902
4a 4b
5
2

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.4 LEDS ON THE PIXIUM 3543EZ WIRELESS DETECTOR
There are 3 warning LEDs on one side of the detector, together with an ON/OFF button-
Push button
Name Symbol Colour / Status Description

- No battery
Off - Detector switched off
- Detector starting up
Orange: - Battery level less than 5% its full charge
Battery fast flashing
Orange - Battery level between 5% and 10% its full charge
Green - Battery level more than 10% its full charge

- WIFI disabled
- Detector starting up
Wifi Orange - Detector not connected to the Access Point
Green - Detector connected to the Access Point
Orange:
- Internal error
slow flashing
Status Orange - Operating mode: OFFLINE
Green:
- Operating mode: IN STANDBY
slow flashing
Green - Operating mode: READY

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
4.5 LEDS ON THE WI FI ACCESS POINT
POWER 5GHz 2.4GHz LAN
Name Colour Status Description
POWER Green On On and ready to work

5GHz Green

2.4GHz Green
On Connection made
LAN Green
Flashing Connection activity
Normal working conditions:

- POWER: On
- 5GHz: Flashing
- 2.4GHz: Off
- LAN: Flashing
STATUS LED

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Green light, flashing The AP is switching on

Green light, steady The AP is ready, but no clients are connected
Blue light, steady The AP is ready and clients are connected
Other combinations Attention: There is a problem with the AP
4.6 LEDS ON THE BATTRY CHARGER
green LED
red LED
Name Colour / Status Description

Green,
Battery charging
flashing
Charging
Green Battery fully charged
Charging status Red Battery charging not possible
The life of the battery may be reduced if the battery is removed from its charger before the
battery has been fully charged.
Place the battery charger in a well-ventilated area.

code 87 80 014C - Mti S7 04.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TEST SHEET
The individual checks/tests are identified by an alphanumerical code.
Code Operation Result
Cable and connector checks:

Inspect each cable and connector, checking for signs of damage or crushing
Cables outside the cabinet:

TS1 System power cable
TS2 PIXIUM RF4343 detector power cable
Cables and connectors between the PU Rf4343 and the PIXIUM RF4343 detector
TS3
(optic fibre / data interface)
TS4 Cable and connectors between the ionising chamber and the Main Controller
TS5 Cable and connector for the Dose Area Meter (optional)
TS6 Monitor power cables and connectors
TS7 Monitor video cables and connectors
TS8 Cables and connectors between the cabinet and keyboard + mouse (via extender module)
TS9 X-ray generator cable and connectors
TS10 Accessory cable and connectors
TS11 DICOM network cable and connectors
TS12 DVD recorder cable and connectors (optional)
Cables inside the cabinet:

TS13 PID power cable and connector
TS14 PU RF4343 power cable and connector
TS15 Main Controller power cable and connector
TS16 Cables and connectors between the PID and the Main Controller
TS18 Cables and connectors between the PID and the PU RF4343
Extra cables for the system fitted with two detectors:

TS19 WI FI Access Point cable and connectors
TS20 Ethernet POE Switch cable and connectors
TS21 Tether box cable and connectors (optional: for DRX1 wireless detector only)
TS22 Battery charger power cable and connector
Mechanical checks:
- Fixing of the main components: look for loose screws (cabinet, detector unit, etc.).
- Integrity of the protection devices for the main components: look for signs of damage or dents
that may affect the efficiency and safety of the EM equipment.
TS21 Mechanical integrity of the cabinet

TS22 Mechanical integrity of the monitors
TS23 Fixing of the PIXIUM RF4343 detector unit to its support
TS24 Fixing of the Dose Area Meter
revision A page 1
code 87 80 014C - Mti test sheet.doc
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Basic electrical checks:
Switch the equipment off using the 2 ON/OFF switches on the theatre power unit: acquisition
system and detector power switches (see paragraph 3.3.4 in Part 2)
Open the cabinet
TS31 Check the general state of the cabinet boards and components (dirt and corrosion)
TS32 Check the impedance between the main earth terminal on power unit GP1 (inside the
cabinet) and the earth screw on the detector (check this by detaching the power connector
on the detector)
- The value should be less than 0.1 ohm -
Close the cabinet
TS33 Check the power rating for the plant

Switch the EM equipment on
TS34 Make sure that the fan belonging to the video processor is working properly and that its air
vents are not obstructed
TS35 Make sure that the fan belonging to the PU module is working properly and that its air vents
are not obstructed
TS36 Check that the monitors are working properly
Wait for the HIRIS RF43 application to boot and then open a new study
Select an exam, insert a suitable phantom and then get an exposure
TS37 Check that the image is shown correctly

TS38 Use at least one “Processing” command and check that it works properly
System quality checks:

Below is a list of the various operations needed to check the efficiency of the system
See the “Installation” and “Maintenance” parts of this manual in the event of an anomaly
TS41 Detector calibration
Procedure: - PIXIUM RF4343 detector: see chapter 5 in Part 2 of the Technical Manual
- Wireless DRX1 detector: see chapter 3 in Part 6 of the Technical Manual
- PIXIUM 3543EZ wireless detector: see chapter 3 in Part 7 of the

Technical Manual
Radiography mode checks:
TS42 X-ray dose intensity in the air (automatic exposure meter control)
Reference values: There are no regulated reference values.

ATS has adopted variable X-ray dose reference values of between
0.5 and 5 µGy / frame
Procedure: Check at both 0.5 and 5 µGy following the ionising chamber
calibration procedure, explained in paragraph 5.2 of Part 5 in this
manual.
Measure the values at the leading edge (input) of the detector.
revision A page 2
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TS43 Precision and constancy of the automatic exposure control
Reference values: ATS has adopted the procedure in the CEI EN 60601-2-7
standard, paragraph 50.102.1-b, by comparing the results of the
measurements of the image video levels obtaining using
phantoms of different thicknesses in 3 cases:
1 – different phantom thicknesses
2 – different kV
3 – repeating exposures under the same exposure conditions.
st
Procedure 1 check: - Set 70 kV and 100 mA.
- Insert the first phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 10 mm thick) and
give the radiography command and then use the Image Statistic
menu (see Annex 5.1 in Part 5 of this manual) to find the grey
level at the centre of the image.
- Insert a second phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 21 mm thick)
and again give the radiography command; find the grey level at
the centre of the image.
- Check that the difference between the mean grey level in the
images is not more than 20%.
nd
Procedure 2 check: - Insert a phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 21 mm thick).
- Set 60 kV, give the radiography command and then use the
Image Statistic to find the grey level at the centre of the image.
- Repeat at 80 kV.
- Repeat at 120 kV.
rd
Procedure 3 check: - Insert a phantom (ATS uses an Al plate, 21 mm thick).
- Set 70 kV and 100 mA, give the radiography command and then
use the Image Statistic to find the grey level at the centre of the
image.
- Repeat 3 more times under the same conditions.
Reference values: ATS has adopted the "FUNK type 18 resolution test" phantom:
check that the test results are close to those indicated in the Test
Report attached to the EM equipment.
Procedure: - Phantom at 45° in the centre of the detector field.

- Give the fluoroscopy command, setting the kV to get the best
image.
- Find the best image resolution on the monitor.
- Repeat the test placing the phantom close to the 4 corners of the
detector field and then compare the values with that indicated on
the system Test Report.
Continuous fluoroscopy mode checks (PIXIUM RF4343 detector only):
TS45 X-ray dose intensity in the air

ATS has adopted an X-ray dose reference value of 35 µR/s
(equivalent to 306 nGy/s) at 70 kV for field 43x43 cm, 50 µR/s (437
nGy/s) for field 30x30 cm and 75 µR/s (874 nGy/s) for field 20x20 cm.
Procedure: Measure the working doses as per the procedure in paragraph 5.4 of
Part 5.
revision A page 3
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Procedure: - Phantom at 45° in the centre of the detector field, 43x43 cm.
- Give the continuous fluoroscopy command, setting the kV to get
the best image.
- Find the best image resolution on the monitor and then compare
the value with that indicated on the system Test Report.
- Repeat for fields 30x30 cm and 20x20 cm.
Pulsed HCF fluoroscopy mode checks (PIXIUM RF4343 detector only):
TS47 X-ray dose intensity in the air

ATS has adopted an X-ray dose reference value of 4 µR/s (equivalent
to 35 nGy/frame) at 70 kV for field 43x43 cm, 6 µR/s (52.4 nGy/frame)
for fields 30x30 cm and 20x20 cm.
Procedure: Measure the working doses as per the procedure in paragraph 5.4 of
Part 5.
Procedure: - Phantom at 45° in the centre of the detector field, 43x43 cm.
- Give the pulsed fluoroscopy command, setting the kV to get the
best image.
- Find the best image resolution on the monitor and then compare
the value with that indicated on the system Test Report.
- Repeat for fields 30x30 cm and 20x20 cm.
Saving the setup:

(Needed if the system calibration and setup parameters have been changed.)
TS51 Update the spare hard disk

(Procedure: see paragraph 5.7 in Part 5)
TS52 Create the back-up CD/DVD
(Procedure: see paragraph 5.8 in Part 5)
Observations: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….……
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..……
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..……
Date: ……………… Operator’s signature: …………………………………………………….
revision A page 4
FID / Document identification CTD / Type VS / Release
1/3
61665525 108 B
PIXIUM FE 4343 [R or F]
Storage, Handling and Packing instructions
This document provides instructions for inspection, storage, unpacking and re-packing
PIXIUM FE 4343 [R or F] detector shipment. Please read this manual carefully before any handling of
the delivered material.
1. Inspection of the incoming shipment

Refer to labels attached to the outside of the cardboard box for an explanation of the information
provided by the shock indicator attached to the outer cardboard box.
Check the state of the outer box and the shock indicator. In case of an activated shock indicator or outer
box damage event, do not refuse the parcel : the above events do not necessarily mean that the content is
damaged. Indicate on the invoice and enclosed shipping documents that the shock indicator is activated
or that the outer box is damaged.
2. Storage and handling instructions

Refer to the Unpacking Instruction Label attached to the outer cardboard box for the storage and
handling conditions of the incoming shipment (stacking limitations, environmental temperature and
humidity, pressure, etc...).
The detector must be stored and handled within its original larger outer cardboard box. Do not open this
outer box if there is no need.
While not used nor powered, the detector should be stored within the inner protective bag resealed or
reclosed with an adhesive tape, and using desiccant material inside the bag to avoid any humidity on the
detector.
3. Unpacking instructions
The cardboard box and the inner protective bag have to be opened with care in order to be reused.
Unpacking procedure :
a) Open the cardboard box using the two fasteners on the front side of the box.
b) Remove the inner protective bag from the box (See next page for continuation of instructions).
! ! ! CAUTION ! ! !
Do not open the inner protective bag before a sufficient acclimatization time. The acclimatization
time is specified as 7h30 hours (minimum). It is mandatory to remove the detector from the
cardboard box during this time – however do not under any condition open the sealed protective
bag during this time. Refer to the PIXIUM FE 4343 [R or F] specification for storage conditions
(environmental temperature and humidity, etc...) of the detector once the protective bag has been
opened at the end of this acclimatization time.
c) In order to open the inner protective bag, cut off only the sealed part of the bag.
d) Immediately after opening the inner protective bag, check and note the value provided by humidity
indicator placed inside the bag.
CONFIDENTIEL TRIXELL
Copyright © 2007, 2011 TRIXELL. Tous droits réservés. Ce document et l’information qu’il contient sont la propriété exclusive de
TRIXELL. Ils ne peuvent être reproduits ou divulgués sous quelque forme que ce soit sans l’accord préalable écrit de TRIXELL.
TRIXELL PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
Copyright © 2007, 2011 by TRIXELL. All rights reserved. This document and the information contained therein are TRIXELL’s
exclusive property. Any copy and/or disclosure thereof in any form whatsoever are subject to TRIXELL’s prior written consent.
2/3
61665525 108 B
e) A digital readout thermometer is placed inside the inner cardboard box, to record max and min
temperatures during transport and storage. To read these temperatures, just press MAX/MIN push-
button and note the indications. Refer to the PIXIUM FE 4343 [R or F] specification for specified
temperature values.
f) Keep the following original parts in a secure place in case of detector return :
- cardboard box,
- foams,
- digital thermometer,
as well as a new inner protective bag (with Velcro strip) which contains a small sealed bag with
desiccant material bag and a new humidity indicator. DO NOT OPEN this small sealed bag as it will be
used in the case of any detector return. Take care to not apply undo shocks to the shipping containers
even if empty.
4. Re-packing instructions
All the original parts of the packing have to be used for any shipment of the detector. In case of detector
return, a set of repacking material is delivered within the original detector package. Do not use the old
desiccant material which was found inside the sealed inner protective bag ! Open the small sealed bag
(see above) and place the contents with the detector just before closing the new bag.
Packing procedure (see pictures in appendix) :
a) Introduce the detector inside the new protective bag.
b) Place the new desiccant material bag close to the detector .
c) Open the protective sealed bag of the new humidity indicator, and place it inside the bag.
d) Close the new protective bag (with Velcro strip) as indicated on the return instructions label stuck on
the bag.
e) Reset the digital readout thermometer placed inside the cardboard box by pressing the MEM
pushbutton.
f) Place the protective bag inside the original cardboard box, using the foam provided with original
shipment.
g) Re-close the cardboard box using the two fasteners.
3/3
61665525 108 B
5. Appendix : packing pictures
Empty box with digital readout thermometer :
Detector in its protective bag (Velcro strip) placed inside the cardoard box :
END OF DOCUMENT

JUNO I Technical Manual (87 80 014C - 03!12!14)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JUNO I Technical Manual (87 80 014C - 03!12!14)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EN

pages rev. date

0.1 to 0.9 B 30/08/13

revision B PART 0 page I - 1

2 IDENTIFICATION / SERIAL NUMBERS

The serial number is also marked on the Main Controller module.

MAIN CONTROLLER for

Line : 230V~50/60Hz - system : 700VA

- n°1 label copy is outside (see picture ).

edition B PART 0 page I - 2

Component Serial no. Position Figure

Solid state detector Supplier’s Visible, on device Fig. 1

Solid state detector

PU RF4343 serial number

PIDRF43 serial number

edition B PART 0 page I - 3

DAM serial number

Ionising chamber serial number

edition B PART 0 page I - 4

3543EZ wireless F.P. detector serial

edition B PART 0 page I - 5

The system is produced by:

ATS Applicazione Tecnologie Speciali srl

Distribuited by: VILLA Sistemi Medicali

EN 60 601-1 (3^ ed.)

edition B PART 0 page I - 6

PART 0: LIST OF CONTENTS

Part 1: GENERAL DESCRIPTION

page rev. date

CONTENTS C-1 to C-2 H 03/12/14

1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT 1.1 to 1.8 C 14/07/14

2 TECHNICAL DATA 2.1 to 2.21 G 03/12/14

revision H PART 1 page C - 1

2.3.4 19” Monitor TV (optional)

3 STORAGE AND TRANSPORT 3.1 to 3.2 A 30/08/13

revision H PART 1 page C - 2

1 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT

1.1 COMPOSITION OF THE SYSTEM WITH PIXIUM RF4343 DETECTOR

The system consists of:

1. Flat-panel X-Ray detector (PIXIUM RF4343), comprising:

The following options are also available:

9. Dose Area Meter

revision C PART 1 page 1. 1

Composition with optional

1.2 APPLICATIONS AND OPERATING MODES

The system also offers the following methods of image acquisition:

revision C PART 1 page 1. 2

* THE DEVICE IS NOT INTENDED FOR INTERVENTIONAL USE. ANY INDICATION

revision C PART 1 page 1. 3

1.3.1 ELECTRICAL SAFETY

1.3.2 IONISING RADIATION PROTECTION

* Where necessary, use radiation protection accessories.

1.3.3 RESIDUAL RISKS

Avoid hitting the monitor with any objects.

revision C PART 1 page 1. 4

1.4 GUIDANCE AND MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION

1.4.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS

revision C PART 1 page 1. 5

1.4.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY

Electrostatic discharge ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be made from

revision C PART 1 page 1. 6

Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF

where P is the maximum output